US20190203213A1 - Growth Hormones with Prolonged In-Vivo Efficacy - Google Patents

Growth Hormones with Prolonged In-Vivo Efficacy Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20190203213A1
US20190203213A1 US16/354,651 US201916354651A US2019203213A1 US 20190203213 A1 US20190203213 A1 US 20190203213A1 US 201916354651 A US201916354651 A US 201916354651A US 2019203213 A1 US2019203213 A1 US 2019203213A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
nhc
conjugate
growth hormone
independently
alkyl
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US16/354,651
Inventor
Carsten Behrens
Nils Langeland Johansen
Henrik Sune Andersen
Leif Noerskov-Lauritsen
Jens Buchardt
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Novo Nordisk Health Care AG
Original Assignee
Novo Nordisk Health Care AG
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Novo Nordisk Health Care AG filed Critical Novo Nordisk Health Care AG
Priority to US16/354,651 priority Critical patent/US20190203213A1/en
Publication of US20190203213A1 publication Critical patent/US20190203213A1/en
Priority to US16/712,651 priority patent/US20200102568A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N15/00—Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
    • C12N15/09—Recombinant DNA-technology
    • C12N15/63—Introduction of foreign genetic material using vectors; Vectors; Use of hosts therefor; Regulation of expression
    • C12N15/70—Vectors or expression systems specially adapted for E. coli
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/16—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/17—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • A61K38/22—Hormones
    • A61K38/27—Growth hormone [GH], i.e. somatotropin
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/54—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/54—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound
    • A61K47/542—Carboxylic acids, e.g. a fatty acid or an amino acid
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/54—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound
    • A61K47/545—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/62—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being a protein, peptide or polyamino acid
    • A61K47/64—Drug-peptide, drug-protein or drug-polyamino acid conjugates, i.e. the modifying agent being a peptide, protein or polyamino acid which is covalently bonded or complexed to a therapeutically active agent
    • A61K47/643—Albumins, e.g. HSA, BSA, ovalbumin or a Keyhole Limpet Hemocyanin [KHL]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P5/00—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P5/00—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
    • A61P5/06—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the anterior pituitary hormones, e.g. TSH, ACTH, FSH, LH, PRL, GH
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/575—Hormones
    • C07K14/61—Growth hormone [GH], i.e. somatotropin
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N30/00—Investigating or analysing materials by separation into components using adsorption, absorption or similar phenomena or using ion-exchange, e.g. chromatography or field flow fractionation
    • G01N30/02—Column chromatography
    • G01N2030/022—Column chromatography characterised by the kind of separation mechanism
    • G01N2030/027—Liquid chromatography

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a growth hormone compound linked to an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer, and to methods of preparing and using such compounds. These growth hormone conjugates have increased resistance to proteolytic degradation in combination with a protracted profile of action and are useful in therapy.
  • Growth hormone is a polypeptide hormone secreted by the anterior pituitary in mammals.
  • Dependent on species growth hormone is a protein composed of approximately 190 amino acid residues corresponding to a molecular weight of approximately 22 kDa.
  • Growth hormone binds to and signals through cell surface receptors, the growth hormone receptors (GHR).
  • GHR growth hormone receptors
  • Growth hormone plays a key role in promoting growth, maintaining normal body composition, anabolism and lipid metabolism. It also has direct effects on intermediate metabolism, such as decreased glucose uptake, increased lipolysis, increased amino acid uptake and protein synthesis.
  • the hormone also exerts effects on other tissues including adipose tissue, liver, intestine, kidney, skeleton, connective tissue and muscle.
  • hGH human growth hormone
  • GenotropinTM Pulacia Upjohn
  • NutropinTM and ProtropinTM Genentech
  • HumatropeTM Eli Lilly
  • SerostimTM SerostimTM
  • Norditropin Novo Nordisk
  • Omnitrope Sandoz
  • Nutropin Depot Genentech and Alkermes.
  • an analogue with an additional methionine residue at the N-terminal end is also marketed as, for ex: SomatonormTM (Pharmacia Upjohn/Pfizer).
  • Growth hormone shares a common topology with the other members of the growth hormone family of proteins, Prolactin (PRL) and Placental Lactogen (PL). Growth hormone is classified as a four-helix bundle protein ( FIG. 1 ) exhibiting an “up-up-down-down” topology with two conserved disulphide linkages.
  • wild-type human Growth hormone (hGH) is composed of 191 amino acid residues and has four cysteine residues at positions 53, 165, 182 and 189, which stabilizes the three dimensional structure of the protein by forming two intramolecular disulphide bonds connecting C53 with C165 and C182 with C189, respectively ( FIG. 1 ).
  • hGH has been experimentally determined by X-ray crystallography in the free form (Chantalet L. et al Protein and Peptide Letters 3, 333-340, (1995)) and in complex with its binding protein (the extra cellular domain of the human GHR (hGHR)) (Devos, A. M. et al Science 255, 306-312, (1992)).
  • hGHR human GHR
  • hGH has been studied by Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR) spectroscopy (Kasimova M. R. et al. J. Mol. Biol. 318, 679-695, (2002)).
  • NMR Nuclear Magnetic Resonance
  • the X-ray and NMR data can distinguish regions of hGH which are well structured and well defined from regions which are less structured and dynamic. Less structured and dynamic regions of hGH are expected to be particularly susceptible to proteolytic cleavage and proper stabilization of such regions would lead to improved proteolytic stability.
  • hGH has been subject to extensive mutagenesis in attempts to produce hGH analogues with desired chemical or biological properties. Specifically, cysteine mutants for several purposes have been described.
  • cysteine variants of members of the GH supergene family disclose cysteine variants of members of the GH supergene family.
  • a general method is provided for creating site-specific, biologically active conjugates of these proteins. The method involves adding cysteine residues to non-essential regions of the proteins or substituting cysteine residues for non-essential amino acids in the proteins using site-directed mutagenesis and then covalently coupling a cysteine-reactive polymer or other type of cysteine-reactive moiety to the proteins via the added cysteine residue
  • WO 02/055532 describes genetically engineered hGH mutants having at least one non-polypeptide moiety covalently attached, particularly hGH mutants where a introduced cysteine residue was used for pegylation.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,951,972 describes physiologically active derivatized natural and recombinant mammalian and human proteins and polypeptides wherein at least one-naturally-occurring or incorporated cysteine residue within the protein is derivatized with various substituents.
  • proteolytic cleavage of hGH has been studied in detail.
  • the long loop composed of residues 128 to 154 has putative cleavage sites for several proteases, such as thrombin, plasmin, collagenase, subtilisin and chymotrypsin-like serine proteases. Accordingly, this part of hGH has been shown to be particularly susceptible to proteolytic cleavage (Lewis, U. J. Ann. Rev. Physiol. 46, 33-42, (1984)).
  • Enzymes reported to degrade hGH include thrombin, plasmin, subtilisin, chymotrypsin-like serine proteinases and kallikreins.
  • EP 534568 describes hGH mutants stabilized towards proteolytic degradation by mutating R134 to alanine, leucine, threonine, phenylalanine, proline or histidine.
  • WO 2004/022593/Nautilus describes general high through-put directed evolution methods to produce modified cytokines, including GH variants, with increased proteolytic stability.
  • WO 2006/048777/Nautilus specifically describes modified hGH analogues with improved proteolytic stability.
  • the analogues contain one to five mutations at positions 1-55, 57, 58, 60-63, 67-87, 89-91, 93, 95-100, 102-128, 131-132, 135-139, 141, 142, 144, 148-182, 184, 185 and 187-191.
  • Introduction of cysteine residues can potentially lead to the formation of undesired disulfide linked dimers and in WO 2006/048777 the substitution of amino acid residues by cysteine is specifically excluded from the scope; in WO 2006/048777 (p. 65) it is stated: “The replacement of amino acids by cysteine residues is explicitly avoided since this change would potentially lead to the formation of intermolecular disulfide bonds”.
  • hGH compounds which are resistant to proteolytic degradation. Such stabilized compounds should exhibit increased stability towards proteolytic cleavage while retaining the desired biological properties of hGH. Such GH molecules would have increased stability, slower clearance and/or prolong in vivo half-life.
  • carboxypeptidases to modify the C-terminal of peptides has been described earlier.
  • WO 92/05271 discloses the use of carboxypeptidases and nucleophilic compounds to amidate the C-terminal carboxy group
  • WO 98/38285 discloses variants of carboxypeptidase Y particular suitable for this purpose.
  • EP 243 929 discloses the use of carboxypeptidase to incorporate polypeptides, reporter groups or cytotoxic agents into the C-terminal of proteins or polypeptides.
  • WO 2005/035553 describes methods for selective conjugation of peptides by enzymatically incorporating a functional group at the C-terminal of a peptide.
  • Activated halogen derivatives and maleimides represent some of the most common used functional groups when incorporateing conjugates to sulfhydryl groups in peptides (G. T. Hermanson in Bioconjugate Techniques 2. Ed. 2008, Elsevier).
  • Transglutaminase has previously been used to alter the properties of peptides. In the food industry and particular in the diary industry many techniques are available to e.g. cross-bind peptides using transglutaminases. Other documents disclose the use of transglutaminase to alter the properties of physiologically active peptides. EP 950665, EP 785276 and Sato, Adv. Drug Delivery Rev. 54, 487-504, (2002) disclose the direct reaction between peptides comprising at least one Gin and amine-functionalised PEG or similar ligands in the presence of transglutaminase, and Wada, Biotech. Lett.
  • Growth hormone is a key hormone involved in the regulation of not only somatic growth, but also in the regulation of metabolism of proteins, carbohydrates and lipids. The major effect of growth hormone is to promote growth.
  • Human growth hormone is a 191 amino acid residue protein with the sequence:
  • growth hormone is administered parenterally, i.e., by means of a needle.
  • Growth hormone is, furthermore, characterised by a relative short half-life, hence frequent administrations are required with the corresponding pain and inconvenience for the patient.
  • pharmacological properties such as e.g. prolonged half-life.
  • the present invention provides novel growth hormone compound conjugates with improved pharmakinetic and pharmacological properties as well as methods for their production.
  • the bioavailability of a subcutaneously administed pharmaceutical compound may be related to the absorption rate.
  • the ability of a compound to pass the tight junctions of the subcutaneous capillaries may in part be related to their physical and chemical properties as well as the molecular size or the hydrodynamic volume of the compound.
  • a protein conjugate such as a pegylated hGH (PEG-hGH) with a 40 kDa PEG has an apparent molecular weight of 150-250 kDa.
  • a hGH molecule with covalent bound albumin has a molecular weight of 87 kDa, whereas a hGH molecule with a non-covalent bound albumin will be dissociated from albumin part of the time and thus have a molecular weight of 22 kDa.
  • the time spend in the dissociated state depends, at least partly, on the affinity of the albumin binding moiety.
  • the absorption rate of a hGH molecule with a non-covalent bound albumin may be faster than for a PEG-hGH.
  • An increased rate of absorption may be obtained when using albumin binding moieties having lower affinity for albumin.
  • linker and/or the spacer providing the attachment of the albumin binding moiety to hGH will influence the functionalities of the compounds.
  • GH growth hormone compounds
  • a single Cys mutation and/or an additional disulfide bridge may be selectively linked to an albumin binding residue—via a hydrophilic spacer that separates the GH and the albumin binding residue, typically with a chemical moiety having a m Log P ⁇ 0—or a c Log P ⁇ 0.5 to obtain GH conjugates with improved properties, such as high in vitro potency, or such as an increase in vivo half life, or such as increased resistant to proteolytic degradation possibly in combination with a protracted in vivo profile of action.
  • a hydrophilic spacer By linking an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer to the single Cys mutation the biological activity may be retained and one or more of the above mention improvements may be obtained.
  • an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to the growth hormone having an additional disulfide bridge, such as to the N-terminal, position 40 or position 141 of hGH.
  • the growth hormone compound may also comprise both a single Cys mutation and an additional disulfide bridge, in which aspect the albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to the single Cys mutation.
  • the present invention relates to a growth hormone conjugate which comprises a growth hormone compound (GH) having
  • an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to said GH, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • the stable hGH compounds have additional disulphide bond(s).
  • the disulphide bonds are formed between pairs of cysteines of which one or both are introduced by point mutations in the wild type hGH sequence.
  • the stable hGH compounds have additional cysteines.
  • the cysteines are introduced by point mutations in the wild type hGH sequence.
  • the stable hGH compounds have additional disulphide bond(s) and one or more additional cysteines.
  • the additional disulphide bond(s) formed between pairs of additional cysteines and the additional cysteines are introduced by point mutations in the wild type hGH sequence.
  • an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer in human growth hormone (hGH) can be done selectively wherein a large proportion of the activity has been retained.
  • an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is introduced at the position(s) corresponding to the introduced cystein(s) and/or in position glutamine 40 and/or in position glutamine 141 and/or the N-terminal in hGH having the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • transglutaminase and in particular TGase from Streptoverticillium mobaraenae or Streptomyces lydicus allows a selective introduction of an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer at position 40 or position 141, and the remaining 11 glutamine residues are left untouched despite the fact that glutamine is a substrate for transglutaminase.
  • the growth hormone compound (GH) is linked to one albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer.
  • the albumin binding residue is attached to the N-terminal, or to position 18, 30, 40, 42, 62, 69, 88, 95, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 108, 135, 141 or 154 of hGH via a hydrophilic spacer.
  • two albumin binding residues are attached to the single Cys mutation and any one of the above positions, such as the N-terminal, position 40 or position 141 of hGH via a hydrophilic spacer.
  • the growth hormone compound conjugates of the present invention have faster subcutaneous absorption compared to PEGylated hGH, and thus, provides less or no lipoathrophy. Furthermore, the albumin binding residue and the hydrophilic spacer are biodegradable in contrast to PEG.
  • the invention relates to isolated growth hormone compounds (GH) comprising a single cys mutation, an additional disulfide bond or growth hormone compounds comprising a single cys mutation and an additional disulfide bond.
  • GH growth hormone compounds
  • such compounds are soluble.
  • FIG. 1 is a depiction of the three dimensional structure of wild-type human growth hormone. The depiction shows the intramolecular disulphide bonds connecting C53 with C165 and C182 with C189.
  • FIG. 2 is a depiction of the sequence of human growth hormone and designates loop and helical segments.
  • growth hormone compound means growth hormone of mammalian origin, such as human, bovine, or porcine growth hormone, and recombinant growth hormone, such as recombinant human, bovine, or porcine growth hormone, and variants as well as mutants of such growth hormones.
  • GH growth hormone compound
  • growth hormone compound is interchangeable.
  • GH is a variant of growth hormone of mammalian origin, such as hGH and recombinant hGH, said variant is understood to be the compound obtained by substituting one or more amino acid residues in the growth hormone, e.g.
  • the GH has at least 80% identity with hGH, and typically, at least 10% of the growth hormone activity of hGH as determined in assay (I) (Example 46) herein.
  • albumin binding residue means a residue which binds noncovalently to human serum albumin.
  • the albumin binding residue attached to the growth hormone compound (GH) typically has a binding affinity towards human serum albumin that is below about 10 ⁇ M or even below about 1 ⁇ M.
  • a range of albumin binding residues are known among linear and branched lipohophillic moieties containing 12-40 carbon atoms, compounds with a cyclopentanophenanthrene skeleton, and/or peptides having 10-45 amino acid residues etc.
  • Albumin binding properties can be measured by surface plasmon resonance as described in J. Biol. Chem. 277(38), 35035-35042, (2002).
  • hydrophilic spacer as used herein means a spacer that separates a growth hormone compound and an albumin binding residue with a chemical moiety which comprises at least 5 nonhydrogen atoms where 30-50% of these are either N or O.
  • the term “transamination” and related terms are intended to indicate a reaction wherein the amide nitrogen in the side chain of glutamine is exchanged with nitrogen from another compound, in particular nitrogen from another nitrogen containing nucelophile.
  • Transglutaminase (E.C.2.3.2.13) is also known as protein-glutamine-yglutamyltransferase and catalyses the general reaction
  • Q-C(O)—NH 2 (amine acceptor) may represent a glutamine residue containing peptide or protein and Q′-NH 2 (amine donor) represents an amine-containing nucleophile.
  • Q′-NH 2 (amine donor) represents an amine-containing nucleophile.
  • QC—(O)—NH 2 and Q′-NH 2 may represent an amine acceptor and a lysine-containing peptide or protein, respectively.
  • Q-C(O)—NH 2 represents a glutamine residue containing growth hormone
  • Q′-NH 2 represents an amine-containing nucleophile as indicated above.
  • transglutaminases examples include microbial transglutaminases, such as e.g. those from Streptomyces mobaraense, Streptomyces cinnamoneum and Streptomyces griseocarneum (all disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,156,956, which is incorporated herein by reference), and from Streptomyces lavendulae (disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,252,469, which is incorporated herein by reference) and Streptomyces ladakanum (JP 2003/199569, which is incorporated herein by reference).
  • microbial transglutaminases such as e.g. those from Streptomyces mobaraense, Streptomyces cinnamoneum and Streptomyces griseocarneum (all disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,156,956, which is incorporated herein by reference), and from Streptomyces lavendulae (disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,
  • transglutaminases include guinea-pig liver transglutaminase, and transglutaminases from various marine sources like the flat fish Pagrus major (disclosed in EP-0555649, which is incorporated herein by reference), and the Japanese oyster Crassostrea gigas (disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,736,356, which is incorporated herein by reference).
  • not accessible is intended to indicate that something is absent or de facto absent in the sense that it cannot be reached.
  • functional groups are not accessible in a protein to be conjugated it is intended to indicate that said functional group is absent from the protein or, if present, in some way prevented from taking part in reactions.
  • said functional group could be buried deep in the structure of the protein so that it is shielded from participating in the reaction. It is recognised that whether or not a functional group is accessible depends on the reaction conditions. It may be envisaged that, e.g. in the presence of denaturing agents or at elevated temperatures the protein may unfold to expose otherwise not accessible functional groups. It is to be understood that “not accessible” means “not accessible at the reaction condition chosen for the particular reaction of interest”.
  • alkane or “alkyl” is intended to indicate a saturated, linear, branched and/or cyclic hydrocarbon. Unless specified with another number of carbon atoms, the term is intended to indicate hydrocarbons with from 1 to 30 (both included) carbon atoms, such as 1 to 20 (both included), such as from 1 to 10 (both included), e.g. from 1 to 5 (both included).
  • alkyl and alkylene refer to the corresponding radical and bi-radical, respectively.
  • C 1-6 alkyl refers to a straight chained or branched saturated hydrocarbon having from one to six carbon atoms inclusive. Examples of such groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, 2-propyl, 1-butyl, 2-butyl, 2-methyl-2-propyl, 2-methyl-1-butyl and n-hexyl.
  • C 3-10 cycloalkyl typically refers to cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclononyl, and cyclodecanyl.
  • alkene is intended to indicate linear, branched and/or cyclic hydrocarbons comprising at least one carbon-carbon double bond. Unless specified with another number of carbon atoms, the term is intended to indicate hydrocarbons with from 2 to 30 (both included) carbon atoms, such as 2 to 20 (both included), such as from 2 to 10 (both included), e.g. from 2 to 5 (both included).
  • alkenyl and alkenylene refer to the corresponding radical and bi-radical, respectively.
  • alkyne is intended to indicate linear, branched and/or cyclic hydrocarbons comprising at least one carbon-carbon triple bond, and it may optionally comprise one or more carbon-carbon double bonds. Unless specified with another number of carbon atoms, the term is intended to indicate hydrocarbons with from 2 to 30 (both included) carbon atoms, such as from 2 to 20 (both included), such as from 2 to 10 (both included), e.g. from 2 to 5 (both included).
  • alkynyl and alkynylene refer to the corresponding radical and bi-radical, respectively.
  • homocyclic aromatic compound is intended to indicate aromatic hydrocarbons, such as benzene and naphthalene.
  • heterocyclic compound is intended to indicate a cyclic compound comprising 5, 6 or 7 ring atoms from which 1, 2, 3 or 4 are hetero atoms selected from N, O and/or S.
  • heterocyclic aromatic compounds such as thiophene, furan, pyran, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, isothiazole, isooxazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, as well as their partly or fully hydrogenated equivalents, such as piperidine, pirazolidine, pyrrolidine, pyroline, imidazolidine, imidazoline, piperazine and morpholine.
  • hetero alkane “hetero alkene” and “hetero alkyne” are intended to indicate alkanes, alkenes and alkynes as defined above, in which one or more hetero atom or group have been inserted into the structure of said moieties.
  • hetero groups and atoms include —O—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O) 2 —, —C(O)—C(S)— and —N(R*)—, wherein R* represents hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 -alkyl.
  • heteroalkanes include.
  • radical or “biradical” is intended to indicate a compound from which one or two, respectively, hydrogen atoms have been removed.
  • a radical may also indicate the moiety formed by the formal removal of a larger group of atoms, e.g. hydroxyl, from a compound.
  • halogen is intended to indicate members of the seventh main group of the periodic table, e.g. F, Cl, Br and I.
  • aryl is intended to indicate a carbocyclic aromatic ring radical or a fused aromatic ring system radical wherein at least one of the rings are aromatic.
  • Typical aryl groups include phenyl, biphenylyl, naphthyl, and the like.
  • heteroaryl or “hetaryl”, as used herein, alone or in combination, refers to an aromatic ring radical with for instance 5 to 7 member atoms, or to a fused aromatic ring system radical with for instance from 7 to 18 member atoms, wherein at least one ring is aromatic, containing one or more heteroatoms as ring atoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur heteroatoms, wherein N-oxides and sulfur monoxides and sulfur dioxides are permissible heteroaromatic substitutions.
  • Examples include furanyl, thienyl, thiophenyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyridinyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, indolyl, and indazolyl, and the like.
  • conjugate as a noun is intended to indicate a modified protein, i.e. a protein with a moiety bonded to it in order to modify the properties of said protein.
  • conjugate is intended to indicate the process of bonding a moiety to a protein to modify the properties of said protein.
  • single cys or a “free cysteine” refers to a cysteine residue, which is not engaged in double bond.
  • a protein may thus include one or more single cys residues in addition to one or more additional disulfide bridge(s), as long as said single cys's do not lead to internal disulfide bridge(s).
  • prodrug indicates biohydrolyzable amides and biohydrolyzable esters and also encompasses a) compounds in which the biohydrolyzable functionality in such a prodrug is encompassed in the compound according to the present invention, and b) compounds which may be oxidized or reduced biologically at a given functional group to yield drug substances according to the present invention.
  • these functional groups include 1,4-dihydropyridine, N-alkylcarbonyl-1,4-dihydropyridine, 1,4-cyclohexadiene, tert-butyl, and the like.
  • biohydrolyzable ester is an ester of a drug substance (in casu, a compound according to the invention) which either a) does not interfere with the biological activity of the parent substance but confers on that substance advantageous properties in vivo such as duration of action, onset of action, and the like, or b) is biologically inactive but is readily converted in vivo by the subject to the biologically active principle.
  • the advantage is, for example increased solubility or that the biohydrolyzable ester is orally absorbed from the gut and is transformed to a compound according to the present invention in plasma.
  • lower alkyl esters e.g., C 1 -C 4
  • lower acyloxyalkyl esters lower alkoxyacyloxyalkyl esters
  • alkoxyacyloxy esters alkyl acylamino alkyl esters
  • choline esters e.g., choline esters
  • biohydrolyzable amide is an amide of a drug substance (in casu, a compound according to the present invention) which either a) does not interfere with the biological activity of the parent substance but confers on that substance advantageous properties in vivo such as duration of action, onset of action, and the like, or b) is biologically inactive but is readily converted in vivo by the subject to the biologically active principle.
  • the advantage is, for example increased solubility or that the biohydrolyzable amide is orally absorbed from the gut and is transformed to a compound according to the present invention in plasma.
  • Many examples of such are known in the art and include by way of example lower alkyl amides, ⁇ -amino acid amides, alkoxyacyl amides, and alkylaminoalkylcarbonyl amides.
  • salts are intended to indicate salts which are not harmful to the patient.
  • Such salts include pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts, pharmaceutically acceptable metal salts, ammonium and alkylated ammonium salts.
  • Acid addition salts include salts of inorganic acids as well as organic acids. Representative examples of suitable inorganic acids include hydrochloric, hydrobromic, hydroiodic, phosphoric, sulfuric, nitric acids and the like.
  • suitable organic acids include formic, acetic, trichloroacetic, trifluoroacetic, propionic, benzoic, cinnamic, citric, fumaric, glycolic, lactic, maleic, malic, malonic, mandelic, oxalic, picric, pyruvic, salicylic, succinic, methanesulfonic, ethanesulfonic, tartaric, ascorbic, pamoic, bismethylene salicylic, ethanedisulfonic, gluconic, citraconic, aspartic, stearic, palmitic, EDTA, glycolic, p-aminobenzoic, glutamic, benzenesulfonic, p-toluenesulfonic acids and the like.
  • compositions include the pharmaceutically acceptable salts listed in J. Pharm. Sci. 66, 2, (1977) which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • metal salts include lithium, sodium, potassium, magnesium salts and the like.
  • ammonium and alkylated ammonium salts include ammonium, methylammonium, dimethylammonium, trimethylammonium, ethylammonium, hydroxyethylammonium, diethylammonium, butylammonium, tetramethylammonium salts and the like.
  • a “therapeutically effective amount” of a compound as used herein means an amount sufficient to cure, alleviate or partially arrest the clinical manifestations of a given disease and its complications. An amount adequate to accomplish this is defined as “therapeutically effective amount”. Effective amounts for each purpose will depend on the severity of the disease or injury as well as the weight and general state of the subject. It will be understood that determining an appropriate dosage may be achieved using routine experimentation, by constructing a matrix of values and testing different points in the matrix, which is all within the ordinary skills of a trained physician or veterinary.
  • treatment means the management and care of a patient for the purpose of combating a condition, such as a disease or a disorder.
  • the term is intended to include the full spectrum of treatments for a given condition from which the patient is suffering, such as administration of the active compound to alleviate the symptoms or complications, to delay the progression of the disease, disorder or condition, to alleviate or relief the symptoms and complications, and/or to cure or eliminate the disease, disorder or condition as well as to prevent the condition, wherein prevention is to be understood as the management and care of a patient for the purpose of combating the disease, condition, or disorder and includes the administration of the active compounds to prevent the onset of the symptoms or complications.
  • the patient to be treated is preferably a mammal; in particular a human being, but it may also include animals, such as dogs, cats, cows, sheep and pigs.
  • the present invention relates to a stable growth hormone conjugate which comprises a growth hormone compound (GH) having
  • an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to the sulphur residue of the Cys.
  • an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to a position in the growth hormone compound, such as position 40, position 141 or the N-terminal of hGH, as described herein.
  • albumin binding residues When two or more albumin binding residues are linked to the growth hormone compound via a hydrophilic spacer, then such albumin binding residues are linked to a single Cys mutation if such mutation is present or if only an additional disulphide bridge is present then an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to a position in the growth hormone compound as described herein.
  • the growth hormone compound has one single Cys mutation.
  • the growth hormone compound has two single Cys mutations.
  • the growth hormone compound has an additional disulfide bridge.
  • the growth hormone compound has one single Cys mutation and one additional disulfide bridge.
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 90% identity to the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone (hGH) (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • GH has at least 80%, such as at least 85%, such as at least 95% identity with hGH, such at at least 96%, such as at least 97%, such as at least 98% or such as at least 99% identity with SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • said identities to hGH is coupled to at least 10%, such as at least 20%, such as at least 40%, such as at least 60%, such as at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH as determined in assay I herein.
  • Any one of the sequence identity embodiments may be combined with any one of the activity embodiments, such as a GH having at least 80% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 60% of the growth hormone activity of hGH; a GH having at least 90% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 40% of the growth hormone activity of hGH; a GH having at least 95% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH, and so forth.
  • HG may be expressed as MetHG which indicates that the sequence comprise an additional N-terminal methionine.
  • GH is a growth hormone variant wherein a single Cys mutation is introduced. In further embodiments GH represents a growth hormone compound containing one to five mutations in addition to a single Cys mutation.
  • the albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to the single Cys mutation.
  • the single Cys mutation is position in the N-terminal, H1, H2, L2 or H3 of GH.
  • the single Cys mutation is positioned in the N-terminal, the mutation being such as any one of T3C, P5C, S7C, or in H1 (corresponding to AA 9-35), the mutation being such as any one of D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, or in L1 (corresponding to AA36-71), the muation being such as any one of K38C, E39C, Y42C, S43C, D47C, P48C, 555, S57C, P59C, S62C, E65C, Q69C or preferably any one of Y42C, S55C, S57C, S62C, Q69C or in H2, L2 or H3 (corresponding to
  • the mutation is located in corresponding amino acid residues.
  • the GH the single Cys mutation has been introduced in a position equivalent to a parent GH that is equivalent to a position of hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1) selected from the group consisting of: T3, P5, S7, D11, H18, Q29, E30, E33, A34, Y35, K38, E39, Y42, S43, D47, P48, S55, S57, P59, S62, E65, Q69, E88, Q91, S95, A98, N99, S100, L101, V102, Y103, D107, S108, D112, Q122, G126, E129, D130, G131, P133, T135, G136, T142, D147, N149, D154, A155, L156, R178, E186, G187 and G190, such as the group consisting of: T3, P5, S7, D11, H18, Q29, E30, E33, A34, Y35, E88, Q91, S95, A
  • the single Cys mutation is located within AA 93-106 in hGH or corresponding residues in hGH variants. In further specified embodiments the single Cys mutation is located within L2, such as within AA 99-106 or AA 99-103 or corresponding residues.
  • a typical single Cys mutation is E30C.
  • a further typical single Cys mutation is Y42C.
  • a further typical single Cys mutation is S55C.
  • a further typical single Cys mutation is S57C.
  • a further typical single Cys mutation is S62C.
  • a further typical single Cys mutation is Q69C.
  • a further typical single Cys mutation is S95C.
  • a further typical single Cys mutation is A98C.
  • a further typical single Cys mutation is N99C.
  • a further typical single Cys mutation is S100C.
  • a further typical single Cys mutation is L101C.
  • a further typical single Cys mutation is V102C.
  • a further typical single Cys mutation is S108C.
  • the bundle consists of four major helices: first helix (A) from residue 9 to 34, second helix (B) from residue 72 to 92 and from residue 94 to 100, third helix (C) from residue 106 to 128, and fourth helix (D) from residue 155 to 184 (M. R. Kasimova et. al. J. Mol. Biol. 318, 679-695, (2002)).
  • the four main helices are referred to as the core of the protein.
  • Residues that are not part of the helical regions are defined as loop residues, and may be part of flexible regions, loops, ⁇ -turns, hairpins and coils.
  • a slightly different localization of helix's is obtained when hGH is in complex with its binding protein (PDB: 1 HWG), which is the helix defintion referred to above.
  • the invention relates to a GH conjugate comprising at least one introduced cysteine residue which residue has been introduced in a position equivalent to a position in a helix or loop region of hGH.
  • the amino acid residues may be introduced in a surface exposed position in a helix or loop region that has more than 25% of its side chain exposed at the surface, preferably more than 50% of its side chain exposed at the surface, e.g. in a model structure of hGH alone or in a model structure of hGH complexed to its two receptor molecules.
  • the position in the helix or the loop is equivalent to a position outside a receptor binding site of hGH.
  • Surface exposed residues may be identified using computational chemistry algorithms.
  • relative surface accessibilities can be calculated with the computer program Quanta 2005 from Accelrys Inc. using the atomic coordinates from the publically available structures (PDB accession codes 1HGU and 1HWG structure) and default parameter settings.
  • PDB accession codes 1HGU and 1HWG structure publically available structures
  • a description of the underlying principle behind the algorithm can be found in B. Lee and F. M. Richards, “The Interpretation of Protein Structures: Estimation of Static Accessibility” J. Mol. Biol. 55, 379-400, (1971).
  • albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to the GH having an additional disulfide bridge.
  • the albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to the N-terminal, position 40 or position 141 of hGH.
  • the GH comprises additional disulfide bonds between a loop segment and a helical segment or within loop segment or between loop segments or between helical segments.
  • the GH comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein at least one of the cysteines is present in a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154 (L3).
  • the GH comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein the additional disulfide bond connects a loop segment with a helical segment.
  • the GH comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein the additional disulfide bond connects a loop segment with helix B or helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98).
  • the GH comprises and additional disulfide bond linking helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98) with loop 3 (corresponding to AA 128-154).
  • the GH comprise an addition disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I138C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, Q84C/S144C, S85C/Y143C, S
  • the additional disulfide bridge of GH is between at least one of the amino acid pairs in the positions corresponding to R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H18C/Y143C, H21C/M170C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I138C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, P89C/F146C, F92C/F146C, F92C/T148C, R94C/D107C, V102C/A105C, L156C/F146
  • the additional disulfide bond is between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, F92C/T148C and/or R94C/D107C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • the additional disulfide bond is between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, F92C/T148C and/or R94C/D107C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • the additional disulfide bond is between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C and/or S85C/S144C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • the additional disulfide bond is between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to S57C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C and/or S85C/S144C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • the additional disulfide bridge is Q84C/Y143C.
  • the albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to the GH having a single Cys mutation and an additional disulfide bridge.
  • the albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to the single Cys mutation.
  • the GH has an additional disulfide bridge Q84C/Y143C and a single Cys mutation L101C where to the albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked.
  • the GH has an additional disulfide bond and a single Cys mutation selected from any one of: T3C, P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, K38C, E39C, Y42C, S43C, D47C, P48C, S55C, S57C, P59C, S62, E65C, Q69C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C, G126C, E129C, D130C, G131C, P133C, T135C, G136C, T142C, D147C, N149C, D154C, A155C, L156C, R178C, E186C, G187C and G190C, such as any one of; T3C, P5C, S7C,
  • the GH has an additional disulfide bond and a single Cys mutation, and said single Cys mutation has been introduced in a position equivalent to a parent GH that is equivalent to a position of hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1) selected from the group consisting of: T3, P5, S7, D11, H18, Q29, E30, E33, A34, Y35, K38, E39, Y42, S43, D47, P48, S55, S57, P59, S62, E65, Q69, E88, Q91, S95, A98, N99, S100, L101, V102, Y103, D107, S108, D112, Q122, G126, E129, D130, G131, P133, T135, G136, T142, D147, N149, D154, A155, L156, R178, E186, G187 and G190, preferably the group; T3, P5, S7, D11, H18, Q29, E30, E33, A
  • the GH comprises a single cys mutation and additional disulfide bonds between a loop segment and a helical segment or within loop segment or between loop segments or between helical segments.
  • the GH comprises a single cys mutation and an additional disulfide bond wherein at least one of the cysteines is present in a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154 (L3).
  • the GH comprises a single cys mutation and an additional disulfide bond wherein the additional disulfide bond which connects a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154, with a helical segment, such as helix B or helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98).
  • the GH comprises a single cys mutation and additional disulfide bond linking helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98) with loop 3 (corresponding to AA 128-154).
  • the GH comprises a single cys mutation and an addition disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I138C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, Q84C/S144C,
  • the GH comprises a single cys mutation and an additional disulfide bridge between at least one of the amino acid pairs in the positions corresponding to R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H18C/Y143C, H21C/M170C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I138C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, P89C/F146C, F92C/F146C, F92C/T148C, R94C/D107C, V102C/A
  • the GH comprises a single cys mutation and an additional disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, F92C/T148C and/or R94C/D107C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • the additional disulfide bond is between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, F92C/T148C and/or R94C/D107C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • the GH comprises a single cys mutation and an additional disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, S55C/Y143C, 557C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C and/or S85C/S144C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • the GH comprises a single cys mutation and an additional disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to S57C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C and/or S85C/S144C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • Solubility of a hydrophilic spacer can be described by its log P value.
  • Log P also known as the partition coefficient, is the logarithm of the ratio of concentrations of a compound in the two phases of a mixture of two immiscible solvents at equilibrium. Typically one of the solvents is water while the second is selected from octan-1-ol, chloroform, cyclohexane and propylene glycol dipelargonate (PGDP).
  • Log P values measured in these different solvents show differences principally due to hydrogen bonding effects. Octanol can donate and accept hydrogen bonds whereas cyclohexane is inert. Chloroform can donate hydrogen bonds whereas PGDP can only accept them. Log P values may be measured by standard methods know in the art.
  • the hydrophilic spacer has a Log P below 0, such as below 0.5 in either octan-1-ol, chloroform, cyclohexane and propylene glycol dipelargonate (PGDP).
  • the hydrophilic spacer has a log P below ⁇ 1 in either octan-1-ol, chloroform, cyclohexane and propylene glycol dipelargonate (PGDP).
  • the Log P value can be calculated as m Log P and/or c Log P for the albumin binder part or hydrophilic spacer part using published algorithms (T. Fujita; J. Iwasa and C. Hansch, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 86, 5175-5180, (1964) “A New Substituent Constant, Pi, Derived from Partition Coefficients”, C. A. Lipinski et al. Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews, 23, 3-25, (1997) “Experimental and Computational Approaches to Estimate Solubility and Permeability in Drug Discovery and Development Settings” and I. Moriguchi, S. Hirono, I. Nakagome, H. Hirano, Chem. Pharm. Bull. 42, 976-978, (1994) “Comparison of Reliability of log P Values for Drugs Calculated by Several Methods”).
  • the hydrophilic spacer (B) has a m Log P ⁇ 0.
  • the growth hormone compound (GH) is linked to one albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer (B).
  • the growth hormone compound (GH) is linked to an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer (B) coupled to a free cysteine in the growth hormone compound (GH).
  • the growth hormone compound (GH) is linked to two albumin binding residues via one or two hydrophilic spacer(s).
  • one albumin binding residue is linked via one hydrophilic spacer (B) to the single Cys mutation and the other albumin binding residue is linked via one hydrophilic spacer (B′) to glutamine in position 40 or position 141; or alternatively two albumin binding residues are linked via one hydrophilic spacer (B) to the single Cys mutation or to glutamine in position 40, position 141 or the N-terminal.
  • the growth hormone compound (GH) is linked to three albumin binding residues via one or more hydrophilic spacer(s).
  • the hydrophilic spacer comprise at least one OEG motif, the radical 8-amino-3,6-dioxaoctanic acid, i.e. —NH—(CH 2 ) 2 —O—(CH 2 ) 2 —O—CH 2 —C(O)—.
  • the hydrophilic spacer comprise at least two OEG motifs. The orientation of such OEG motif(s) is in one embodiment so that the —C(O)— is closest to the growth hormone compound but not connecting the growth hormone compound and the albumin binder linker and the —NH— is closest to the albumin binding residue.
  • the two motifs have identical orientation or different orientation.
  • two such OEG motifs are located adjactant to each other whereas in alternative embodiments such OEG mofifs are separated by one or more covalently linked atoms.
  • the hydrophilic spacer comprise at lease one glutamic acid residue.
  • the amino acid glutamic acid comprises two carboxylic acid groups. Its gamma-carboxy group may be used for forming an amide bond with the epsilon-amino group of lysine, or with an amino group of an OEG molecule, if present, or with the amino group of another Glu residue, if present.
  • the alfa-carboxy group may alternatively be used for forming a similar amide bond with the epsilon-amino group of lysine, or with an amino group of an OEG molecule, if present, or with the amino group of another Glu residue, if present.
  • the amino group of Glu may in turn form an amide bond with the carboxy group of the albumin binding residue, or with the carboxy group of an OEG motif, if present, or with the gamma-carboxy group or alfa carboxy group of another Glu, if present.
  • the linkage of the amino group of one Glu to a gamma-carboxy group of a second Glu may be referred to as a “gamma-Glu” motif.
  • the hydrophilic spacer comprise at least one combined OEG-Glu motif (—NH—(CH 2 ) 2 —O—(CH 2 ) 2 —O—CH 2 —C(O)NH—CH(C(O)OH)—(CH 2 ) 2 —C(O)—) or at least one combinde Glu-OEG motif (—NH—CH(C(O)OH)—(CH 2 ) 2 —C(O)NH—(CH 2 ) 2 —O—(CH 2 ) 2 —O—CH 2 —C(O)—) or combinations here of, where in such Glu-OEG and OEG-Glu motifs may be separated by one or more covalently linked atoms or directly bond to each other by an amide bond of the Glu's foming a gammal-Glu.
  • the present invention relates to a growth hormone conjugate wherein the growth hormone conjugate has the formula (I):
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound having a single Cys mutation
  • B represents a hydrophilic spacer linked to the sulphur residue of the Cys mutation
  • W is a chemical group linking A and B
  • A represent an albumin binding residue; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 90% identity to the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone (hGH) (SEQ ID NO:1).
  • GH has at least 80%, such as at least 85%, such as at least 95%, such as at least 96%, such as at least 97%, such as at least 98% or such as at least 99% identity with hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • said identities to hGH are coupled to at least 10%, such as at least 20%, such as at least 40%, such as at least 60%, such as at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH as determined in assay I herein.
  • Any one of the sequence identity embodiments may be combined with any one of the activity embodiments, such as a GH having at least 80% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 60% of the growth hormone activity of hGH; a GH having at least 90% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 40% of the growth hormone activity of hGH; a GH having at least 95% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH, and so forth.
  • the GH of the conjugate has a single Cys mutation selected from any one of a single Cys mutation in the N-terminal, H1, H2, L2 or H3 regions of GH.
  • the single Cys mutation is positioned in the N-terminal, the mutation being such as any one of T3C, P5C, S7C, or in H1 (corresponding to AA 9-35), the mutation being such as any one of D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, or in L1 (corresponding to AA36-71), the muation being such as any one of K38C, E39C, Y42C, S43C, D47C, P48C, S55, S57C, P59C, S62C, E65C, Q69C or preferably any one of Y42C, S55C, S57C, S62C, Q69C or in H2, L2 or H3 (corresponding to AA 72-98,
  • the mutation is located in corresponding amino acid residues.
  • GH conjugates wherein the single cys mutation in GH is selected from any one of: T3C, P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, K38C, E39C, Y42C, S43C, D47C, P48C, S55C, S57C, P59C, S62, E65C, Q69C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C, G126C, E129C, D130C, G131C, P133C, T135C, G136C, T142C, D147C, N149C, D154C, A155C, L156C, R178C, E186C, G187C and G190C, such as any one of; T3C, P5C, S7C, D
  • the single Cys mutation is located within AA 93-106 in hGH or corresponding residues in hGH variants. In further specified embodiments the single Cys mutation is located within L2, such as within AA 99-106 or AA 99-103 or corresponding residues.
  • B comprise or consist of one or more OEG, and/or gamma-Glu motiv as described above.
  • l1, l2, l3, l4, l5 and l6 independently are 0-6.
  • n1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are 0-6.
  • n2 and m5 independently are 0-10.
  • n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are 0-10.
  • D1 and D2 are independently selected from —O— or —N(R 6 )— or a valence bond.
  • E1 and E2 are independently selected from —O— or —N(R 6 )— or a valence bond.
  • W 1 through W 8 independently are selected from the group consisting of —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —CH 2 NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O) 2 —, —S(O) 2 NHC(O)—, —NHC(O)C 1-6 -alkyl, —C(O)NHC 1-6 -alkyl or a valence bond; wherein the alkyl group is optionally substituted with oxo, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH 2 COOH or —NHC(O)CH 2 CH*COOH; wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X 4 .
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , —S(O) 2 OH or C 1-6 -alkyl; wherein the C 1-6 -alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 or —S(O) 2 OH.
  • X 4 is a valence bond and W 6 is selected from either pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH 2 COOH or —NHC(O)CH 2 CH*COOH wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to GH.
  • the present invention relates to a growth hormone conjugate having the formula (I):
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound having an additional disulfide bridge
  • B represents a hydrophilic spacer
  • W is a chemical group linking A and B
  • A represent an albumin binding residue; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 90% identity to the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone (hGH) (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • GH has at least 80%, such as at least 85%, such as at least 95%, such as at least 96%, such as at least 97%, such as at least 98% or such as at least 99% identity with hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • said identities to hGH are coupled to at least 10%, such as at least 20%, such as at least 40%, such as at least 60%, such as at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH as determined in assay I herein.
  • Any one of the sequence identity embodiments may be combined with any one of the activity embodiments, such as a GH having at least 80% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 60% of the growth hormone activity of hGH; a GH having at least 90% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 40% of the growth hormone activity of hGH; a GH having at least 95% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH, and so forth.
  • the GH of the conjugate comprises additional disulfide bonds between a loop segment and a helical segment or within loop segment or between loop segments or between helical segments.
  • the GH of the conjugate comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein at least one of the cysteines is present in a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154.
  • the GH of the conjugate comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein the additional disulfide bond which connects a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154 (H3), with a helical segment, such as helix B or helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98).
  • a loop segment such from amino acid residues 128-154 (H3)
  • a helical segment such as helix B or helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98).
  • the GH of the conjugate comprises and additional disulfide bond linking helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98) with loop 3 (corresponding to AA 128-154).
  • the GH of the conjugate comprise an addition disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I138C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S/S, S
  • the additional disulfide bridge is between at least one of the amino acid pairs in the positions corresponding to R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H18C/Y143C, H21C/M170C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I138C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, P89C/F146C, F92C/F146C, F92C/T148C, R94C/D107C, V102C/A105C, L156C/F146C, L
  • the GH of the conjugate comprises an additional disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, F92C/T148C and/or R94C/D107C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • the additional disulfide bond is between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, F92C/T148C and/or R94C/D107C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • the GH of the conjugate comprise an additional disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C and/or S85C/S144C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • the GH of the conjugate comprises an additional disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to S57C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C and/or S85C/S144C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • B comprise or consist of one or more OEG, and/or gamma-Glu motiv(s) as described above.
  • l1, l2, l3, l4, l5 and l6 independently are 0-6.
  • n1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are 0-6.
  • n2 and m5 independently are 0-10.
  • n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are 0-10.
  • D1 and D2 are independently selected from —O— or —N(R 6 )— or a valence bond.
  • E1 and E2 are independently selected from —O— or —N(R 6 )— or a valence bond.
  • W 1 through W 8 independently are selected from the group consisting of —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —CH 2 NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O) 2 —, —S(O) 2 NHC(O)—, —NHC(O)C 1-6 -alkyl, —C(O)NHC 1-6 -alkyl or a valence bond; wherein the alkyl group is optionally substituted with oxo, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH 2 COOH or —NHC(O)CH 2 CH*COOH; wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X 4 .
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , —S(O) 2 OH or C 1-6 -alkyl; wherein the C 1-6 -alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 or —S(O) 2 OH.
  • a via B is attached to the glutamine residue in the position corresponding to position 40, position 141 in SEQ ID NO: 1, or the N-terminal residue of the growth hormone compound.
  • the present invention relates to a growth hormone conjugate wherein the growth hormone conjugate has the formula (I):
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound having a single Cys mutation and an additional disulfide bridge
  • B represents a hydrophilic spacer linked to the sulphur residue of the Cys mutation
  • W is a chemical group linking A and B
  • A represent an albumin binding residue
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 90% identity to the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone (hGH) (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • GH has at least 80%, such as at least 85%, such as at least 95%, such as at least 96%, such as at least 97%, such as at least 98% or such as at least 99% identity with hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • said identities to hGH are coupled to at least 10%, such as at least 20%, such as at least 40%, such as at least 60%, such as at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH as determined in assay I herein.
  • Any one of the sequence identity embodiments may be combined with any one of the activity embodiments, such as a GH having at least 80% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 60% of the growth hormone activity of hGH; a GH having at least 90% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 40% of the growth hormone activity of hGH; a GH having at least 95% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH, and so forth.
  • the GH of the conjugate has an additional disulfide bond an a single Cys mutation selected from any one of a single Cys mutation in the N-terminal, H1, H2, L2 or H3 regions of GH.
  • the single Cys mutation is positioned in the N-terminal, the mutation being such as any one of T3C, P5C, S7C, or in H1 (corresponding to AA 9-35), the mutation being such as any one of D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, or in L1 (corresponding to AA36-71), the muation being such as any one of K38C, E39C, Y42C, S43C, D47C, P48C, S55, S57C, P59C, S62C, E65C, Q69C or preferably any one of Y42C, S55C, S57C, S62C, Q69C or in H2, L2 or H3 (corresponding
  • the mutation is located in corresponding amino acid residues.
  • GH conjugates having an additional disulfide bond and a single cys mutation in GH is selected from any one of: T3C, P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, K38C, E39C, Y42C, S43C, D47C, P48C, 55C, S57C, P59C, S62, E65C, Q69C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C, G126C, E129C, D130C, G131C, P133C, T135C, G136C, T142C, D147C, N149C, D154C, A155C, L156C, R178C, E186C, G187C and G190C, such as any one of; T3C, P5
  • the single Cys mutation is located within AA 93-106 in hGH or corresponding residues in hGH variants. In further specified embodiments the single Cys mutation is located within L2, such as within AA 99-106 or AA 99-103 or corresponding residues.
  • the additional disulfide bond may be an additional disulfide bonds between a loop segment and a helical segment or within loop segment or between loop segments or between helical segments.
  • the GH comprises a single cys mutant and an additional disulfide bond wherein at least one of the cysteines is present in a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154 (L3).
  • the GH comprises a single cys mutant and an additional disulfide bond wherein the additional disulfide bond which connects a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154, with a helical segment, such as helix B or helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98).
  • the GH of the conjugate comprises a single cys mutant and an additional disulfide bond linking helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98) with loop 3 (corresponding to AA 128-154).
  • the GH of the conjugate comprise a single cys mutant and an addition disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I138C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, Q84C/
  • the additional disulfide bridge is between at least one of the amino acid pairs in the positions corresponding to R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H18C/Y143C, H21C/M170C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I138C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, P89C/F146C, F92C/F146C, F92C/T148C, R94C/D107C, V102C/A105C, L156C/F146C, L
  • the GH of the conjugate comprises a singly cys mutant and an additional disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, F92C/T148C and/or R94C/D107C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • the additional disulfide bond is between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, F92C/T148C and/or R94C/D107C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • the GH comprise a single cysteine mutation in L2 and an additional disulfide bond which connects a loop segment, such as from amino acid residues 128-154 (H3), with a helical segment, such as helix B or helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98).
  • the GH comprise a combination of mutations selected from the following group: A98C/Q84C/Y143C, A98C/S85C/Y143C, A98C/S85C/S144C, N99C/Q84C/Y143C, N99C/S85C/Y143C, N99C/S85C/S144C, S101C/Q84C/Y143C, S101C/S85C/Y143C, S101C/S85C/S144C, L101C/Q84C/Y143C, L101C/S85C/Y143C, L101C/S85C/S144C, C102C/Q84C/Y143C, C102C/S85C/Y143C and C102C/S85C/S144C.
  • B comprise or consist of one or more OEG, and/or gamma-Glu motiv(s) as described above.
  • l1, l2, l3, l4, l5 and l6 independently are 0-6.
  • n1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are 0-6.
  • n2 and m5 independently are 0-10.
  • n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are 0-10.
  • D1 and D2 are independently selected from —O— or —N(R 6 )— or a valence bond.
  • E1 and E2 are independently selected from —O— or —N(R 6 )— or a valence bond.
  • W 1 through W 8 independently are selected from the group consisting of —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —CH 2 NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O) 2 —, —S(O) 2 NHC(O)—, —NHC(O)C 1-6 -alkyl, —C(O)NHC 1-6 -alkyl or a valence bond; wherein the alkyl group is optionally substituted with oxo, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH 2 COOH or —NHC(O)CH 2 CH*COOH; wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X 4 .
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , —S(O) 2 OH or C 1-6 -alkyl; wherein the C 1-6 -alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 or —S(O) 2 OH.
  • X 4 is a valence bond and W 6 is selected from either pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH 2 COOH or —NHC(O)CH 2 CH*COOH wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to GH.
  • the conjugate of the present invention has one albumin binding residue (A) linked via a hydrophilic spacer (B), such as one hydrophilic spacer (B), to the growth hormone compound (GH).
  • A albumin binding residue
  • B hydrophilic spacer
  • GH growth hormone compound
  • the growth hormone compound (GH) may be linked to two albumin binding residues via a hydrophilic spacer.
  • the present invention relates to a growth hormone conjugate of the formula (II):
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound having a single Cys mutation
  • B and B′ independently are hydrophilic spacers linked to the sulphur residue of the Cys mutation
  • W is a chemical group linking A and B
  • W′ is a chemical group linking A′ and B′
  • a and A′ independently represents an albumin binding residue
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound having an additional disulfide bridge
  • B and B′ independently are hydrophilic spacers
  • W is a chemical group linking A and B
  • W′ is a chemical group linking A′ and B′
  • a and A′ independently represents an albumin binding residue, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • a still further aspect the present invention relates to a growth hormone conjugate of the formula (II):
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound having a single Cys mutation and an additional disulfide bridge
  • B and B′ independently are hydrophilic spacers linked to the sulphur residue of the
  • W is a chemical group linking A and B
  • W′ is a chemical group linking A′ and B′
  • a and A′ independently represents an albumin binding residue
  • W′ is selected from the same groups as W
  • A′ is selected from the same groups as A and B′ is selected from the same groups as B
  • W and W′, A and A′, and B and B′ are independently selected from any one of the respective groups as defined herein.
  • any embodiments of W, A, and B herein are also embodiments of W′, A′, and B′.
  • any one of the embodiments described herein refers independently to both of the conjugates of formula (I) and (II), as well as the broad aspect and embodiments thereof when suitable.
  • GH is a variant of hGH, wherein a variant is understood to be the compound obtained by substituting one or more amino acid residues in the hGH sequence with another natural or unnatural amino acid; and/or by adding one or more natural or unnatural amino acids to the hGH sequence; and/or by deleting one or more amino acid residue from the hGH sequence, wherein any of these steps may optionally be followed by further derivatization of one or more amino acid residues.
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 90% identity to the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone (hGH) (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • GH has at least 80%, such as at least 85%, such as at least 95%, such as at least 96%, such as at least 97%, such as at least 98% or such as at least 99% identity with hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • said identities to hGH are coupled to at least 10%, such as at least 20%, such as at least 40%, such as at least 60%, such as at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH as determined in assay I herein.
  • Any one of the sequence identity embodiments may be combined with any one of the activity embodiments, such as a GH having at least 80% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 60% of the growth hormone activity of hGH; a GH having at least 90% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 40% of the growth hormone activity of hGH; a GH having at least 95% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH, and so forth.
  • GH is hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • B comprise or or consist of one or more OEG, and/or gamma-Glu motiv(s) as described above.
  • the hydrophilic spacer B has the formula
  • W 1 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH 2 —, —CH 2 NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O) 2 —, —S(O) 2 NHC(O)— or a valence bond.
  • W 1 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NHS(O) 2 —.
  • W 2 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH 2 —, —CH 2 NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O) 2 —, —S(O) 2 NHC(O)— or a valence bond.
  • W 2 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NHS(O) 2 —.
  • W 3 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH 2 —, —CH 2 NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O) 2 —, —S(O) 2 NHC(O)— or a valence bond.
  • W 3 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NHS(O) 2 —.
  • W 4 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH 2 —, —CH 2 NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O) 2 —, —S(O) 2 NHC(O)— or a valence bond.
  • W 4 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NHS(O) 2 —.
  • W 5 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH 2 —, —CH 2 NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O) 2 —, —S(O) 2 NHC(O)— or a valence bond.
  • W 5 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NHS(O) 2 —.
  • W 6 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —CH 2 NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O) 2 —, —S(O) 2 NHC(O)—, —NHC(O)C 1-6 -alkyl, —C(O)NHC 1-6 -alkyl or a valence bond; wherein the alkyl group is optionally substituted with pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH 2 COOH or —NHC(O)CH 2 CH*COOH; wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X 4 .
  • W 6 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O) 2 — or —NHC(O)C 1-6 -alkyl.
  • D1, D2, F are all valence bonds
  • l6 is O
  • W 6 is selected from either pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH 2 COOH or —NHC(O)CH 2 CH*COOH wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to GH.
  • R 1 selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , —S(O) 2 OH or C 1-6 -alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , —S(O) 2 OH.
  • R 1 is selected from —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , or C 1-6 -alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , or —S(O) 2 OH.
  • R 2 is selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , —S(O) 2 OH or C 1-6 -alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , —S(O) 2 OH.
  • R 2 is selected from —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , or C 1-6 -alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , or —S(O) 2 OH.
  • R 3 is selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , —S(O) 2 OH or C 1-6 -alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , —S(O) 2 OH.
  • R 3 is selected from —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , or C 1-6 -alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , or —S(O) 2 OH.
  • R 4 is selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , —S(O) 2 OH or C 1-6 -alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , —S(O) 2 OH.
  • R 4 is selected from —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , or C 1-6 -alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , or —S(O) 2 OH.
  • R 5 is selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , —S(O) 2 OH or C 1-6 -alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , —S(O) 2 OH.
  • R 5 is selected from —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , or C 1-6 -alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH 2 , or —S(O) 2 OH.
  • E1 is selected from —O— or —N(R 6 )—, or a valence bond. Typically, E1 is selected from —O—.
  • E2 is selected from —O— or —N(R 6 )—, or a valence bond. Typically, E2 is selected from —O—.
  • E1 and E2 are both —O—.
  • E1 and E2 are both —N(R 6 )—.
  • F is phenyl, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione or a valence bond.
  • D1 is selected from —O— or —N(R 6 )—, or a valence bond. Typically, D1 is selected from —N(R 6 )—.
  • D2 is selected from —O— or —N(R 6 )—, or a valence bond.
  • D1 is selected from —N(R 6 )—.
  • l1 is 0-6, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • l2 is 0-6, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • l3 is 0-6, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • l4 is 0-6, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • l5 is 0-6, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • 16 is 0-6, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • m1 is 0-6, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • m2 is 0-10, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10.
  • m3 is 0-5, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • m4 is 0-5, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • m5 is 0-10, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10.
  • m6 is 0-5, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • m7 is 0-5, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • n1 is 0-10, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • n2 is 0-10, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • n3 is 0-10, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • n4 is 0-10, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • X 1 is —W 1 —[(CHR 1 ) l1 —W 2 ] m1 — ⁇ [(CH 2 ) n1 O] m2 —[(CHR 2 ) l2 —W 3 ] m3 ⁇ n2 — and X 2 is —[(CHR 3 ) l3 —W 4 ] m4 — ⁇ [(CH 2 ) n3 O] m5 —[(CHR 4 ) l4 —W 5 ] m6 ⁇ n4 —, wherein — ⁇ [(CH 2 ) n1 O] m2 —[(CHR 2 ) l2 —W 3 ] m3 ⁇ n2 — and — ⁇ [(CH 2 ) n3 O] m5 —[(CHR 4 ) l4 —W 5 ] m6 ⁇ n4 — are selected from,
  • the molar weight of said hydrophilic spacer is in the range from 80 Daltons (D) to 1500 D or in the range from 300 D to 1100 D.
  • W Y is —(CH 2 ) l7 -cyclohexyl-W 8 —.
  • Y is a valence bond
  • W 7 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH 2 —, —CH 2 NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O) 2 —, —S(O) 2 NHC(O)— or a valence bond.
  • W 7 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, or —C(O)NHS(O) 2 .
  • W 8 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH 2 —, —CH 2 NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O) 2 —, —S(O) 2 NHC(O)— or a valence bond.
  • W 8 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, or —C(O)NHS(O) 2 .
  • l7 is 0 or 1.
  • albumin binding residue (substituent A in formula (I) or (II) above) attached to the growth hormone compound of the present invention is a lipophilic residue, which binds non-covalently to albumin.
  • albumin binding residue is negatively charged at physiological pH, and has a binding affinity towards human serum albumin that is below about 10 ⁇ M or even below about 1 ⁇ M.
  • the albumin binding residue is selected from a straight chain alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, a group which has a ⁇ -carboxylic acid group or a ⁇ -carboxylic acid isoster.
  • the albumin binding residue has from 6 to 40 carbon atoms.
  • the albumin binding residue has from 8 to 26 carbon atoms.
  • the albumin binding residue has from 8 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • A has 14 to 26 carbon atoms and comprises an ⁇ -carboxylic acid group. In a further embodiment A has 14 to 26 carbon atoms and comprises an ⁇ -carboxylic acid isoster, such as a tetrazol.
  • the hydrophilic spacer (B) is preferably introduced in a position of the growth hormone compound (GH) in a selective manner in order to be able to control whether one or two albumin binding residues (A) should be incorporated in the growth hormone compound.
  • the hydrophilic spacer (B) may be attached to an amino acid side-chain of the GH compound.
  • Such amino acid side-chain may be a chemically modified amino acid side-chain of the GH compound.
  • Another, such amino acid side-chain may be an enzymatically modified amino acid side-chain of the GH compound.
  • a transglutaminase is used to introduce a hydrophilic spacer in the glutamine residue in the position corresponding to position 40 or position 141 in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • Another way of selectively introducing a hydrophilic spacer is in the N-terminal residue of the growth hormone compound, such as hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • the fragment A-W—B may be linear or branched. In one embodiment, A-W—B is not a linear peptide.
  • albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is attached to the glutamine residue in the position corresponding to position 40 in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is attached to the glutamine residue in the position corresponding to position 141 in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is attached to the N-terminal residue of the growth hormone compound, such as hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is attached to the glutamine residue in the position corresponding to position 40, position 141 and to the N-terminal residue of the growth hormone compound, such as hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • the growth hormone conjugates of the present invention are selected from,
  • the present invention relates to a growth hormone variants such as the growth hormone compounds (GH) described herein.
  • the growth hormone variants may be useful as therapeutic agents or as intermediates in the preparation of growth hormone conjugates.
  • the growth hormone compounds may be produces by recombinant methods known in the art or as described herein.
  • the growth hormone variant is soluble.
  • the invention relates to a composition comprising a growth hormone variant as described herein.
  • the composition comprises a growth hormone variant comprising a single cys mutation selected from the group of: P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C and G126C.
  • a growth hormone variant comprising a single cys mutation selected from the group of: P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C and G126C.
  • the growth hormone variant of the composition has a single Cys mutation in the N-terminal (AA 1-8), in Helix 1, in Loop 1, in Helix 2, in Loop 2 or in Helix 3 of the growth hormone compound.
  • the single Cys mutation is positioned in the N-terminal, the mutation being such as any one of P5C, S7C.
  • the single Cys mutation is positioned in H1 (corresponding to AA 9-35), such as any one of D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C.
  • the single Cys mutation is positioned in L1 (corresponding to AA36-71), the muation being such as any one of K38C, E39C, Y42C, S43C, D47C, P48C, S55, S57C, P59C, S62C, E65C, Q69C or preferably any one of Y42C, S55C, S57C, S62C, Q69C.
  • the single Cys mutation is positioned in H2 (AA 72-98), such as any one of E88C, Q91C, S95C and A98C.
  • the single Cys mutation is positioned within AA 99-127.
  • the single Cys mutation is positioned in L2 (AA 99-106), such as any one of N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C and Y103C.
  • the single Cys mutation is positioned in H3 (AA 107-127), the mutation being such as any one of D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C and G126C of hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1) or in L3 or H4 (corresponding to AA128-154 and AA155-184) the muation being such as any one of E129C, D130C, G131C, P133C, T135C, G136C, T142C, D147C, N149C, D154C, A155C, L156C, R178C, V180C or in the C-terminal the muation being such as any one of E186C G187C and G190C.
  • the mutation is located in corresponding amino acid residues. In even further embodiments the single Cys mutation is located within AA 93-106 in hGH or corresponding residues in hGH variants. In further specified embodiments the single Cys mutation is located within L2, such as within AA 99-106 or AA 99-104 or corresponding residues.
  • composition according to the invention comprises a growth hormone variant comprising a single cys mutation and an additional disulfide bond.
  • the single cys mutation is any one of the above described single cys mutations.
  • the single cys mutation in GH is selected from any one of: T3C, P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, K38C, E39C, Y42C, S43C, D47C, P48C, S55C, S57C, P59C, S62, E65C, Q69C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C, G126C, E129C, D130C, G131C, P133C, T135C, G136C, T142C
  • the additional disulfide bond is selected from the following group of pairs of cystein muations: R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I38C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, P89C/F
  • the growth hormone variant comprise a single cystein and an additional disulfide bond selected from the following pairs of cystein mutations: S57C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C and/or S85C/S144C.
  • the growth hormone variant comprise a single cysteine mutation in L2 and an additional disulfide bond which connects a loop segment, such as from amino acid residues 128-154 (H3), with a helical segment, such as helix B or helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98).
  • the growth hormone variant comprise a combination of mutations selected from the following group: A98C/Q84C/Y143C, A98C/S85C/Y143C, A98C/S85C/S144C, N99C/Q84C/Y143C, N99C/S85C/Y143C, N99C/S85C/S144C, S101C/Q84C/Y143C, S101C/S85C/Y143C, S101C/S85C/S144C, L101C/Q84C/Y143C, L101C/S85C/Y143C, L101C/S85C/S144C, C102C/Q84C/Y143C, C102C/S85C/Y143C and C102C/S85C/S144C.
  • the growth hormone variant comprise a combination of mutations selected from the following group: A98C/Q84C/Y143C, N99C/Q84C/Y143C, S101C/Q84C/Y143C, L101C/Q84C/Y143C and C102C/Q84C/Y143C.
  • the growth hormone variant comprise the mutations L101C, Q84C and Y143C.
  • the present invention relates to a growth hormone conjugate which comprises a growth hormone compound (GH) linked to an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof for use in therapy.
  • GH growth hormone compound
  • the albumin binding residue, and the hydrophilic spacer are selected from any one of the above embodiments, in particular the growth hormone conjugate has the formula (I) or (II).
  • the present invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition
  • a growth hormone conjugate which comprises a growth hormone compound (GH) linked to an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt optionally in combination with a pharmaceutical acceptable excipient.
  • GH growth hormone compound
  • identity refers to a relationship between the sequences of two or more proteins, as determined by comparing the sequences.
  • identity also means the degree of sequence relatedness between proteins, as determined by the number of matches between strings of two or more amino acid residues.
  • Identity measures the percent of identical matches between the smaller of two or more sequences with gap alignments (if any) addressed by a particular mathematical model or computer program (i.e., “algorithms”). Identity of related proteins can be readily calculated by known methods. Such methods include, but are not limited to, those described in Computational Molecular Biology, Lesk, A.
  • Preferred methods to determine identity are designed to give the largest match between the sequences tested. Methods to determine identity are described in publicly available computer programs. Preferred computer program methods to determine identity between two sequences include the GCG program package, including GAP (Devereux et al., Nucl. Acid. Res., 12, 387, (1984)); Genetics Computer Group, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis.), BLASTP, BLASTN, and FASTA (Altschul et al., J. Mol. Biol., 215, 403-410, (1990)). The BLASTX program is publicly available from the National Center for Biotechnology Information (NCBI) and other sources (BLAST Manual, Altschul et al. NCB/NLM/NIH Bethesda, Md. 20894; Altschul et al., supra). The well known Smith Waterman algorithm may also be used to determine identity.
  • NCBI National Center for Biotechnology Information
  • GAP Genetics Computer Group, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis.
  • two proteins for which the percent sequence identity is to be determined are aligned for optimal matching of their respective amino acids (the “matched span”, as determined by the algorithm).
  • a gap opening penalty (which is calculated as 3.times. the average diagonal; the “average diagonal” is the average of the diagonal of the comparison matrix being used; the “diagonal” is the score or number assigned to each perfect amino acid match by the particular comparison matrix) and a gap extension penalty (which is usually 1/10 times the gap opening penalty), as well as a comparison matrix such as PAM 250 or BLOSUM 62 are used in conjunction with the algorithm.
  • a standard comparison matrix see Dayhoff et al., Atlas of Protein Sequence and Structure, vol. 5, suppl.
  • Preferred parameters for a protein sequence comparison include the following: Algorithm: Needleman et al., J. Mol. Biol, 48, 443-453, (1970); Comparison matrix: BLOSUM 62 from Henikoff et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 89, 10915-10919, (1992); Gap Penalty: 12, Gap Length Penalty: 4, Threshold of Similarity: 0.
  • the GAP program is useful with the above parameters.
  • the aforementioned parameters are the default parameters for protein comparisons (along with no penalty for end gaps) using the GAP algorithm.
  • the compounds of the present invention have improved pharmacological properties compared to the corresponding un-conjugated growth hormone, which is also referred to as the parent compound.
  • pharmacological properties include functional in vivo half-life, immunogencity, renal filtration, protease protection and albumin binding.
  • the term “functional in vivo half-life” is used in its normal meaning, i.e., the time at which 50% of the biological activity of the GH or GH conjugate is still present in the body/target organ, or the time at which the activity of the GH or GH conjugate is 50% of its initial value.
  • “in vivo plasma half-life” may be determined, i.e., the time at which 50% of the GH or GH conjugate circulate in the plasma or bloodstream prior to being cleared. Determination of plasma half-life is often more simple than determining functional half-life and the magnitude of plasma half-life is usually a good indication of the magnitude of functional in vivo half-life.
  • Alternative terms to plasma half-life include serum half-life, circulating half-life, circulatory half-life, serum clearance, plasma clearance, and clearance half-life.
  • the term “increased” as used in connection with the functional in vivo half-life or plasma half-life is used to indicate that the relevant half-life of the GH conjugate is statistically significantly increased relative to that of the parent GH, as determined under comparable conditions.
  • the relevant half-life may be increased by at least about 25%, such as by at lest about 50%, e.g., by at least about 100%, 150%, 200%, 250%, or 500%.
  • the compounds of the present invention exhibit an increase in half-life of at least about 5 h, preferably at least about 24 h, more preferably at least about 72 h, and most preferably at least about 7 days, relative to the half-life of the parent GH.
  • Measurement of in vivo plasma half-life can be carried out in a number of ways as described in the literature.
  • An increase in in vivo plasma half-life may be quantified as a decrease in clearance (CL) or as an increase in mean residence time (MRT).
  • Conjugated GH of the present invention for which the CL is decreased to less than 70%, such as less than 50%, such than less than 20%, such than less than 10% of the CL of the parent GH as determined in a suitable assay is said to have an increased in vivo plasma half-life.
  • Conjugated GH of the present invention for which MRT is increased to more than 130%, such as more than 150%, such as more than 200%, such as more than 500% of the MRT of the parent GH in a suitable assay is said to have an increased in vivo plasma half-life. Clearance and mean residence time can be assessed in standard pharmacokinetic studies using suitable test animals. It is within the capabilities of a person skilled in the art to choose a suitable test animal for a given protein. Tests in human, of course, represent the ultimate test. Suitable test animals include normal, Sprague-Dawley male rats, mice and cynomolgus monkeys.
  • mice and rats are in injected in a single subcutaneous bolus, while monkeys may be injected in a single subcutaneous bolus or in a single iv dose.
  • the amount injected depends on the test animal.
  • blood samples are taken over a period of one to five days as appropriate for the assessment of CL and MRT. The blood samples are conveniently analysed by ELISA techniques.
  • Immunogenicity of a compound refers to the ability of the compound, when administered to a human, to elicit a deleterious immune response, whether humoral, cellular, or both. In any human sub-population, there may be individuals who exhibit sensitivity to particular administered proteins. Immunogenicity may be measured by quantifying the presence of growth hormone antibodies and/or growth hormone responsive T-cells in a sensitive individual, using conventional methods known in the art.
  • the conjugated GH of the present invention exhibit a decrease in immunogenicity in a sensitive individual of at least about 10%, preferably at least about 25%, more preferably at least about 40% and most preferably at least about 50%, relative to the immunogenicity for that individual of the parent GH.
  • protease protection or “protease protected” as used herein is intended to indicate that the conjugated GH of the present invention is more resistant to the plasma peptidase or proteases than is the parent GH.
  • Protease and peptidase enzymes present in plasma are known to be involved in the degradation of circulating proteins, such as e.g. circulating peptide hormones, such as growth hormone. Such protease protection may be measured by the method of Example A described herein.
  • Growth hormone may be susceptible to degradation by for instance thrombin, plasmin, subtilisin, and chymotrypsin-like serine proteinase. Assays for determination of degradation of these proteases are described in J. Biotech., 65, 183, (1998).
  • the rate of hydrolysis of the GH conjugate is less than 70%, such as less than 40%, such as less than 10% of that of the parent GH.
  • Serum albumin The most abundant protein component in circulating blood of mammalian species is serum albumin, which is normally present at a concentration of approximately 3 to 4.5 grams per 100 milliters of whole blood.
  • Serum albumin is a blood protein of approximately 65,000 daltons which has several important functions in the circulatory system. It functions as a transporter of a variety of organic molecules found in the blood, as the main transporter of various metabolites such as fatty acids and bilirubin through the blood, and, owing to its abundance, as an osmotic regulator of the circulating blood.
  • Serum albumin has a half-life of more than one week, and one approach to increasing the plasma half-life of proteins has been to conjugate to the protein a group that binds to serum albumin.
  • Albumin binding property may be determined as described in J. Med. Chem., 43, 1986, (2000) which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • the growth hormone conjugates of formula (I) or (II) exert growth hormone activity and may as such be used in the treatment of diseases or states which will benefit from an increase in the amount of circulating growth hormone.
  • the invention provides a method for the treatment of growth hormone deficiency (GHD); Turner Syndrome; Prader-Willi syndrome (PWS); Noonan syndrome; Down syndrome; chronic renal disease, juvenile rheumatoid arthritis; cystic fibrosis, HIV-infection in children receiving HAART treatment (HIV/HALS children); short children born short for gestational age (SGA); short stature in children born with very low birth weight (VLBW) but SGA; skeletal dysplasia; hypochondroplasia; achondroplasia; idiopathic short stature (ISS); GHD in adults; fractures in or of long bones, such as tibia, fibula, femur, humerus, radius, ulna, clavicula, matacarpea, matatarsea
  • APCD chronic dialysis
  • malnutritional associated cardiovascular disease in APCD reversal of cachexia in APCD; cancer in APCD; chronic abstractive pulmonal disease in APCD; HIV in APCD; elderly with APCD; chronic liver disease in APCD, fatigue syndrome in APCD; Crohn's disease; impaired liver function; males with HIV infections; short bowel syndrome; central obesity; HIV-associated lipodystrophy syndrome (HALS); male infertility; patients after major elective surgery, alcohol/drug detoxification or neurological trauma; aging; frail elderly; osteo-arthritis; traumatically damaged cartilage; erectile dysfunction; fibromyalgia; memory disorders; depression; traumatic brain injury; subarachnoid haemorrhage; very low birth
  • the invention provides a method for the acceleration of the healing of muscle tissue, nervous tissue or wounds; the acceleration or improvement of blood flow to damaged tissue; or the decrease of infection rate in damaged tissue, the method comprising administration to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a therapeutivcally effective amount of a growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) or (II).
  • the invention relates to the use of a growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) or (II) in the manufacture of diseases benefiting from an increase in the growth hormone plasma level, such as the disease mentioned above.
  • a typical parenteral dose is in the range of 10 ⁇ 9 mg/kg to about 100 mg/kg body weight per administration.
  • Typical administration doses are from about 0.0000001 to about 10 mg/kg body weight per administration.
  • the exact dose will depend on e.g. indication, medicament, frequency and mode of administration, the sex, age and general condition of the subject to be treated, the nature and the severity of the disease or condition to be treated, the desired effect of the treatment and other factors evident to the person skilled in the art.
  • Typical dosing frequencies are twice daily, once daily, bi-daily, twice weekly, once weekly or with even longer dosing intervals. Due to the prolonged half-lifes of the fusion proteins of the present invention, a dosing regime with long dosing intervals, such as twice weekly, once weekly or with even longer dosing intervals is a particular embodiment of the invention.
  • a growth hormone conjugate of the present invention typically at least one of the covalent bonds established in the preparation of a A-W—B-GH conjugate of formula (I) is prepared by use of an enzyme as illustrated in the examples below.
  • an enzyme may for instance be selected from the group consisting of transglutaminases, serine proteases and cysteine proteases.
  • said enzyme is a transglutaminase.
  • transglutaminase may for instance be selected from the group consisting of microbial transglutaminases, tissue transglutaminases and factor XIII and variants thereof.
  • said enzyme is a cysteine protease.
  • the growth hormone conjugate of the present invention may be prepared by many different methods, non-limiting examples are shown below.
  • the present invention also provides methods for preparing A-W—B-GH conjugates of formula (I).
  • Transglutaminases may include microbial transglutaminases such as that isolated from the Streptomyces species; S. mobaraense, S. cinnamoneum, S. griseocarneum (U.S. Pat. No. 5,156,956 incorporated herein by reference), S. lavendulae (U.S. Pat. No. 5,252,469 incorporated herein by reference) and S. ladakanum (JP2003/199569 incorporated herein by reference).
  • microbial transglutaminases have been isolated from Bacillus subtilis (disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,731,183, which is incorporated herein by reference) and from various Myxomycetes.
  • useful microbial transglutaminases are those disclosed in WO1996/06931 (e.g. transglutaminase from Bacillus lydicus ) and WO1996/22366, both of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • transglutaminases include guinea-pig liver transglutaminase, and transglutaminases from various marine sources like the flat fish Pagrus major (disclosed in EP0555649, which is incorporated herein by reference), and the Japanese oyster Crassostrea gigas (disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,736,356, which is incorporated herein by reference). Functional analogues and derivatives thereof may also be useful.
  • the TGase used in the methods of the invention is a microbial transglutaminase.
  • the TGase is from S. mobaraense or a variant thereof, for instance as described in WO2007/020290 and WO2008/020075.
  • the TGase is from S. ladakanum or a variant thereof, for instance as described in WO2008/020075.
  • the conjugation of GH to A-W—B according to the present invention may be achieved by TGase-mediated modification leading to selective alteration at specific lysine (Lys) or glutamine (Gln) positions in the sequence of the GH compound depending on the substrate used.
  • TGase-mediated modification leading to selective alteration at specific lysine (Lys) or glutamine (Gln) positions in the sequence of the GH compound depending on the substrate used.
  • hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1) has 9 lysine residues at positions 38, 41, 70, 115, 140, 145, 158, 168 and 172 and 13 glutamine residues at positions 22, 29, 40, 46, 49, 68, 69, 84, 91, 122, 137, 141 and 181, although not all of these are readily available for modification nor suitably for modifications as this will lead to diminished binding potency to the growth hormone binding proteine hence leading to reduced biological activity.
  • the x-ray protein crystal structure between hGH and its binding proteine reveals that at least 4 lysines (38, 41, 168 and 172) takes part in binding to the binding proteine and potentially only one of the glutamines (Gln 46). This renders the glutamines more attractive as target for selective introduction of an albumin binder linker.
  • the present invention relates to preparation of a growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) wherein a GH compound is treated with a property-modifying group using TGase catalyzed chemistry.
  • an aldehyde or a ketone functionality is installed by a two step reaction using amino alcohols that subsequently are treated with periodate to generate an aldehyde or keto functionality by oxidative cleavage.
  • the present invention relates to preparation of a growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) comprising treatment of an aldehyde or ketone derived from the GH compound with a property-modifying group-derived aniline or heteroaryl amine to yield an amine (III ⁇ IV).
  • aldehyde derived from the GH compound is treated with property-modifying group-derived aniline or heteroarylamine.
  • GH compound derived aldehyde (or ketone) or “an aldehyde or ketone derived from the GH compound” is intented to indicate a GH compound to which an aldehyde or ketone functional group has been covalently attached, or a GH compound on which an aldehyde or ketone functional group has been generated.
  • GH compound-derived aldehydes such as compound (III) illustrated below is well known to those skilled in the art, and any of these known procedures may be used to prepare the GH compound-derived aldehyde (III) required for the realization of the invention disclosed herein.
  • conjugate A-W—B-GH (IV) is prepared as illustrated below:
  • the TGase-mediated enzymatic reaction with GH (I) results in the modification of Gin at position 141 and/or 40 affording (II).
  • the modified GH (II) is treated with periodate to cleave the aminoalcohol to provide a GH derived aldehyde (III).
  • Conjugation of GH aldehyde (III) with A-W—B1-NH 2 occurs via reductive alkylation (III ⁇ IV).
  • Reductive alkylation as exemplified herein is well-recognized in the art and results in GH compounds (IV) modified in position Gln(141) and/or 40.
  • the conjugate A-W—B-GH is prepared using reductive amination in GH's N-terminal as illustrated below:
  • GH ⁇ V reductive alkylation
  • conjugate A-W—B-GH is prepared as illustrated below:
  • cysteine residue optionally is protected as a mixed disulfide (VI) (GH—S—S—R) with R being a small organic moeity.
  • mixed disulfides may include disulfides between cystamine (R ⁇ —CH 2 CH 2 NH 2 ); cysteine (R ⁇ —CH 2 CH(C(O)OH)NH 2 ); homocysteine (R ⁇ —CH 2 CH 2 CH(C(O)OH)NH 2 ); and gluthatione (R ⁇ —CH 2 CH(C(O)NHCH 2 C(O)OH)NH—C(O)CH 2 CH 2 CH(C(O)OH)NH 2 ).
  • the derivatization process utilise an albumin binding linker A-W—B1-LG wherein LG represent an inorganic leaving group such as —Cl, —Br, —I or an organic leaving group such as mesylate or tosylate. Conjugation of GH with A-W—B1-LG occurs via nucleophilic substitution (VII ⁇ IX).
  • conjugate A-W—B-GH is prepared as illustrated below:
  • Cys GH compound (VII) as obtained from (VI) above can be reacted with a malimide substituted albumin binder linker (X) affording GH conjugate A-W—B1-NHC(O)CH 2 CH 2 -pyrrolidin-2,5-dione-3-GH (XI).
  • hydrophilic spacer B1 has the formula
  • conjugate A-W—B-GH is prepared as illustrated below:
  • Albumine binders may be attached to single cys GH derivatives using S-nitrosyl chemistry as described in WO2009/024791.
  • Cys GH compound (VII) is subjected to S-nitrosylation by addition of a NO donor such as DEA NOnate (Sigma Aldrich). Nitrosylated single cys GH (XII) is then reacted with an allyl amine substituted albumine binder (XIII) affording oxime (XIV) which after hydrolysis affords GH conjugate A-W—B1-C(O)NHCH 2 C(O)CH 2 —Cys GH (XV) wherein the hydrophilic spacer B1 has the formula
  • a close relationship to the natural peptide is generally regarded as an advantage with therapeutic interventions comprising administration of variants or analogues of this natural peptide as it minimizes the risk of e.g. any unwanted antibody generation.
  • GH may be modified in their C-terminal by use of carboxypeptidase Y (EC. 3.4.16.5), and suitable modified substrates as described in WO2007/093594.
  • carboxypeptidase Y EC. 3.4.16.5
  • suitable modified substrates as described in WO2007/093594.
  • A represent an albumin binding residue
  • B1 represents a hydrophilic spacer
  • W is a chemical group linking A and B1
  • U represent a conjugating moiety
  • conjugating moiety will vary depending on the method of conjugation applied which may in the end also be visible in the final hGH compound (A-W—B-GH).
  • A-W—B1-U, A and W are as defined in any of the above embodiments.
  • the compound A-W—B1-U may further be defined, as an embodiment, wherein U comprises or consists of an aryl, an heteraryl, a substituted malimide or a pyrrolidine-2,5-dione such as —NHC(O)CH 2 CH 2 -pyrrolidin-2.5-dione.
  • U comprises D1-(CH 2 ) l6 -D2, wherein D1 and D2 are independently selected from —O—, —N(R6)-, —NC(O)R7- or a valence bond; wherein R6 and R7 independently represent hydrogen or C 1-6 -alkyl.
  • linker compounds wherein U comprises or consists of a leaving group, such as Cl, Br, I, —OH, —OS(O) 2 Me, —OS(O) 2 CF 3 or —OTs, or preferably compounds according to formula (III), wherein the leaving group is a halogen compound selected from CI, Br and I, preferably Br.
  • a leaving group such as Cl, Br, I, —OH, —OS(O) 2 Me, —OS(O) 2 CF 3 or —OTs, or preferably compounds according to formula (III), wherein the leaving group is a halogen compound selected from CI, Br and I, preferably Br.
  • linker compounds which are applied in Chemistry V
  • U comprises or consists of an allyl amine (H 2 C ⁇ CH—CH 2 —NH 2 ), such as —C(O)NHCH 2 —CH ⁇ CH 2 .
  • the compound A-W—B1-U may further be defined, as an embodiment, wherein U comprises or consists of an amine (—NH 2 ).
  • U may comprises or consists of an aldehyde, such as —CHO.
  • the compounds may following be conjugated to any sort of therapeutic compound which include an acceptor group to which “U” may enable conjugation.
  • the therapeutic compound is a polypeptide.
  • Peptides may naturally include AA residues which may function as an acceptor group, such as Gin residues, Phe residues and Cys residues.
  • amino acid residues may be introduced in an appropriate position in the polypeptide.
  • compositions comprising a growth hormone conjugate of the present invention, such as a growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) or (II), which is present in a concentration from 10 ⁇ 15 mg/mL to 200 mg/mL, such as e.g. 10 ⁇ 10 mg/mL to 5 mg/mL and wherein said composition has a pH from 2.0 to 10.0.
  • the composition may further comprise pharmaceutical exhibients, such as a buffer system, preservative(s), tonicity agent(s), chelating agent(s), stabilizers and surfactants.
  • the pharmaceutical composition is an aqueous composition, ie. composition comprising water. Such composition is typically a solution or a suspension.
  • the pharmaceutical composition is an aqueous solution.
  • aqueous composition is defined as a composition comprising at least 50% w/w water.
  • aqueous solution is defined as a solution comprising at least 50% w/w water, and the term “aqueous suspension” is defined as a suspension comprising at least 50% w/w water.
  • the pharmaceutical composition is a freeze-dried composition, whereto the physician or the patient adds solvents and/or diluents prior to use.
  • the pharmaceutical composition is a dried composition (e.g. freeze-dried or spray-dried) ready for use without any prior dissolution.
  • the invention in a further aspect relates to a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising an aqueous solution of a growth hormone conjugate, such as a growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) or (II), and a buffer, wherein said GH conjugate is present in a concentration from 0.1-100 mg/mL or above, and wherein said composition has a pH from about 2.0 to about 10.0.
  • a growth hormone conjugate such as a growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) or (II)
  • a buffer wherein said GH conjugate is present in a concentration from 0.1-100 mg/mL or above, and wherein said composition has a pH from about 2.0 to about 10.0.
  • the pH of the composition is selected from the list consisting of 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 3.0, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 4.0, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8, 4.9, 5.0, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8, 5.9, 6.0, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8, 6.9, 7.0, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.8, 7.9, 8.0, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 8.8, 8.9, 9.0, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, and 10.0.
  • the buffer is selected from the group consisting of sodium acetate, sodium carbonate, citrate, glycylglycine, histidine, glycine, lysine, arginine, sodium dihydrogen phosphate, disodium hydrogen phosphate, sodium phosphate, and tris(hydroxymethyl)-aminomethan, bicine, tricine, malic acid, succinate, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, aspartic acid or mixtures thereof.
  • Each one of these specific buffers constitutes an alternative embodiment of the invention.
  • the composition further comprises a pharmaceutically acceptable preservative.
  • the preservative is selected from the group consisting of phenol, o-cresol, m-cresol, p-cresol, methyl p-hydroxybenzoate, propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, 2-phenoxyethanol, butyl p-hydroxybenzoate, 2-phenylethanol, benzyl alcohol, chlorobutanol, and thiomerosal, bronopol, benzoic acid, imidurea, chlorohexidine, sodium dehydroacetate, chlorocresol, ethyl p-hydroxybenzoate, benzethonium chloride, chlorphenesine (3-(p-chlorphenoxy)propane-1,2-diol) or mixtures thereof.
  • the preservative is present in a concentration from 0.1 mg/mL to 20 mg/mL. In a further embodiment of the invention the preservative is present in a concentration from 0.1 mg/mL to 5 mg/mL. In a further embodiment of the invention the preservative is present in a concentration from 5 mg/mL to 10 mg/mL. In a further embodiment of the invention the preservative is present in a concentration from 10 mg/mL to 20 mg/mL. Each one of these specific preservatives constitutes an alternative embodiment of the invention.
  • the use of a preservative in pharmaceutical compositions is well-known to the skilled person. For convenience reference is made to Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20 th edition, 2000.
  • the composition further comprises an isotonic agent.
  • the isotonic agent is selected from the group consisting of a salt (e.g. sodium chloride), a sugar or sugar alcohol, an amino acid (e.g. L-glycine, L-histidine, arginine, lysine, isoleucine, aspartic acid, tryptophan, threonine), an alditol (e.g. glycerol (glycerine), 1,2-propanediol (propyleneglycol), 1,3-propanediol, 1,3-butanediol) polyethyleneglycol (e.g. PEG 400), or mixtures thereof.
  • a salt e.g. sodium chloride
  • a sugar or sugar alcohol e.g. sodium chloride
  • an amino acid e.g. L-glycine, L-histidine, arginine, lysine, isoleucine, aspartic acid, tryptophan
  • Any sugar such as mono, di-, or polysaccharides, or water-soluble glucans, including for example fructose, glucose, mannose, sorbose, xylose, maltose, lactose, sucrose, trehalose, dextran, pullulan, dextrin, cyclodextrin, soluble starch, hydroxyethyl starch and carboxymethylcellulose-Na may be used.
  • the sugar additive is sucrose.
  • Sugar alcohol is defined as a C4-C8 hydrocarbon having at least one —OH group and includes, for example, mannitol, sorbitol, inositol, galactitol, dulcitol, xylitol, and arabitol.
  • the sugar alcohol additive is mannitol.
  • the sugars or sugar alcohols mentioned above may be used individually or in combination. There is no fixed limit to the amount used, as long as the sugar or sugar alcohol is soluble in the liquid preparation and does not adversely effect the stabilizing effects obtained using the methods of the invention.
  • the sugar or sugar alcohol concentration is between about 1 mg/mL and about 150 mg/mL.
  • the isotonic agent is present in a concentration from 1 mg/mL to 50 mg/mL. In a further embodiment of the invention the isotonic agent is present in a concentration from 1 mg/mL to 7 mg/mL. In a further embodiment of the invention the isotonic agent is present in a concentration from 8 mg/mL to 24 mg/mL. In a further embodiment of the invention the isotonic agent is present in a concentration from 25 mg/mL to 50 mg/mL. Each one of these specific isotonic agents constitutes an alternative embodiment of the invention.
  • the use of an isotonic agent in pharmaceutical compositions is well-known to the skilled person. For convenience reference is made to Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20 th edition, 2000.
  • the composition further comprises a chelating agent.
  • the chelating agent is selected from salts of ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA), citric acid, and aspartic acid, and mixtures thereof.
  • the chelating agent is present in a concentration from 0.1 mg/mL to 5 mg/mL.
  • the chelating agent is present in a concentration from 0.1 mg/mL to 2 mg/mL.
  • the chelating agent is present in a concentration from 2 mg/mL to 5 mg/mL.
  • Each one of these specific chelating agents constitutes an alternative embodiment of the invention.
  • the use of a chelating agent in pharmaceutical compositions is well-known to the skilled person. For convenience reference is made to Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20 th edition, 2000.
  • composition further comprises a stabilizer.
  • a stabilizer in pharmaceutical compositions is well-known to the skilled person. For convenience reference is made to Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20 th edition, 2000.
  • compositions of the invention are stabilized liquid pharmaceutical compositions whose therapeutically active components include a protein that possibly exhibits aggregate formation during storage in liquid pharmaceutical compositions.
  • aggregate formation is intended a physical interaction between the protein molecules that results in formation of oligomers, which may remain soluble, or large visible aggregates that precipitate from the solution.
  • during storage is intended a liquid pharmaceutical composition or composition once prepared, is not immediately administered to a subject. Rather, following preparation, it is packaged for storage, either in a liquid form, in a frozen state, or in a dried form for later reconstitution into a liquid form or other form suitable for administration to a subject.
  • liquid pharmaceutical composition or composition is dried either by freeze drying (i.e., lyophilization; see, for example, Williams and Polli, J. Parenteral Sci. Technol., 38, 48-59, (1984)), spray drying (see Masters (1991) in Spray-Drying Handbook (5 th ed; Longman Scientific and Technical, Essez, U.K.), pp. 491-676; Broadhead et al. Drug Devel. Ind. Pharm. 18, 1169-1206, (1992); and Mumenthaler et al., Pharm. Res., 11, 12-20, (1994)), or air drying (Carpenter and Crowe, Cryobiology 25, 459-470, (1988); and Roser, Biopharm.
  • Aggregate formation by a protein during storage of a liquid pharmaceutical composition can adversely affect biological activity of that protein, resulting in loss of therapeutic efficacy of the pharmaceutical composition. Furthermore, aggregate formation may cause other problems such as blockage of tubing, membranes, or pumps when the protein-containing pharmaceutical composition is administered using an infusion system.
  • compositions of the invention may further comprise an amount of an amino acid base sufficient to decrease aggregate formation by the protein during storage of the composition.
  • amino acid base is intended an amino acid or a combination of amino acids, where any given amino acid is present either in its free base form or in its salt form. Where a combination of amino acids is used, all of the amino acids may be present in their free base forms, all may be present in their salt forms, or some may be present in their free base forms while others are present in their salt forms.
  • amino acids to use in preparing the compositions of the invention are those carrying a charged side chain, such as arginine, lysine, aspartic acid, and glutamic acid.
  • Any stereoisomer i.e., L or D isomer, or mixtures thereof
  • a particular amino acid methionine, histidine, arginine, lysine, isoleucine, aspartic acid, tryptophan, threonine and mixtures thereof
  • an organic base such as but not limited to imidazole
  • the L-stereoisomer of an amino acid is used. In one embodiment the L-stereo-isomer is used.
  • compositions of the invention may also be formulated with analogues of these amino acids.
  • amino acid analogue is intended a derivative of the naturally occurring amino acid that brings about the desired effect of decreasing aggregate formation by the protein during storage of the liquid pharmaceutical compositions of the invention.
  • Suitable arginine analogues include, for example, aminoguanidine, ornithine and N-monoethyl L-arginine, suitable methionine analogues include ethionine and buthionine and suitable cysteine analogues include S-methyl-L cysteine.
  • the amino acid analogues are incorporated into the compositions in either their free base form or their salt form.
  • the amino acids or amino acid analogues are used in a concentration, which is sufficient to prevent or delay aggregation of the protein.
  • methionine (or other sulphuric amino acids or amino acid analogous) may be added to inhibit oxidation of methionine residues to methionine sulfoxide when the protein acting as the therapeutic agent is a protein comprising at least one methionine residue susceptible to such oxidation.
  • inhibitor is intended minimal accumulation of methionine oxidized species over time. Inhibiting methionine oxidation results in greater retention of the protein in its proper molecular form. Any stereoisomer of methionine (L or D isomer) or any combinations thereof can be used.
  • the amount to be added should be an amount sufficient to inhibit oxidation of the methionine residues such that the amount of methionine sulfoxide is acceptable to regulatory agencies. Typically, this means that the composition contains no more than about 10% to about 30% methionine sulfoxide. Generally, this can be obtained by adding methionine such that the ratio of methionine added to methionine residues ranges from about 1:1 to about 1000:1, such as 10:1 to about 100:1.
  • the composition further comprises a stabilizer selected from the group of high molecular weight polymers or low molecular compounds.
  • the stabilizer is selected from polyethylene glycol (e.g. PEG 3350), polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), polyvinylpyrrolidone, carboxy/hydroxycellulose or derivates thereof (e.g. HPC, HPC-SL, HPC-L and HPMC), cyclodextrins, sulphur-containing substances as monothioglycerol, thioglycolic acid and 2-methylthioethanol, and different salts (e.g. sodium chloride).
  • PEG 3350 polyethylene glycol
  • PVA polyvinyl alcohol
  • PVpyrrolidone polyvinylpyrrolidone
  • carboxy/hydroxycellulose or derivates thereof e.g. HPC, HPC-SL, HPC-L and HPMC
  • cyclodextrins e.g. sulphur-containing substances as monothioglycerol, thio
  • compositions may also comprise additional stabilizing agents, which further enhance stability of a therapeutically active protein therein.
  • Stabilizing agents of particular interest to the present invention include, but are not limited to, methionine and EDTA, which protect the protein against methionine oxidation, and a nonionic surfactant, which protects the protein against aggregation associated with freeze-thawing or mechanical shearing.
  • the composition further comprises a surfactant.
  • the surfactant is selected from a detergent, ethoxylated castor oil, polyglycolyzed glycerides, acetylated monoglycerides, sorbitan fatty acid esters, polyoxypropylene-polyoxyethylene block polymers (eg. poloxamers such as Pluronic® F68, poloxamer 188 and 407, Triton X-100), polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters, polyoxyethylene and polyethylene derivatives such as alkylated and alkoxylated derivatives (tweens, e.g.
  • Tween-20, Tween-40, Tween-80 and Brij-35 monoglycerides or ethoxylated derivatives thereof, diglycerides or polyoxyethylene derivatives thereof, alcohols, glycerol, lectins and phospholipids (eg. phosphatidyl serine, phosphatidyl choline, phosphatidyl ethanolamine, phosphatidyl inositol, diphosphatidyl glycerol and sphingomyelin), derivates of phospholipids (eg. dipalmitoyl phosphatidic acid) and lysophospholipids (eg.
  • phospholipids eg. dipalmitoyl phosphatidic acid
  • lysophospholipids eg.
  • ceramides e.g. sodium tauro-dihydrofusidate etc.
  • long-chain fatty acids and salts thereof C 6 -C 12 (eg.
  • acylcarnitines and derivatives N ⁇ -acylated derivatives of lysine, arginine or histidine, or side-chain acylated derivatives of lysine or arginine, N ⁇ -acylated derivatives of dipeptides comprising any combination of lysine, arginine or histidine and a neutral or acidic amino acid, N ⁇ -acylated derivative of a tripeptide comprising any combination of a neutral amino acid and two charged amino acids, DSS (docusate sodium, CAS registry no [577-11-7]), docusate calcium, CAS registry no [128-49-4]), docusate potassium, CAS registry no [7491-09-0]), SDS (sodium dodecyl sulphate or sodium lauryl sulphate), sodium caprylate, cholic acid or derivatives thereof, bile acids and salts thereof and glycine or taurine conjugates
  • DSS docusate sodium, CAS
  • N-alkyl-N,N-dimethylammonio-1-propanesulfonates 3-cholamido-1-propyldimethylammonio-1-propanesulfonate
  • cationic surfactants quaternary ammonium bases
  • nonionic surfactants e.g. dodecyl 13-D-glucopyranoside
  • poloxamines eg. Tetronic's
  • Tetronic's which are tetrafunctional block copolymers derived from sequential addition of propylene oxide and ethylene oxide to ethylenediamine, or the surfactant may be selected from the group of imidazoline derivatives, or mixtures thereof.
  • Each one of these specific surfactants constitutes an alternative embodiment of the invention.
  • Such additional ingredients may include wetting agents, emulsifiers, antioxidants, bulking agents, tonicity modifiers, chelating agents, metal ions, oleaginous vehicles, proteins (e.g., human serum albumin, gelatine or proteins) and a zwitterion (e.g., an amino acid such as betaine, taurine, arginine, glycine, lysine and histidine).
  • additional ingredients should not adversely affect the overall stability of the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention.
  • compositions containing a growth hormone conjugate according to the present invention may be administered to a patient in need of such treatment at several sites, for example, at topical sites, for example, skin and mucosal sites, at sites which bypass absorption, for example, administration in an artery, in a vein, in the heart, and at sites which involve absorption, for example, administration in the skin, under the skin, in a muscle or in the abdomen.
  • topical sites for example, skin and mucosal sites
  • sites which bypass absorption for example, administration in an artery, in a vein, in the heart
  • sites which involve absorption for example, administration in the skin, under the skin, in a muscle or in the abdomen.
  • Administration of pharmaceutical compositions according to the invention may be through several routes of administration, for example, lingual, sublingual, buccal, in the mouth, oral, in the stomach and intestine, nasal, pulmonary, for example, through the bronchioles and alveoli or a combination thereof, epidermal, dermal, transdermal, vaginal, rectal, ocular, for examples through the conjunctiva, uretal, and parenteral to patients in need of such a treatment.
  • routes of administration for example, lingual, sublingual, buccal, in the mouth, oral, in the stomach and intestine, nasal, pulmonary, for example, through the bronchioles and alveoli or a combination thereof, epidermal, dermal, transdermal, vaginal, rectal, ocular, for examples through the conjunctiva, uretal, and parenteral to patients in need of such a treatment.
  • compositions of the current invention may be administered in several dosage forms, for example, as solutions, suspensions, emulsions, microemulsions, multiple emulsion, foams, salves, pastes, plasters, ointments, tablets, coated tablets, rinses, capsules, for example, hard gelatine capsules and soft gelatine capsules, suppositories, rectal capsules, drops, gels, sprays, powder, aerosols, inhalants, eye drops, ophthalmic ointments, ophthalmic rinses, vaginal pessaries, vaginal rings, vaginal ointments, injection solution, in situ transforming solutions, for example in situ gelling, in situ setting, in situ precipitating, in situ crystallization, infusion solution, and implants.
  • solutions for example, suspensions, emulsions, microemulsions, multiple emulsion, foams, salves, pastes, plasters, ointments, tablets, coated tablets, rinses,
  • compositions of the invention may further be compounded in, or attached to, for example through covalent, hydrophobic and electrostatic interactions, a drug carrier, drug delivery system and advanced drug delivery system in order to further enhance stability of the growth hormone conjugate, increase bioavailability, increase solubility, decrease adverse effects, achieve chronotherapy well known to those skilled in the art, and increase patient compliance or any combination thereof.
  • carriers, drug delivery systems and advanced drug delivery systems include, but are not limited to, polymers, for example cellulose and derivatives, polysaccharides, for example dextran and derivatives, starch and derivatives, poly(vinyl alcohol), acrylate and methacrylate polymers, polylactic and polyglycolic acid and block co-polymers thereof, polyethylene glycols, carrier proteins, for example albumin, gels, for example, thermogelling systems, for example block co-polymeric systems well known to those skilled in the art, micelles, liposomes, microspheres, nanoparticulates, liquid crystals and dispersions thereof, L2 phase and dispersions there of, well known to those skilled in the art of phase behaviour in lipid-water systems, polymeric micelles, multiple emulsions, self-emulsifying, self-microemulsifying, cyclodextrins and derivatives thereof, and dendrimers.
  • polymers for example cellulose and derivatives, polysaccharides, for example dextran and derivative
  • compositions of the current invention are useful in the composition of solids, semisolids, powder and solutions for pulmonary administration of growth hormone conjugate, using, for example a metered dose inhaler, dry powder inhaler and a nebulizer, all being devices well known to those skilled in the art.
  • compositions of the current invention are specifically useful in the composition of controlled, sustained, protracting, retarded, and slow release drug delivery systems. More specifically, but not limited to, compositions are useful in composition of parenteral controlled release and sustained release systems (both systems leading to a many-fold reduction in number of administrations), well known to those skilled in the art. Even more preferably, are controlled release and sustained release systems administered subcutaneous.
  • examples of useful controlled release system and compositions are hydrogels, oleaginous gels, liquid crystals, polymeric micelles, microspheres, nanoparticles,
  • Methods to produce controlled release systems useful for compositions of the current invention include, but are not limited to, crystallization, condensation, co-crystallization, precipitation, co-precipitation, emulsification, dispersion, high pressure homogenisation, encapsulation, spray drying, microencapsulating, coacervation, phase separation, solvent evaporation to produce microspheres, extrusion and supercritical fluid processes.
  • General reference is made to Handbook of Pharmaceutical Controlled Release (Wise, D. L., ed. Marcel Dekker, New York, 2000) and Drug and the Pharmaceutical Sciences vol. 99 : Protein Composition and Delivery (MacNally, E. J., ed. Marcel Dekker, New York, 2000).
  • Parenteral administration may be performed by subcutaneous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal or intravenous injection by means of a syringe, optionally a pen-like syringe.
  • parenteral administration can be performed by means of an infusion pump.
  • a further option is a composition which may be a solution or suspension for the administration of the growth hormone conjugate in the form of a nasal or pulmonal spray.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions containing the growth hormone conjugate of the invention can also be adapted to transdermal administration, e.g. by needle-free injection or from a patch, optionally an iontophoretic patch, or transmucosal, e.g. buccal, administration.
  • stabilized composition refers to a composition with increased physical stability, increased chemical stability or increased physical and chemical stability.
  • physical stability of the protein composition refers to the tendency of the protein to form biologically inactive and/or insoluble aggregates of the protein as a result of exposure of the protein to thermo-mechanical stresses and/or interaction with interfaces and surfaces that are destabilizing, such as hydrophobic surfaces and interfaces.
  • Physical stability of the aqueous protein compositions is evaluated by means of visual inspection and/or turbidity measurements after exposing the composition filled in suitable containers (e.g. cartridges or vials) to mechanical/physical stress (e.g. agitation) at different temperatures for various time periods. Visual inspection of the compositions is performed in a sharp focused light with a dark background.
  • the turbidity of the composition is characterized by a visual score ranking the degree of turbidity for instance on a scale from 0 to 3 (a composition showing no turbidity corresponds to a visual score 0, and a composition showing visual turbidity in daylight corresponds to visual score 3).
  • a composition is classified physical unstable with respect to protein aggregation, when it shows visual turbidity in daylight.
  • the turbidity of the composition can be evaluated by simple turbidity measurements well-known to the skilled person.
  • Physical stability of the aqueous protein compositions can also be evaluated by using a spectroscopic agent or probe of the conformational status of the protein.
  • the probe is preferably a small molecule that preferentially binds to a non-native conformer of the protein.
  • Thioflavin T is a fluorescent dye that has been widely used for the detection of amyloid fibrils. In the presence of fibrils, and perhaps other protein configurations as well, Thioflavin T gives rise to a new excitation maximum at about 450 nm and enhanced emission at about 482 nm when bound to a fibril protein form. Unbound Thioflavin T is essentially non-fluorescent at the wavelengths.
  • hydrophobic patch probes that bind preferentially to exposed hydrophobic patches of a protein.
  • the hydrophobic patches are generally buried within the tertiary structure of a protein in its native state, but become exposed as a protein begins to unfold or denature.
  • these small molecular, spectroscopic probes are aromatic, hydrophobic dyes, such as antrhacene, acridine, phenanthroline or the like.
  • spectroscopic probes are metal-amino acid complexes, such as cobalt metal complexes of hydrophobic amino acids, such as phenylalanine, leucine, isoleucine, methionine, and valine, or the like.
  • chemical stability of the protein composition refers to chemical covalent changes in the protein structure leading to formation of chemical degradation products with potential less biological potency and/or potential increased immunogenic properties compared to the native protein structure.
  • chemical degradation products can be formed depending on the type and nature of the native protein and the environment to which the protein is exposed. Elimination of chemical degradation can most probably not be completely avoided and increasing amounts of chemical degradation products is often seen during storage and use of the protein composition as well-known by the person skilled in the art.
  • Most proteins are prone to deamidation, a process in which the side chain amide group in glutaminyl or asparaginyl residues is hydrolysed to form a free carboxylic acid.
  • a “stabilized composition” refers to a composition with increased physical stability, increased chemical stability or increased physical and chemical stability.
  • a composition must be stable during use and storage (in compliance with recommended use and storage conditions) until the expiration date is reached.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprising the growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) or (II) is stable for more than 6 weeks of usage and for more than 3 years of storage.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprising the growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) or (II) is stable for more than 4 weeks of usage and for more than 3 years of storage.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprising the growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) or (II) is stable for more than 4 weeks of usage and for more than two years of storage.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprising the growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) or (II) is stable for more than 2 weeks of usage and for more than two years of storage.
  • a growth hormone conjugate which comprises a growth hormone compound (GH) having
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 80% identity to the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone (hGH) (SEQ ID NO: 1), such as at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, or at least 95% identity with hGH, or GH is hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1). 3.
  • the additional disulfide bond is between a loop segment and a helical segment or within loop segment or between loop segments or between helical segments.
  • the GH comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein at least one of the cysteines is present in a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154 (L3).
  • the GH comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein the additional disulfide bond which connects a loop segment with a helical segment, such as helix B or H2.
  • the additional disulfide bond is between a loop segment and a helical segment or within loop segment or between loop segments or between helical segments.
  • the GH comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein at least one of the cysteines is present in a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154 (L3).
  • the GH comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein the additional disulfide bond which connects a loop segment, with a helical segment, such as helix B or H2. 18.
  • a growth hormone conjugate wherein the growth hormone conjugate has the formula (I):
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound having a single Cys mutation
  • B represents a hydrophilic spacer linked to the sulphur residue of the Cys mutation
  • W is a chemical group linking A and B
  • A represent an albumin binding residue
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 80% identity to the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone (hGH) (SEQ ID NO: 1), such as at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, or at least 95% identity with hGH, or GH is hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • a growth hormone conjugate wherein the growth hormone conjugate has the formula (I).
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound having an additional disulfide bridge
  • B represents a hydrophilic spacer
  • W is a chemical group linking A and B
  • A represent an albumin binding residue
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 80% identity to the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone (hGH) (SEQ ID NO: 1), such as at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, or at least 95% identity with hGH, or GH is hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • hGH human growth hormone
  • the GH comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein at least one of the cysteines is present in a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154 (L3).
  • any one of embodiments 42-47, wherein the GH comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein the additional disulfide bond which connects a loop segment, with a helical segment, such as helix B or helix 2. 49.
  • a growth hormone conjugate wherein the growth hormone conjugate has the formula (I):
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound having a single Cys mutation and an additional disulfide bridge
  • B represents a hydrophilic spacer linked to the sulphur residue of the Cys mutation
  • W is a chemical group linking A and B
  • A represent an albumin binding residue; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 80% identity to the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone (hGH) (SEQ ID NO: 1), such as at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, or at least 95% identity with hGH, or GH is hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • hGH human growth hormone
  • said albumin binding residue is selected from a straight chain alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, a group which has an ⁇ -carboxylic acid group or an ⁇ -carboxylic acid isoster.
  • said albumin binding residue has from 6 to 40 carbon atoms, from 8 to 26 carbon atoms or from 8 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • albumin binding residue is a peptide, such as a peptide comprising less than 40 amino acid residues.
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-95, optionally in combination with a pharmaceutical acceptable excipient. 98.
  • a pharmaceutical composition of embodiment 97 wherein said composition can be administered through lingual, sublingual, buccal, in the mouth, oral, in the stomach and intestine, nasal, pulmonary, epidermal, dermal, transdermal, and parenteral to patients.
  • GDD growth hormone deficiency
  • APCD chronic dialysis
  • malnutritional associated cardiovascular disease in APCD reversal of cachexia in APCD; cancer in APCD; chronic abstractive pulmonal disease in APCD; HIV in APCD; elderly with APCD; chronic liver disease in APCD, fatigue syndrome in APCD; Crohn's disease; impaired liver function; males with HIV infections; short bowel syndrome; central obesity; HIV-associated lipodystrophy syndrome (HALS); male infertility; patients after major elective surgery, alcohol/drug detoxification or neurological trauma; aging; frail elderly; osteo-arthritis; traumatically damaged cartilage; erectile dysfunction; fibromyalgia; memory disorders; depression; traumatic brain injury; subarachnoid haemorrhage; very low birth
  • A represent an albumin binding residue
  • B1 represents a hydrophilic spacer
  • W is a chemical group linking A and B1
  • U represent a conjugating moiety.
  • a and W are as defined in any of the above embodiments.
  • U comprises or consists of an aryl, an heteraryl, a substituted malimide or a pyrrolidine-2,5-dione such as —NHC(O)CH 2 CH 2 -pyrrolidin-2.5-dione.
  • U comprises D1-(CH 2 ) l6 -D2, wherein D1 and D2 are independently selected from —O—, —N(R6)-, —NC(O)R7- or a valence bond; wherein R6 and R7 independently represent hydrogen or C 1-6 -alkyl.
  • U comprises or consists of a leaving group, such as Cl, Br, I, —OH, —OS(O) 2 Me, —OS(O) 2 CF 3 , —Ots. 108.
  • the compound according to embodiments 107, wherein the leaving group is a halogen compound selected from Cl, Br and I, preferably Br. 109.
  • the compound according to embodiment 103 or embodiment 104, wherein U comprises or consists of an allyl amine (H 2 C ⁇ CH—CH 2 —NH 2 ), such as —C(O)NHCH 2 —CH ⁇ CH 2 . 110.
  • the compound according to any of the embodiments 103-110, wherein the therapeutic compound is a polypeptide. 112.
  • DIPEA N,N-diisopropylethylamine
  • DMSO dimethylsulfoxide
  • DTT dithiothreitol
  • EDAC 1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide hydrochloride
  • Et 2 O diethyl ether
  • EtOAc ethyl acetate
  • Fmoc 9H-fluoren-9-ylmethoxycarbonyl
  • Fmoc-Glu-O-t-Bu N-Fmoc-glutamic acid-1-t-butyl ester
  • Fmoc-OEG-OH (2[2-(Fmoc-amino)ethoxy]ethoxy)acetic acid
  • OEG (2[2-(amino)ethoxy]ethoxy)acetic acid
  • TFA trifuloroacetic acid
  • THF tetrahydrofuran
  • TIS triisopropylsilane
  • CDCl 3 deuterio chloroform
  • DMSO-d 6 hexadeuterio dimethylsulfoxide
  • TNBS trinitrobenzensulfonic acid
  • TSTU O—(N-Succinimidyl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyl uranium tetrafluoroborate
  • the gene coding for the growth hormone compound was inserted recombinantly into a plasmid vector.
  • a suitable E. coli strain was subsequently transformed using the plasmid vector.
  • hGH or GH variants may be expressed with an N-terminal methionine or as a MEAE fusion from which the MEAE sequence is subsequently cleaved off.
  • the purification was performed using ion-exchange chromatography and hydrophibic interaction, followed by removal of the peptide tag using human dipeptidyl peptidase I (hDPPI) expressed from CHO cell. Final purification was achieved by isoprecipitation and ion-exchange chromatography. The purification could also be achieved by using but not limited to ion-exchange chromatography, hydrophobic interaction chromatography, affinity chromatography, size exclusion chromatography and membrane based separation techniques known to a person skilled in the art.
  • the intact purified protein was analysed using MALDI-MS.
  • the observed mass corresponded to the theoretical mass deduced from the amino acid sequence.
  • the expected linkage disulfide bonds may be demonstrated by peptide mapping using trypsin and AspN digestion followed by MALDI-MS analysis of the digest before and after reduction of the disulfide bonds with DTT.
  • the compound of interest is digested by a relevant protease (Trypsin, Chymotrypsin, Pepsin, Elastase, Factor VIIa, Factor Xa, Proteinase K, Carboxy peptidase, DPPIV, Neutral Endopeptidase, Granzyme B, Proline-endopeptidase, Staphylococcal peptidase I, Thermolysin, Thrombin, Arg-C proteinase, Asp-N endopeptidase, Caspase 1-10, Clostripain, Enterokinase, Glutamyl endopeptidase, Granzyme B, LysC, LysN, Proline-endopeptidase and Staphylococcal peptidase I or tissue extracts.) in an appropriate buffer (e.g. PBS or ammonium bicarbonate) at 37° C. for up till 24 hrs. Proteolytic degradation is assessed by a
  • test compound solution 100 ⁇ L of test compound solution at 1 mg/mL in ammonium bicarbonate buffer is degraded by enzyme for up till 24 hrs at 37° C. Sub-samples are taken to various time points and the proteolytic reaction is stopped by acidifying the sample by 10 times dilution into 1% TFA. These diluted samples are analysed by reversed phase HPLC to estimate the degree of proteolytic digestion.
  • Half life (T 1/2 ) is calculated as one phase decay also by GraphPad Prism software.
  • enzymes that may be used are elastase (Sigma from porcine pancrease) and chymotrypsin (Roche sequencing grade).
  • Capillary electrophoresis was carried out using an Agilent Technologies 3DCE system (Agilent Technologies). Data acquisition and signal processing were performed using Agilent Technologies 3DCE ChemStation. The capillary was a 64.5 cm (56.0 cm efficient length) 50 ⁇ m i.d. “Extended Light Path Capillary” from Agilent. UV detection was performed at 200 nm (16 nm Bw, Reference 380 nm and 50 nm Bw). The running electrolyte was phosphate buffer 50 mM pH 7 (method A). The capillary was conditioned with 0.1M NaOH for 3 min, then with Milli-Q water for 2 min and with the electrolyte for 3 min.
  • the capillary was flushed with milli-Q water for 2 min, then with phosphoric acid for 2 min, and with milli-Q water for 2 min.
  • the hydrodynamic injection was done at 50 mbar for 4.0 sec.
  • the voltage was +25 kV.
  • the capillary temperature was 30° C. and the runtime was 10.5 min.
  • RP-HPLC analysis was performed on a Agilent 1100 system using a Vydac 218TP54 4.6 mm ⁇ 250 mm 5 ⁇ m C-18 silica column (The Separations Group, Hesperia). Detection was by UV at 214 nm, 254 nm, 280 nm and 301 nm. The column was equilibrated with 0.1% trifluoracetic acid/H 2 O and the sample was eluted by a suitable gradient of 0 to 90% acetonitrile against 0.1% trifluoracetic acid/H 2 O.
  • LC-MS analysis was performed on a PE-Sciex API 100 or 150 mass spectrometer equipped with two Perkin Elmer Series 200 Micropumps, a Perkin Elmer Series 200 autosampler, an Applied Biosystems 785A UV detector and a Sedex 75 Evaporative Light scattering detector.
  • a Waters Xterra 3.0 mm ⁇ 50 mm 5 ⁇ C-18 silica column was eluted at 1.5 ml/min at room temperature. It was equilibrated with 5% MeCN/0.1% TFA/H 2 O and eluted for 1.0 min with 5% MeCN/0.1% TFA/H 2 O and then with a linear gradient to 90% MeCN/0.1% TFA/H 2 O over 7 min.
  • Detection was by UV detection at 214 nm and Evaporative light Scattering. A fraction of the column eluate was introduced into the ionspray interface of a PE-Sciex API 100 mass spectrometer. The mass range 300-2000 amu was scanned every 2 seconds during the run.
  • Protein concentrations were estimated by measuring absorbance at 280 nm using a NanoDrop ND-1000 UV-spectrofotometer.
  • Peptide mapping was performed using Asp-N digestion of the reduced and alkylated protein.
  • the alkylated product was purified using HPLC.
  • Subsequently the alkylated purified product was digested overnight with endoprotease Asp-N(Boehringer) at an enzyme:substrate ratio of 1:100.
  • the digest was HPLC separated using a C-18 column and standard TFA/MeCN buffer system.
  • the resulting peptide map was compared to that of underivatized hGH and fractions with different retention times were collected and further analyzed using Maldi-tof mass spectrometry.
  • SDS poly-acrylamide gel electrophoresis was performed using NuPAGE 4%-12% Bis-Tris gels (Invitrogen NP0321BOX). The gels were silver stained (Invitrogen LC6100) or Coomassie stained (Invitrogen LC6065) and where relevant also stained for PEG with barium iodide as described by M. M. Kurfurst in Anal. Biochem. 200(2), 244-248, (1992).
  • Protein chromatography was performed on an Akta Explorer chromatographic system and columns from GE Health Care. Anion exchange was done using a Q-Sepharose HP 26/10 column.
  • Starting buffer was 20 mM triethanolamine buffer pH 8.5 and eluting buffer was starting buffer+0.2 M NaCl. The compounds were typically eluted with a gradient of 0-75% eluting buffer over 15 column volumes. De-salting and buffer exchange was performed using a HiPrep 26/10 column.
  • a solution of 10% DIPEA in DMF (solution 1) and a solution of 1 M aqueous TNBS (solution 2) was prepared.
  • a few resin beads were placed in a small test tube and 1-3 drops of each solution (1 and 2) were added. After a short mixing the mixture was left at room temperature for 10 min. and the beads inspected. Intensely orange or red beads indicate positive results (i.e presence of free amines); yellow or slightly orange beads indicate slightly positive and colorless beads are negative.
  • Log P values can be calculated as m Log P and/or c Log P for the albumin binder part and/or the hydrophilic spacer part using published algorithms ( J. Am. Chem. Soc., 86, 5175-5180, (1964) “A New Substituent Constant, v, Derived from Partition Coefficients”, C. A. Lipinski et al. Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews, 23, 3-25 (1997), “Experimental and Computational Approaches to Estimate Solubility and Permeability in Drug Discovery and Development Settings” and I. Moriguchi, S. Hirono, I. Nakagome, H. Hirano, Chem. and Pharm.
  • the compound (I) was synthesised on solid support according to scheme 1, in 1 mM scale using standard Fmoc-peptide chemistry on an ABI433 synthetizer. Peptide was assembled on a Fmoc-Lys(MTT)-Wang resin using Fmoc-OEG-OH and Fmoc-Glu-OtBu protected amino acids. 4-(16-1H-Tetrazol-5-yl-hexadecanoylsulfamoyl)butyric acid was manual coupled using DIC/NHS in DCM/NMP, 2 eq. over night, TNBS test showed the reaction to be completed.
  • 2-Chlorotrityl resin (2.0 g, 2.6 mmol) was svelled in DCM for 0.5 hr. A solution of 4,7,10-trioxa-1,13-diamine in DCM (30 mL) was added. Resin was stirred at rt for 1 hr. The resin was washed once with DCM, then added a solution of DIPEA:MeOH:DCM (15 mL:15 mL:20 mL). The resin was shaken for 0.5 hr, then washed trice with DCM.
  • Fmoc-Glu(OtBu)OH, Fmoc-Glu-OtBu and FmocThexOH were then coupled sequentially by standard peptide chemistry as follows: A 0.5 M solution each of Fmoc-AA-OH/DIC/HOBt in NMP (11.7 mL) was mixed and after 2 min. added to the resin. The resin was shaken for 45 min. at rt. and then washed with 5 ⁇ NMP and 5 ⁇ DCM. A solution of Ac 2 O/DIPEA/NMP (1:1:5) was added and the resin was stirred at rt for 10 min. The resin was washed (5 ⁇ NMP and 5 ⁇ DCM). The resin was then treated with 30% piperidin in NMP for 2 ⁇ 10 min.
  • the compound (VIII) was synthesised on solid support according to scheme 3.
  • Fmoc protected Rink-Amide-Resin (2.2 g, 0.6 mMol/g) was weighed into a flask.
  • the resin was swelled with NMP (3 ⁇ 30 mL) for 2 hrs.
  • the resin was shaken with 25% piperidine in NMP (30 mL) for 10 min.
  • the resin was drained and treated with 25% piperidine in NMP (30 mL) for 1 hr followed by draining and wash with NMP (6 ⁇ 30 mL).
  • the resin was treated with hexafluorisopropanol (20 mL) for 10 min again and shaken for 10 min.
  • the resin was drained and washed with DCM (3 ⁇ 30 mL) followed by drained and washed with NMP (3 ⁇ 30 mL).
  • 4-(Boc-amino)benzoic acid and HOBt were weighed into a flask, dissolved in bromo phenol blue in NMP (30 mL, 0.5 mM). This solution was added to the drained resin above followed by addition of DIC.
  • the reaction was shaken at ambient temperature.
  • the resin was drained and washed with NMP (6 ⁇ 30 mL).
  • the resin was shaken with 25% piperidine in NMP (10 mL) for 10 min.
  • the resin was drained and treated with 25% piperidine in NMP (10 mL) for 1 hr followed by draining and wash with NMP (6 ⁇ 15 mL).
  • Fmoc-OEG-OH and HOBt were weighed into a flask, dissolved in brom phenol blue in NMP (15 mL, 0.5 mM). This solution was added to the drained resin followed by addition of DIC. The reaction was shaken at ambient temperature for 23 hrs.
  • the resin was drained and washed with NMP (6 ⁇ 15 mL).
  • the resin was shaken with 25% piperidine in NMP (10 mL) for 10 min.
  • the resin was drained and treated with 25% piperidine in NMP (10 mL) for 1 hr followed by draining and wash with NMP (6 ⁇ 15 mL).
  • Fmoc-Glu-O-t-Bu and HOBt were weighed into a flask, dissolved in bromo phenol blue in NMP (15 mL, 0.5 mM). This solution was added to the drained resin followed by addition of DIC. The reaction was shaken at ambient temperature for 18 hrs.
  • the resin was drained and washed with NMP (6 ⁇ 15 mL).
  • the resin was shaken with 25% piperidine in NMP (10 mL) for 10 min.
  • the resin was drained and treated with 25% piperidine in NMP (10 mL) for 1 hour followed by draining and wash with NMP (6 ⁇ 15 mL).
  • Fmoc-Glu-O-t-Bu and HOBt were weighed into a flask, dissolved in 15 ml 0.5 mM bromo phenol blue in NMP. This solution was added to the drained resin followed by addition of DIC. The reaction was shaken at ambient temperature for 18 hrs. The resin was drained and washed with NMP (6 ⁇ 15 mL). The resin was shaken with 25% piperidine in NMP (10 mL) for 10 min.
  • the resin was drained and treated with 25% piperidine in NMP (10 mL) for 1 hr followed by draining and washing with NMP (6 ⁇ 15 mL).
  • Fmoc-OEG-OH and HOBt were weighed into a flask, dissolved in bromo phenol blue in NMP (15 mL, 0.5 mM). This solution was added to the drained resin followed by addition of DIC. The reaction was shaken at ambient temperature.
  • the resin was drained and washed with NMP (6 ⁇ 15 mL).
  • the resin was shaken with 25% piperidine in NMP (10 mL) for 10 min.
  • the resin was drained and treated with 25% piperidine in NMP (10 mL) for 1 hr followed by draining and washing with NMP (6 ⁇ 15 mL).
  • N-tert-butoxycarbonyl cadaverine (24.3 mg; 0.12 mmol) was added to a solution of 17-((S)-1-Carboxy-3- ⁇ 2-[2-( ⁇ 2-[2-(2,5-dioxo-pyrrolidin-1-yloxycarbonylmethoxy)-ethoxy]ethylcarbamoyl ⁇ methoxy)ethoxy]ethylcarbamoyl ⁇ propylcarbamoyl)-heptadecanoic acid (100 mg; 0.12 mmol) and DIPEA (46.68 mg; 0.36 mmol) in THF (2.0 ml). Reaction mixture was stirred over night at room temperature, and then concentrated in vacuo.
  • transglutaminase to attach a handle to GH has previously been described in WO2005/070468 and may be used in accordance with the present invention for attachment of an albumine binder.
  • the TGase used is microbial transglutaminase from Streptoverticillium mobaraense according to U.S. Pat. No. 5,156,956. A general method is described in the section Chemistry I above.
  • Buffer A Triethanolamine (119 mg, 0.8 mmol) was dissolved in water (40 mL) and pH adjusted to 8.5.
  • transaminated GH III
  • the oxidation is typically done at low temperature, such as 4-10° C. over 30 min. optionally in the dark.
  • Periodate may oxidize metheonine residues in GH to their corresponding metheonine sulfoxide residues.
  • small molecule organic thioethers may be added during periodate oxidation.
  • a suitable organic thioether is 3-methylthiopropan-1-ol but the skilled person will be able to suggest others.
  • Buffer change may be performed in order to obtain an acid solution required for efficient sodium cyano borohydride reduction.
  • an excess of A-W—B1-NH2 amine is used, and sodium cyanoborohydride may be added in smaller portions over time.
  • Buffer A Triethanolamine (119 mg, 0.8 mmol) was dissolved in water (40 mL) and pH adjusted to 8.5.
  • Buffer B 3-methylthiopropanol (725 mg, 7.1 mmol) was dissolved in Buffer A (10 mL).
  • Buffer C HEPES (5.96 g) was dissolved in water (1.0 L) and pH adjusted to 7.0 Periodate: NaIO 4 (48.1 mg, 0.225 mmol) was dissolved in water (1.0 mL).
  • Albumin binder (II) as described in Example 17 through 40 may be used.
  • the later reaction may be performed as follows:
  • a solution of oxidized transaminated GH is added a solution of albumin binder linker in a mixture of AcOH (1.5 mL) and 50 mM MES (0.5 mL) at pH 6.00.
  • the resulting reaction mixture is gently shaken at RT for 30 min. at which time a NaCNBH 3 solution (15 ⁇ L, (22 mg NaCNBH 3 dissolved in 500 ⁇ L Milli-Q water+AcOH (15 ⁇ L))) is added.
  • the sample is covered with tin foil and stirrer over night at RT.
  • the conjugate can be isolated by anion exchange chromatography as follows: Acetic acid is removed by buffer changed with pure water (3 ⁇ ) using Amicon Ultral5 devices (Ultracel 10K tubes) by centrifugation at 4000 rpm/min. for 3 ⁇ 8 min. The mixture is then buffer changed to 20 mM TEA, pH: 8.50 using Amicon Filter devises and diluted to a final volume of 50 mL with 20 mM TEA, before loading it on a HiLoad Q Sepharose, 26/10 column.
  • the column is initially washed with 20 mM TEA, pH 8.50 (buffer A) and then eluted with 20 mM TEA, 500 mM NaCl, pH 8.50 (buffer B) using a 0-100% (B) gradient over 20 CV, with a flow rate of 2 mL/min.
  • the pooled fractions were buffer changed 5 times to 10 mM ammoniumbicarbonate buffer in pure water using Amicon Ultral5 devices (Ultracel 10K tubes) by centrifugation at 4000 rpm/min. for 3 ⁇ 8 min Using the albumin binder from Example 18 will result in the following compound
  • the derivatization process as shown above utilise an albumin binding linker A-W—B wherein B has a terminal aldehyde functionality.
  • Conjugation of hGH with A-W—B-CHO occurs via reductive alkylation (hGH ⁇ VI).
  • Reductive alkylation is exemplified herein and is well-recognized in the art and results in hGH compounds modified at the N-terminal position.
  • hGH[Q84C, Y143C] (23 mg) was dissolved in Hepes buffer (2.3 mL 0.25 mM pH 7.0).
  • C 20 diacid-Trx- ⁇ Glu-Glu-OEG-OEG-Gly-Gly-dimethylacetal (2 mg, see example 14 above) was treated with TFA (50 ⁇ L) for 6 min. and evaporated to dryness in vacuum.
  • the residue was stripped with EtOH (200 ⁇ L) and evaporated to dryness in vacuum.
  • the residue was dissolved in DMF (100 ⁇ L) and added to the hGH solution. A precipitate was formed and redissolved by addition of DMF (1 mL).
  • hGH[L101C] as obtained above had part of its free cystein blocked with glutathione and cystamine. Deblocking was performed enzymatically using glutaredoxin II (Grx2) in an equilibrium buffer containing GSH and GSSG. Deblocked hGH[L101C] was separated from low molecular weight GSH/GSSG by buffer exchanged on a Sephadex G25 column.
  • Albumin binder from example 5 (78 mg, 5 eq) was dissolved in 170 mL HEPES/EDTA buffer with 5% hydroxypropyl- ⁇ -cyclodextrin and added MTP (2.1 mL, 1%) and 0.5 M NaCl (6.34 g). To this mixture was added concentrated hGH[L101C] (1 eq, 46 mL) and the mixture was left over night at RT. The solution became cloudy over night. As HPLC indicated unreacted starting material another 5 eq. albumin binder from example 5 dissolved in a minimum of NMP was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at RT for an additional 16 hrs.
  • reaction buffer was changed to TEA-buffer A with ethylen glycol on a Sephadex column over 3 runs:
  • Desired fractions were collected, pooled and buffer exchanged to 10 mM ammoniumbicarbonate
  • Buffer A 10 mM Ammoniumbicarbonate pH 8.0
  • freezedried vials were dissolved in buffer A and purified again on a new Q Sepharose column:

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Endocrinology (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Plant Pathology (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Obesity (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
  • Medicinal Preparation (AREA)

Abstract

The invention relates to growth hormone compounds with a protracted profile. The effect is obtained by linking an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer to growth hormone variants. Further described are methods of preparing and using such compounds. These growth hormone compounds are based on there althered profile considered particular useful in therapy.

Description

    CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 15/586,960, filed May 4, 2017, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 13/522,390, filed Aug. 24, 2012 (now U.S. Pat. No. 9,695,226, issued Jul. 4, 2017), which is a 35 U.S.C. § 371 national stage application of International Patent Application PCT/EP2011/050923 (published as WO 2011/089255), filed Jan. 24, 2011, which claims priority of European Patent Application 10151405.7, filed Jan. 22, 2010; this application further claims priority under 35 U.S.C. § 119 of U.S. Provisional Application 61/297,305, filed Jan. 22, 2010, all of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
    • FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention relates to a growth hormone compound linked to an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer, and to methods of preparing and using such compounds. These growth hormone conjugates have increased resistance to proteolytic degradation in combination with a protracted profile of action and are useful in therapy.
    • SEQUENCE LISTING
  • The instant application contains a Sequence Listing which has been submitted in ASCII format via EFS-Web and is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Said ASCII copy, created on Mar. 11, 2019, is named 8069US03_SeqListing.txt and is 3 kilobytes in size.
    • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Growth hormone is a polypeptide hormone secreted by the anterior pituitary in mammals. Dependent on species growth hormone is a protein composed of approximately 190 amino acid residues corresponding to a molecular weight of approximately 22 kDa. Growth hormone binds to and signals through cell surface receptors, the growth hormone receptors (GHR). Growth hormone plays a key role in promoting growth, maintaining normal body composition, anabolism and lipid metabolism. It also has direct effects on intermediate metabolism, such as decreased glucose uptake, increased lipolysis, increased amino acid uptake and protein synthesis. The hormone also exerts effects on other tissues including adipose tissue, liver, intestine, kidney, skeleton, connective tissue and muscle. Recombinant human growth hormone (hGH) has been produced and commercially available as, for ex: Genotropin™ (Pharmacia Upjohn), Nutropin™ and Protropin™ (Genentech), Humatrope™ (Eli Lilly), Serostim™ (Serono), Norditropin (Novo Nordisk), Omnitrope (Sandoz), Nutropin Depot (Genentech and Alkermes). Additionally, an analogue with an additional methionine residue at the N-terminal end is also marketed as, for ex: Somatonorm™ (Pharmacia Upjohn/Pfizer).
  • Growth hormone shares a common topology with the other members of the growth hormone family of proteins, Prolactin (PRL) and Placental Lactogen (PL). Growth hormone is classified as a four-helix bundle protein (FIG. 1) exhibiting an “up-up-down-down” topology with two conserved disulphide linkages. Specifically, wild-type human Growth hormone (hGH) is composed of 191 amino acid residues and has four cysteine residues at positions 53, 165, 182 and 189, which stabilizes the three dimensional structure of the protein by forming two intramolecular disulphide bonds connecting C53 with C165 and C182 with C189, respectively (FIG. 1). The structure of hGH has been experimentally determined by X-ray crystallography in the free form (Chantalet L. et al Protein and Peptide Letters 3, 333-340, (1995)) and in complex with its binding protein (the extra cellular domain of the human GHR (hGHR)) (Devos, A. M. et al Science 255, 306-312, (1992)). These structures have been deposited in the Protein Data Bank (PDB) and are publicly available (PDB accession codes 1HGU and 1HWG, respectively). Thus, from the published hGH structures residues important for hGH binding to hGHR can be identified. Furthermore, the dynamic properties of hGH has been studied by Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR) spectroscopy (Kasimova M. R. et al. J. Mol. Biol. 318, 679-695, (2002)). In combination, the X-ray and NMR data can distinguish regions of hGH which are well structured and well defined from regions which are less structured and dynamic. Less structured and dynamic regions of hGH are expected to be particularly susceptible to proteolytic cleavage and proper stabilization of such regions would lead to improved proteolytic stability.
  • hGH has been subject to extensive mutagenesis in attempts to produce hGH analogues with desired chemical or biological properties. Specifically, cysteine mutants for several purposes have been described.
  • US 2003/0162949 disclose cysteine variants of members of the GH supergene family. A general method is provided for creating site-specific, biologically active conjugates of these proteins. The method involves adding cysteine residues to non-essential regions of the proteins or substituting cysteine residues for non-essential amino acids in the proteins using site-directed mutagenesis and then covalently coupling a cysteine-reactive polymer or other type of cysteine-reactive moiety to the proteins via the added cysteine residue
  • WO 02/055532 describes genetically engineered hGH mutants having at least one non-polypeptide moiety covalently attached, particularly hGH mutants where a introduced cysteine residue was used for pegylation.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,951,972 describes physiologically active derivatized natural and recombinant mammalian and human proteins and polypeptides wherein at least one-naturally-occurring or incorporated cysteine residue within the protein is derivatized with various substituents.
  • The proteolytic cleavage of hGH has been studied in detail. The long loop composed of residues 128 to 154 has putative cleavage sites for several proteases, such as thrombin, plasmin, collagenase, subtilisin and chymotrypsin-like serine proteases. Accordingly, this part of hGH has been shown to be particularly susceptible to proteolytic cleavage (Lewis, U. J. Ann. Rev. Physiol. 46, 33-42, (1984)). Enzymes reported to degrade hGH include thrombin, plasmin, subtilisin, chymotrypsin-like serine proteinases and kallikreins.
  • The degradation of hGH in rat tissue has been investigated (Garcia-Barros et al. J. Endocrinol. Invest. 23, 748-754, (2000)).
  • In rat thyroid gland chymotrypsin-like proteases, favouring cleavage at bulky and lipophilic amino acid residues, were found initially to cleave the peptide bond between Y143 and S144 resulting in a two chain molecule, followed by cleavage between Y42 and S43, liberating the N-terminal peptide F1-Y42. The split loop in the two chain molecule is processed further by cleavage between F146 and D147 by chymotrypsin-like proteases and further by the action of carboxypeptidases.
  • Several methods to produce hGH analogues stabilized towards proteolytic degradation have been reported.
  • Alam et al., J. Biotech. 65, 183-190, (1998) designed hGH mutants resistant to thrombin and plasmin by specific point mutations. Thrombin cleaves hGH specifically between R134 and T135, and the double mutant R134D, T135P yielded a hGH variant resistant to cleavage by thrombin, and the triple mutant R134D, T135P, K140A resulted in resistance to plasmin. Furthermore, the latter hGH mutant was resistant to proteolysis by human plasma over a period of 7 days.
  • EP 534568 describes hGH mutants stabilized towards proteolytic degradation by mutating R134 to alanine, leucine, threonine, phenylalanine, proline or histidine.
  • WO 2004/022593/Nautilus describes general high through-put directed evolution methods to produce modified cytokines, including GH variants, with increased proteolytic stability.
  • WO 2006/048777/Nautilus specifically describes modified hGH analogues with improved proteolytic stability. The analogues contain one to five mutations at positions 1-55, 57, 58, 60-63, 67-87, 89-91, 93, 95-100, 102-128, 131-132, 135-139, 141, 142, 144, 148-182, 184, 185 and 187-191. Introduction of cysteine residues can potentially lead to the formation of undesired disulfide linked dimers and in WO 2006/048777 the substitution of amino acid residues by cysteine is specifically excluded from the scope; in WO 2006/048777 (p. 65) it is stated: “The replacement of amino acids by cysteine residues is explicitly avoided since this change would potentially lead to the formation of intermolecular disulfide bonds”.
  • There is an obvious need to develop hGH compounds which are resistant to proteolytic degradation. Such stabilized compounds should exhibit increased stability towards proteolytic cleavage while retaining the desired biological properties of hGH. Such GH molecules would have increased stability, slower clearance and/or prolong in vivo half-life.
  • Furthermore it is well-known to modify the properties and characteristics of peptides by conjugating groups to the peptide which duly changes the properties of the peptide. Such conjugation generally requires some functional group in the peptide to react with another functional group in a conjugating group. Typically, amino groups, such as the N-terminal amino group or the s-amino group in lysines, have been used in combination with a suitable acylating reagent. Alternatively, polyethylene glycol (PEG) or derivatives thereof may be attached to proteins. For a review, see Exp. Opion. Ther. Patent. 14, 859-894, (2004). It has been shown that the attachment of PEG to growth hormone may have a positive effect on the plasma half-life of growth hormone, WO 03/044056.
  • The use of carboxypeptidases to modify the C-terminal of peptides has been described earlier. WO 92/05271 discloses the use of carboxypeptidases and nucleophilic compounds to amidate the C-terminal carboxy group, and WO 98/38285 discloses variants of carboxypeptidase Y particular suitable for this purpose.
  • EP 243 929 discloses the use of carboxypeptidase to incorporate polypeptides, reporter groups or cytotoxic agents into the C-terminal of proteins or polypeptides.
  • WO 2005/035553 describes methods for selective conjugation of peptides by enzymatically incorporating a functional group at the C-terminal of a peptide.
  • Activated halogen derivatives and maleimides represent some of the most common used functional groups when incorporateing conjugates to sulfhydryl groups in peptides (G. T. Hermanson in Bioconjugate Techniques 2. Ed. 2008, Elsevier).
  • Transglutaminase has previously been used to alter the properties of peptides. In the food industry and particular in the diary industry many techniques are available to e.g. cross-bind peptides using transglutaminases. Other documents disclose the use of transglutaminase to alter the properties of physiologically active peptides. EP 950665, EP 785276 and Sato, Adv. Drug Delivery Rev. 54, 487-504, (2002) disclose the direct reaction between peptides comprising at least one Gin and amine-functionalised PEG or similar ligands in the presence of transglutaminase, and Wada, Biotech. Lett. 23, 1367-1372, (2001) discloses the direct conjugation of β-lactoglobulin with fatty acids by means of transglutaminase. The international patent application published as WO 2005/070468 discloses the use of transglutaminase to incorporate a handle whereto conjugating groups can be attached.
  • Growth hormone is a key hormone involved in the regulation of not only somatic growth, but also in the regulation of metabolism of proteins, carbohydrates and lipids. The major effect of growth hormone is to promote growth. Human growth hormone is a 191 amino acid residue protein with the sequence:
  • (SEQ ID NO: 1)
    FPTIPLSRLFDNAMLRAHR-
    LHQLAFDTYQEFEEAYIPKEQKYSFLQNPQTSLCFSESIPTPSNREETQQKSNLELL-
    RISLLLIQSWLEPVQFLRSVFANSLVYGASDSNVYDLLKDLEEGIQTLMGRLEDGSPRT-
    GQIFKQTYSKFDTNSHNDDALLKNYGLLYCFRKDMDKVETFLRIVQCRSVEGSCGF.
  • Administration of human growth hormone and closely related variants thereof is used to treat a variety of growth hormone deficiency related diseases. Being a polypeptide, growth hormone is administered parenterally, i.e., by means of a needle. Growth hormone is, furthermore, characterised by a relative short half-life, hence frequent administrations are required with the corresponding pain and inconvenience for the patient. Hence, there is still a need for the provision of growth hormone compounds with improved pharmacological properties, such as e.g. prolonged half-life.
  • The present invention provides novel growth hormone compound conjugates with improved pharmakinetic and pharmacological properties as well as methods for their production.
    • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • The bioavailability of a subcutaneously administed pharmaceutical compound may be related to the absorption rate. The ability of a compound to pass the tight junctions of the subcutaneous capillaries may in part be related to their physical and chemical properties as well as the molecular size or the hydrodynamic volume of the compound. A protein conjugate such as a pegylated hGH (PEG-hGH) with a 40 kDa PEG has an apparent molecular weight of 150-250 kDa. A hGH molecule with covalent bound albumin has a molecular weight of 87 kDa, whereas a hGH molecule with a non-covalent bound albumin will be dissociated from albumin part of the time and thus have a molecular weight of 22 kDa.
  • It is contemplated that the time spend in the dissociated state depends, at least partly, on the affinity of the albumin binding moiety. Thus the absorption rate of a hGH molecule with a non-covalent bound albumin may be faster than for a PEG-hGH. An increased rate of absorption may be obtained when using albumin binding moieties having lower affinity for albumin.
  • Additionally, the physical and chemical properties of the linker and/or the spacer providing the attachment of the albumin binding moiety to hGH will influence the functionalities of the compounds.
  • The present inventors have surprisingly found that growth hormone compounds (GH) with a single Cys mutation and/or an additional disulfide bridge may be selectively linked to an albumin binding residue—via a hydrophilic spacer that separates the GH and the albumin binding residue, typically with a chemical moiety having a m Log P<0—or a c Log P<0.5 to obtain GH conjugates with improved properties, such as high in vitro potency, or such as an increase in vivo half life, or such as increased resistant to proteolytic degradation possibly in combination with a protracted in vivo profile of action. By linking an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer to the single Cys mutation the biological activity may be retained and one or more of the above mention improvements may be obtained. Such improvements are also obtained when an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to the growth hormone having an additional disulfide bridge, such as to the N-terminal, position 40 or position 141 of hGH. The growth hormone compound may also comprise both a single Cys mutation and an additional disulfide bridge, in which aspect the albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to the single Cys mutation.
  • In a broad aspect the present invention relates to a growth hormone conjugate which comprises a growth hormone compound (GH) having
  • a) a single Cys mutation,
  • b) an additional disulfide bridge, or
  • c) a single Cys mutation and an additional disulfide bridge,
  • wherein an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to said GH, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • In one embodiment of the present invention the stable hGH compounds have additional disulphide bond(s). The disulphide bonds are formed between pairs of cysteines of which one or both are introduced by point mutations in the wild type hGH sequence.
  • In another embodiment of the present invention the stable hGH compounds have additional cysteines. The cysteines are introduced by point mutations in the wild type hGH sequence.
  • In a further embodiment of the present invention the stable hGH compounds have additional disulphide bond(s) and one or more additional cysteines. The additional disulphide bond(s) formed between pairs of additional cysteines and the additional cysteines are introduced by point mutations in the wild type hGH sequence.
  • Furthermore, the present invention is based on the observation that introducing an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer in human growth hormone (hGH) can be done selectively wherein a large proportion of the activity has been retained. Preferably, an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is introduced at the position(s) corresponding to the introduced cystein(s) and/or in position glutamine 40 and/or in position glutamine 141 and/or the N-terminal in hGH having the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1. The use of transglutaminase (TGase), and in particular TGase from Streptoverticillium mobaraenae or Streptomyces lydicus allows a selective introduction of an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer at position 40 or position 141, and the remaining 11 glutamine residues are left untouched despite the fact that glutamine is a substrate for transglutaminase.
  • Thus, in one embodiment of the present invention the growth hormone compound (GH) is linked to one albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer. Typically, the albumin binding residue is attached to the N-terminal, or to position 18, 30, 40, 42, 62, 69, 88, 95, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 108, 135, 141 or 154 of hGH via a hydrophilic spacer. In further embodiments two albumin binding residues are attached to the single Cys mutation and any one of the above positions, such as the N-terminal, position 40 or position 141 of hGH via a hydrophilic spacer.
  • The growth hormone compound conjugates of the present invention have faster subcutaneous absorption compared to PEGylated hGH, and thus, provides less or no lipoathrophy. Furthermore, the albumin binding residue and the hydrophilic spacer are biodegradable in contrast to PEG.
  • It is a still further objective of the present invention to provide a method for improving the properties of a GH by conjugation said protein according to the methods of the present invention.
  • In further aspects the invention relates to isolated growth hormone compounds (GH) comprising a single cys mutation, an additional disulfide bond or growth hormone compounds comprising a single cys mutation and an additional disulfide bond. In a further object of the invention such compounds are soluble.
    • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 is a depiction of the three dimensional structure of wild-type human growth hormone. The depiction shows the intramolecular disulphide bonds connecting C53 with C165 and C182 with C189.
  • FIG. 2 is a depiction of the sequence of human growth hormone and designates loop and helical segments.
    •  DEFINITIONS
  • In the present context, the term “growth hormone compound” as used herein means growth hormone of mammalian origin, such as human, bovine, or porcine growth hormone, and recombinant growth hormone, such as recombinant human, bovine, or porcine growth hormone, and variants as well as mutants of such growth hormones. As used herein “GH” and “growth hormone compound” are interchangeable. When GH is a variant of growth hormone of mammalian origin, such as hGH and recombinant hGH, said variant is understood to be the compound obtained by substituting one or more amino acid residues in the growth hormone, e.g. hGH, sequence with another natural or unnatural amino acid; and/or by adding one or more natural or unnatural amino acids to the growth hormone, e.g. hGH, sequence; and/or by deleting one or more amino acid residue from the growth hormone, e.g. hGH, sequence, wherein any of these steps may optionally be followed by further derivatization of one or more amino acid residues. Typically, the GH has at least 80% identity with hGH, and typically, at least 10% of the growth hormone activity of hGH as determined in assay (I) (Example 46) herein.
  • In the present context, the term “albumin binding residue” as used herein means a residue which binds noncovalently to human serum albumin. The albumin binding residue attached to the growth hormone compound (GH) typically has a binding affinity towards human serum albumin that is below about 10 μM or even below about 1 μM. A range of albumin binding residues are known among linear and branched lipohophillic moieties containing 12-40 carbon atoms, compounds with a cyclopentanophenanthrene skeleton, and/or peptides having 10-45 amino acid residues etc. Albumin binding properties can be measured by surface plasmon resonance as described in J. Biol. Chem. 277(38), 35035-35042, (2002).
  • The term “hydrophilic spacer” as used herein means a spacer that separates a growth hormone compound and an albumin binding residue with a chemical moiety which comprises at least 5 nonhydrogen atoms where 30-50% of these are either N or O.
  • In the present context, the term “transamination” and related terms are intended to indicate a reaction wherein the amide nitrogen in the side chain of glutamine is exchanged with nitrogen from another compound, in particular nitrogen from another nitrogen containing nucelophile.
  • Transglutaminase (E.C.2.3.2.13) is also known as protein-glutamine-yglutamyltransferase and catalyses the general reaction
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00001
  • Q-C(O)—NH2 (amine acceptor) may represent a glutamine residue containing peptide or protein and Q′-NH2 (amine donor) represents an amine-containing nucleophile. Alternatively, QC—(O)—NH2 and Q′-NH2 may represent an amine acceptor and a lysine-containing peptide or protein, respectively. In the present invention, however, Q-C(O)—NH2 represents a glutamine residue containing growth hormone and Q′-NH2 represents an amine-containing nucleophile as indicated above.
  • Examples of useful transglutaminases include microbial transglutaminases, such as e.g. those from Streptomyces mobaraense, Streptomyces cinnamoneum and Streptomyces griseocarneum (all disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,156,956, which is incorporated herein by reference), and from Streptomyces lavendulae (disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,252,469, which is incorporated herein by reference) and Streptomyces ladakanum (JP 2003/199569, which is incorporated herein by reference). It should be noted that members of the former genus Streptoverticillium are now included in the genus Streptomyces (Kaempfer, J. Gen. Microbiol. 137, 1831-1892, (1991)). Other useful microbial transglutaminases have been isolated from Bacillus subtilis (disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,731,183, which is incorporated herein by reference) and from various Myxomycetes. Other examples of useful microbial transglutaminases are those disclosed in WO 96/06931 (e.g. transglutaminase from Bacillus lydicus) and WO 96/22366, both of which are incorporated herein by reference. Useful non-microbial transglutaminases include guinea-pig liver transglutaminase, and transglutaminases from various marine sources like the flat fish Pagrus major (disclosed in EP-0555649, which is incorporated herein by reference), and the Japanese oyster Crassostrea gigas (disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,736,356, which is incorporated herein by reference).
  • In the present context, the term “not accessible” is intended to indicate that something is absent or de facto absent in the sense that it cannot be reached. When it is stated that functional groups are not accessible in a protein to be conjugated it is intended to indicate that said functional group is absent from the protein or, if present, in some way prevented from taking part in reactions. By way of example, said functional group could be buried deep in the structure of the protein so that it is shielded from participating in the reaction. It is recognised that whether or not a functional group is accessible depends on the reaction conditions. It may be envisaged that, e.g. in the presence of denaturing agents or at elevated temperatures the protein may unfold to expose otherwise not accessible functional groups. It is to be understood that “not accessible” means “not accessible at the reaction condition chosen for the particular reaction of interest”.
  • The term “alkane” or “alkyl” is intended to indicate a saturated, linear, branched and/or cyclic hydrocarbon. Unless specified with another number of carbon atoms, the term is intended to indicate hydrocarbons with from 1 to 30 (both included) carbon atoms, such as 1 to 20 (both included), such as from 1 to 10 (both included), e.g. from 1 to 5 (both included). The terms alkyl and alkylene refer to the corresponding radical and bi-radical, respectively.
  • The term “C1-6 alkyl” refers to a straight chained or branched saturated hydrocarbon having from one to six carbon atoms inclusive. Examples of such groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, 2-propyl, 1-butyl, 2-butyl, 2-methyl-2-propyl, 2-methyl-1-butyl and n-hexyl.
  • The term “C3-10 cycloalkyl” typically refers to cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclononyl, and cyclodecanyl.
  • The term “alkene” is intended to indicate linear, branched and/or cyclic hydrocarbons comprising at least one carbon-carbon double bond. Unless specified with another number of carbon atoms, the term is intended to indicate hydrocarbons with from 2 to 30 (both included) carbon atoms, such as 2 to 20 (both included), such as from 2 to 10 (both included), e.g. from 2 to 5 (both included). The terms alkenyl and alkenylene refer to the corresponding radical and bi-radical, respectively.
  • The term “alkyne” is intended to indicate linear, branched and/or cyclic hydrocarbons comprising at least one carbon-carbon triple bond, and it may optionally comprise one or more carbon-carbon double bonds. Unless specified with another number of carbon atoms, the term is intended to indicate hydrocarbons with from 2 to 30 (both included) carbon atoms, such as from 2 to 20 (both included), such as from 2 to 10 (both included), e.g. from 2 to 5 (both included). The terms alkynyl and alkynylene refer to the corresponding radical and bi-radical, respectively.
  • The term “homocyclic aromatic compound” is intended to indicate aromatic hydrocarbons, such as benzene and naphthalene.
  • The term “heterocyclic compound” is intended to indicate a cyclic compound comprising 5, 6 or 7 ring atoms from which 1, 2, 3 or 4 are hetero atoms selected from N, O and/or S. Examples include heterocyclic aromatic compounds, such as thiophene, furan, pyran, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, isothiazole, isooxazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, as well as their partly or fully hydrogenated equivalents, such as piperidine, pirazolidine, pyrrolidine, pyroline, imidazolidine, imidazoline, piperazine and morpholine.
  • The terms “hetero alkane”, “hetero alkene” and “hetero alkyne” are intended to indicate alkanes, alkenes and alkynes as defined above, in which one or more hetero atom or group have been inserted into the structure of said moieties. Examples of hetero groups and atoms include —O—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)2—, —C(O)—C(S)— and —N(R*)—, wherein R* represents hydrogen or C1-C6-alkyl. Examples of heteroalkanes include.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00002
  • The term “radical” or “biradical” is intended to indicate a compound from which one or two, respectively, hydrogen atoms have been removed. When specifically stated, a radical may also indicate the moiety formed by the formal removal of a larger group of atoms, e.g. hydroxyl, from a compound.
  • The term “halogen” is intended to indicate members of the seventh main group of the periodic table, e.g. F, Cl, Br and I.
  • In the present context, the term “aryl” is intended to indicate a carbocyclic aromatic ring radical or a fused aromatic ring system radical wherein at least one of the rings are aromatic. Typical aryl groups include phenyl, biphenylyl, naphthyl, and the like.
  • The term “heteroaryl” or “hetaryl”, as used herein, alone or in combination, refers to an aromatic ring radical with for instance 5 to 7 member atoms, or to a fused aromatic ring system radical with for instance from 7 to 18 member atoms, wherein at least one ring is aromatic, containing one or more heteroatoms as ring atoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur heteroatoms, wherein N-oxides and sulfur monoxides and sulfur dioxides are permissible heteroaromatic substitutions. Examples include furanyl, thienyl, thiophenyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyridinyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, indolyl, and indazolyl, and the like.
  • The term “conjugate” as a noun is intended to indicate a modified protein, i.e. a protein with a moiety bonded to it in order to modify the properties of said protein. As a verb, the term is intended to indicate the process of bonding a moiety to a protein to modify the properties of said protein.
  • The term “single cys” or a “free cysteine” refers to a cysteine residue, which is not engaged in double bond. A protein, may thus include one or more single cys residues in addition to one or more additional disulfide bridge(s), as long as said single cys's do not lead to internal disulfide bridge(s).
  • As used herein, the term “prodrug” indicates biohydrolyzable amides and biohydrolyzable esters and also encompasses a) compounds in which the biohydrolyzable functionality in such a prodrug is encompassed in the compound according to the present invention, and b) compounds which may be oxidized or reduced biologically at a given functional group to yield drug substances according to the present invention. Examples of these functional groups include 1,4-dihydropyridine, N-alkylcarbonyl-1,4-dihydropyridine, 1,4-cyclohexadiene, tert-butyl, and the like.
  • As used herein, the term “biohydrolyzable ester” is an ester of a drug substance (in casu, a compound according to the invention) which either a) does not interfere with the biological activity of the parent substance but confers on that substance advantageous properties in vivo such as duration of action, onset of action, and the like, or b) is biologically inactive but is readily converted in vivo by the subject to the biologically active principle. The advantage is, for example increased solubility or that the biohydrolyzable ester is orally absorbed from the gut and is transformed to a compound according to the present invention in plasma. Many examples of such are known in the art and include by way of example lower alkyl esters (e.g., C1-C4), lower acyloxyalkyl esters, lower alkoxyacyloxyalkyl esters, alkoxyacyloxy esters, alkyl acylamino alkyl esters, and choline esters.
  • As used herein, the term “biohydrolyzable amide” is an amide of a drug substance (in casu, a compound according to the present invention) which either a) does not interfere with the biological activity of the parent substance but confers on that substance advantageous properties in vivo such as duration of action, onset of action, and the like, or b) is biologically inactive but is readily converted in vivo by the subject to the biologically active principle. The advantage is, for example increased solubility or that the biohydrolyzable amide is orally absorbed from the gut and is transformed to a compound according to the present invention in plasma. Many examples of such are known in the art and include by way of example lower alkyl amides, α-amino acid amides, alkoxyacyl amides, and alkylaminoalkylcarbonyl amides.
  • In the present context, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” is intended to indicate salts which are not harmful to the patient. Such salts include pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts, pharmaceutically acceptable metal salts, ammonium and alkylated ammonium salts. Acid addition salts include salts of inorganic acids as well as organic acids. Representative examples of suitable inorganic acids include hydrochloric, hydrobromic, hydroiodic, phosphoric, sulfuric, nitric acids and the like. Representative examples of suitable organic acids include formic, acetic, trichloroacetic, trifluoroacetic, propionic, benzoic, cinnamic, citric, fumaric, glycolic, lactic, maleic, malic, malonic, mandelic, oxalic, picric, pyruvic, salicylic, succinic, methanesulfonic, ethanesulfonic, tartaric, ascorbic, pamoic, bismethylene salicylic, ethanedisulfonic, gluconic, citraconic, aspartic, stearic, palmitic, EDTA, glycolic, p-aminobenzoic, glutamic, benzenesulfonic, p-toluenesulfonic acids and the like. Further examples of pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic acid addition salts include the pharmaceutically acceptable salts listed in J. Pharm. Sci. 66, 2, (1977) which is incorporated herein by reference. Examples of metal salts include lithium, sodium, potassium, magnesium salts and the like. Examples of ammonium and alkylated ammonium salts include ammonium, methylammonium, dimethylammonium, trimethylammonium, ethylammonium, hydroxyethylammonium, diethylammonium, butylammonium, tetramethylammonium salts and the like.
  • A “therapeutically effective amount” of a compound as used herein means an amount sufficient to cure, alleviate or partially arrest the clinical manifestations of a given disease and its complications. An amount adequate to accomplish this is defined as “therapeutically effective amount”. Effective amounts for each purpose will depend on the severity of the disease or injury as well as the weight and general state of the subject. It will be understood that determining an appropriate dosage may be achieved using routine experimentation, by constructing a matrix of values and testing different points in the matrix, which is all within the ordinary skills of a trained physician or veterinary.
  • The term “treatment” and “treating” as used herein means the management and care of a patient for the purpose of combating a condition, such as a disease or a disorder. The term is intended to include the full spectrum of treatments for a given condition from which the patient is suffering, such as administration of the active compound to alleviate the symptoms or complications, to delay the progression of the disease, disorder or condition, to alleviate or relief the symptoms and complications, and/or to cure or eliminate the disease, disorder or condition as well as to prevent the condition, wherein prevention is to be understood as the management and care of a patient for the purpose of combating the disease, condition, or disorder and includes the administration of the active compounds to prevent the onset of the symptoms or complications. The patient to be treated is preferably a mammal; in particular a human being, but it may also include animals, such as dogs, cats, cows, sheep and pigs.
    • DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • In a broad aspect the present invention relates to a stable growth hormone conjugate which comprises a growth hormone compound (GH) having
  • a) a single Cys mutation,
    b) an additional disulfide bridge, or
    c) a single Cys mutation and an additional disulfide bridge,
    wherein an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to said GH, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • When a single Cys mutation is present, an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to the sulphur residue of the Cys. When an additional disulphide bridge is present (but no single Cys mutation) then an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to a position in the growth hormone compound, such as position 40, position 141 or the N-terminal of hGH, as described herein. When two or more albumin binding residues are linked to the growth hormone compound via a hydrophilic spacer, then such albumin binding residues are linked to a single Cys mutation if such mutation is present or if only an additional disulphide bridge is present then an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to a position in the growth hormone compound as described herein.
  • In one embodiment the growth hormone compound has one single Cys mutation.
  • In another embodiment the growth hormone compound has two single Cys mutations.
  • In a further embodiment the growth hormone compound has an additional disulfide bridge.
  • In a further embodiment the growth hormone compound has one single Cys mutation and one additional disulfide bridge.
  • In a further embodiment GH represents a growth hormone compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 90% identity to the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone (hGH) (SEQ ID NO: 1). In further embodiments, GH has at least 80%, such as at least 85%, such as at least 95% identity with hGH, such at at least 96%, such as at least 97%, such as at least 98% or such as at least 99% identity with SEQ ID NO: 1. In further embodiments, said identities to hGH is coupled to at least 10%, such as at least 20%, such as at least 40%, such as at least 60%, such as at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH as determined in assay I herein. Any one of the sequence identity embodiments may be combined with any one of the activity embodiments, such as a GH having at least 80% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 60% of the growth hormone activity of hGH; a GH having at least 90% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 40% of the growth hormone activity of hGH; a GH having at least 95% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH, and so forth. As described herein HG may be expressed as MetHG which indicates that the sequence comprise an additional N-terminal methionine.
  • In an embodiment GH is a growth hormone variant wherein a single Cys mutation is introduced. In further embodiments GH represents a growth hormone compound containing one to five mutations in addition to a single Cys mutation.
  • In a further embodiment the albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to the single Cys mutation. In an embodiment the single Cys mutation is position in the N-terminal, H1, H2, L2 or H3 of GH. In further embodiments, the single Cys mutation is positioned in the N-terminal, the mutation being such as any one of T3C, P5C, S7C, or in H1 (corresponding to AA 9-35), the mutation being such as any one of D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, or in L1 (corresponding to AA36-71), the muation being such as any one of K38C, E39C, Y42C, S43C, D47C, P48C, 555, S57C, P59C, S62C, E65C, Q69C or preferably any one of Y42C, S55C, S57C, S62C, Q69C or in H2, L2 or H3 (corresponding to AA 72-98, AA 99-106 and AA 107-127), the mutation being such as any one of E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C and G126C of hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1) or in L3 or H4 (corresponding to AA128-154 and AA155-184) In L3 and H4 (128-154 and AA155-184) the muation being such as any one of E129C, D130C, G131C, P133C, T135C, G136C, T142C, D147C, N149C, D154C, A155C, L156C, R178C, V180C or in the C-terminal the muation being such as any one of E186C G187C G190C.
  • If the single Cys mutation is present in a hGH variant the mutation is located in corresponding amino acid residues.
  • In particular embodiment the GH the single Cys mutation has been introduced in a position equivalent to a parent GH that is equivalent to a position of hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1) selected from the group consisting of: T3, P5, S7, D11, H18, Q29, E30, E33, A34, Y35, K38, E39, Y42, S43, D47, P48, S55, S57, P59, S62, E65, Q69, E88, Q91, S95, A98, N99, S100, L101, V102, Y103, D107, S108, D112, Q122, G126, E129, D130, G131, P133, T135, G136, T142, D147, N149, D154, A155, L156, R178, E186, G187 and G190, such as the group consisting of: T3, P5, S7, D11, H18, Q29, E30, E33, A34, Y35, E88, Q91, S95, A98, N99, S100, L101, V102, Y103, D107, S108, D112, Q122 and G126 the GH conjugate further comprising an albumin binding moiety at the side chain of said single cysteine residue.
  • In further embodiments the single Cys mutation is located within AA 93-106 in hGH or corresponding residues in hGH variants. In further specified embodiments the single Cys mutation is located within L2, such as within AA 99-106 or AA 99-103 or corresponding residues.
  • When a single Cys mutation is present in the growth hormone compound conjugate of the present invention, a typical single Cys mutation is E30C. A further typical single Cys mutation is Y42C. A further typical single Cys mutation is S55C. A further typical single Cys mutation is S57C. A further typical single Cys mutation is S62C. A further typical single Cys mutation is Q69C. A further typical single Cys mutation is S95C. A further typical single Cys mutation is A98C. A further typical single Cys mutation is N99C. A further typical single Cys mutation is S100C. A further typical single Cys mutation is L101C. A further typical single Cys mutation is V102C. A further typical single Cys mutation is S108C.
  • According to the crystal structure of the rhGH/receptor complex (PDB: 3HHR) the bundle consists of four major helices: first helix (A) from residue 9 to 34, second helix (B) from residue 72 to 92 and from residue 94 to 100, third helix (C) from residue 106 to 128, and fourth helix (D) from residue 155 to 184 (M. R. Kasimova et. al. J. Mol. Biol. 318, 679-695, (2002)). The four main helices are referred to as the core of the protein. Residues that are not part of the helical regions are defined as loop residues, and may be part of flexible regions, loops, β-turns, hairpins and coils. A slightly different localization of helix's is obtained when hGH is in complex with its binding protein (PDB: 1 HWG), which is the helix defintion referred to above.
  • Moreover, the invention relates to a GH conjugate comprising at least one introduced cysteine residue which residue has been introduced in a position equivalent to a position in a helix or loop region of hGH. In particular the amino acid residues may be introduced in a surface exposed position in a helix or loop region that has more than 25% of its side chain exposed at the surface, preferably more than 50% of its side chain exposed at the surface, e.g. in a model structure of hGH alone or in a model structure of hGH complexed to its two receptor molecules. In a preferred embodiment, the position in the helix or the loop is equivalent to a position outside a receptor binding site of hGH. Surface exposed residues may be identified using computational chemistry algorithms. For example, relative surface accessibilities can be calculated with the computer program Quanta 2005 from Accelrys Inc. using the atomic coordinates from the publically available structures (PDB accession codes 1HGU and 1HWG structure) and default parameter settings. A description of the underlying principle behind the algorithm can be found in B. Lee and F. M. Richards, “The Interpretation of Protein Structures: Estimation of Static Accessibility” J. Mol. Biol. 55, 379-400, (1971).
  • In a further embodiment the albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to the GH having an additional disulfide bridge. Typically, the albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to the N-terminal, position 40 or position 141 of hGH.
  • In a further embodiment the GH comprises additional disulfide bonds between a loop segment and a helical segment or within loop segment or between loop segments or between helical segments.
  • In a further embodiment the GH comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein at least one of the cysteines is present in a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154 (L3).
  • In a further embodiment the GH comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein the additional disulfide bond connects a loop segment with a helical segment.
  • In a further embodiment the GH comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein the additional disulfide bond connects a loop segment with helix B or helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98).
  • In a further embodiment the GH comprises and additional disulfide bond linking helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98) with loop 3 (corresponding to AA 128-154).
  • In a further embodiment the GH comprise an addition disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I138C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, Q84C/S144C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, P89C/F146C, F92C/F146C, F92C/T148C, R94C/D107C, V102C/A105C, L156C/F146C, L156C/T148C and/or V185C/S188C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • In a further embodiment the additional disulfide bridge of GH is between at least one of the amino acid pairs in the positions corresponding to R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H18C/Y143C, H21C/M170C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I138C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, P89C/F146C, F92C/F146C, F92C/T148C, R94C/D107C, V102C/A105C, L156C/F146C, L156C/T148C and/or V185C/S188C in hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • In a further embodiment the additional disulfide bond is between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, F92C/T148C and/or R94C/D107C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • In a further embodiment the additional disulfide bond is between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, F92C/T148C and/or R94C/D107C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • In a further embodiment the additional disulfide bond is between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C and/or S85C/S144C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • In a further embodiment the additional disulfide bond is between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to S57C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C and/or S85C/S144C in SEQ ID NO: 1. Typically, the additional disulfide bridge is Q84C/Y143C.
  • In a further embodiment the albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to the GH having a single Cys mutation and an additional disulfide bridge. Typically, the albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to the single Cys mutation. In a particular embodiment the GH has an additional disulfide bridge Q84C/Y143C and a single Cys mutation L101C where to the albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked.
  • In further embodiments the GH has an additional disulfide bond and a single Cys mutation selected from any one of: T3C, P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, K38C, E39C, Y42C, S43C, D47C, P48C, S55C, S57C, P59C, S62, E65C, Q69C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C, G126C, E129C, D130C, G131C, P133C, T135C, G136C, T142C, D147C, N149C, D154C, A155C, L156C, R178C, E186C, G187C and G190C, such as any one of; T3C, P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C and G126C of hGH (SEQ ID NO:1) or corresponding residues in a hGH variant.
  • In a particular embodiment the GH has an additional disulfide bond and a single Cys mutation, and said single Cys mutation has been introduced in a position equivalent to a parent GH that is equivalent to a position of hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1) selected from the group consisting of: T3, P5, S7, D11, H18, Q29, E30, E33, A34, Y35, K38, E39, Y42, S43, D47, P48, S55, S57, P59, S62, E65, Q69, E88, Q91, S95, A98, N99, S100, L101, V102, Y103, D107, S108, D112, Q122, G126, E129, D130, G131, P133, T135, G136, T142, D147, N149, D154, A155, L156, R178, E186, G187 and G190, preferably the group; T3, P5, S7, D11, H18, Q29, E30, E33, A34, Y35, E88, Q91, S95, A98, N99, S100, L101, V102, Y103, D107, S108, D112, Q122 and G126. The GH conjugate further comprise an albumin binding moiety at the side chain of said single cysteine residue.
  • In a further embodiment the GH comprises a single cys mutation and additional disulfide bonds between a loop segment and a helical segment or within loop segment or between loop segments or between helical segments.
  • In a further embodiment the GH comprises a single cys mutation and an additional disulfide bond wherein at least one of the cysteines is present in a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154 (L3).
  • In a further embodiment the GH comprises a single cys mutation and an additional disulfide bond wherein the additional disulfide bond which connects a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154, with a helical segment, such as helix B or helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98).
  • In a further embodiment the GH comprises a single cys mutation and additional disulfide bond linking helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98) with loop 3 (corresponding to AA 128-154).
  • In a further embodiment the GH comprises a single cys mutation and an addition disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I138C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, Q84C/S144C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, P89C/F146C, F92C/F146C, F92C/T148C, R94C/D107C, V102C/A105C, L156C/F146C, L156C/T148C and/or V185C/S188C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • In a further embodiment the GH comprises a single cys mutation and an additional disulfide bridge between at least one of the amino acid pairs in the positions corresponding to R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H18C/Y143C, H21C/M170C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I138C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, P89C/F146C, F92C/F146C, F92C/T148C, R94C/D107C, V102C/A105C, L156C/F146C, L156C/T148C and/or V185C/S188C in hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • In a further embodiment the GH comprises a single cys mutation and an additional disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, F92C/T148C and/or R94C/D107C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • In a further embodiment the additional disulfide bond is between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, F92C/T148C and/or R94C/D107C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • In a further embodiment the GH comprises a single cys mutation and an additional disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, S55C/Y143C, 557C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C and/or S85C/S144C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • In a further embodiment the GH comprises a single cys mutation and an additional disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to S57C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C and/or S85C/S144C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • Solubility of a hydrophilic spacer (B) can be described by its log P value. Log P, also known as the partition coefficient, is the logarithm of the ratio of concentrations of a compound in the two phases of a mixture of two immiscible solvents at equilibrium. Typically one of the solvents is water while the second is selected from octan-1-ol, chloroform, cyclohexane and propylene glycol dipelargonate (PGDP). Log P values measured in these different solvents show differences principally due to hydrogen bonding effects. Octanol can donate and accept hydrogen bonds whereas cyclohexane is inert. Chloroform can donate hydrogen bonds whereas PGDP can only accept them. Log P values may be measured by standard methods know in the art.
  • In one embodiment of the invention, the hydrophilic spacer has a Log P below 0, such as below 0.5 in either octan-1-ol, chloroform, cyclohexane and propylene glycol dipelargonate (PGDP).
  • In a further embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer has a log P below −1 in either octan-1-ol, chloroform, cyclohexane and propylene glycol dipelargonate (PGDP).
  • Alternatively, the Log P value can be calculated as m Log P and/or c Log P for the albumin binder part or hydrophilic spacer part using published algorithms (T. Fujita; J. Iwasa and C. Hansch, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 86, 5175-5180, (1964) “A New Substituent Constant, Pi, Derived from Partition Coefficients”, C. A. Lipinski et al. Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews, 23, 3-25, (1997) “Experimental and Computational Approaches to Estimate Solubility and Permeability in Drug Discovery and Development Settings” and I. Moriguchi, S. Hirono, I. Nakagome, H. Hirano, Chem. Pharm. Bull. 42, 976-978, (1994) “Comparison of Reliability of log P Values for Drugs Calculated by Several Methods”).
  • In one embodiment of the present invention the hydrophilic spacer (B) has a m Log P<0.
  • In a further embodiment the growth hormone compound (GH) is linked to one albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer (B).
  • In a further embodiment the growth hormone compound (GH) is linked to an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer (B) coupled to a free cysteine in the growth hormone compound (GH).
  • In another embodiment the growth hormone compound (GH) is linked to two albumin binding residues via one or two hydrophilic spacer(s). Thus, in one example one albumin binding residue is linked via one hydrophilic spacer (B) to the single Cys mutation and the other albumin binding residue is linked via one hydrophilic spacer (B′) to glutamine in position 40 or position 141; or alternatively two albumin binding residues are linked via one hydrophilic spacer (B) to the single Cys mutation or to glutamine in position 40, position 141 or the N-terminal. In still another embodiment the growth hormone compound (GH) is linked to three albumin binding residues via one or more hydrophilic spacer(s).
  • In an embodiment the hydrophilic spacer comprise at least one OEG motif, the radical 8-amino-3,6-dioxaoctanic acid, i.e. —NH—(CH2)2—O—(CH2)2—O—CH2—C(O)—. In a further specified embodiment the hydrophilic spacer comprise at least two OEG motifs. The orientation of such OEG motif(s) is in one embodiment so that the —C(O)— is closest to the growth hormone compound but not connecting the growth hormone compound and the albumin binder linker and the —NH— is closest to the albumin binding residue. In additional embodiments comprising two OEG motifs the two motifs have identical orientation or different orientation. In an embodiment two such OEG motifs are located adjactant to each other whereas in alternative embodiments such OEG mofifs are separated by one or more covalently linked atoms.
  • In an embodiment the hydrophilic spacer comprise at lease one glutamic acid residue. The amino acid glutamic acid comprises two carboxylic acid groups. Its gamma-carboxy group may be used for forming an amide bond with the epsilon-amino group of lysine, or with an amino group of an OEG molecule, if present, or with the amino group of another Glu residue, if present. The alfa-carboxy group may alternatively be used for forming a similar amide bond with the epsilon-amino group of lysine, or with an amino group of an OEG molecule, if present, or with the amino group of another Glu residue, if present. The amino group of Glu may in turn form an amide bond with the carboxy group of the albumin binding residue, or with the carboxy group of an OEG motif, if present, or with the gamma-carboxy group or alfa carboxy group of another Glu, if present. The linkage of the amino group of one Glu to a gamma-carboxy group of a second Glu may be referred to as a “gamma-Glu” motif.
  • In an embodiment the hydrophilic spacer comprise at least one combined OEG-Glu motif (—NH—(CH2)2—O—(CH2)2—O—CH2—C(O)NH—CH(C(O)OH)—(CH2)2—C(O)—) or at least one combinde Glu-OEG motif (—NH—CH(C(O)OH)—(CH2)2—C(O)NH—(CH2)2—O—(CH2)2—O—CH2—C(O)—) or combinations here of, where in such Glu-OEG and OEG-Glu motifs may be separated by one or more covalently linked atoms or directly bond to each other by an amide bond of the Glu's foming a gammal-Glu.
  • In a further aspect the present invention relates to a growth hormone conjugate wherein the growth hormone conjugate has the formula (I):

  • A-W—B-GH  (I)
    • Wherein
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound having a single Cys mutation,
    B represents a hydrophilic spacer linked to the sulphur residue of the Cys mutation,
    W is a chemical group linking A and B, and
    A represent an albumin binding residue; and
    pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • In a further embodiment GH represents a growth hormone compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 90% identity to the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone (hGH) (SEQ ID NO:1). In further embodiments, GH has at least 80%, such as at least 85%, such as at least 95%, such as at least 96%, such as at least 97%, such as at least 98% or such as at least 99% identity with hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1). In further embodiments, said identities to hGH are coupled to at least 10%, such as at least 20%, such as at least 40%, such as at least 60%, such as at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH as determined in assay I herein. Any one of the sequence identity embodiments may be combined with any one of the activity embodiments, such as a GH having at least 80% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 60% of the growth hormone activity of hGH; a GH having at least 90% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 40% of the growth hormone activity of hGH; a GH having at least 95% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH, and so forth.
  • In further embodiments the GH of the conjugate has a single Cys mutation selected from any one of a single Cys mutation in the N-terminal, H1, H2, L2 or H3 regions of GH. In further such embodiments, the single Cys mutation is positioned in the N-terminal, the mutation being such as any one of T3C, P5C, S7C, or in H1 (corresponding to AA 9-35), the mutation being such as any one of D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, or in L1 (corresponding to AA36-71), the muation being such as any one of K38C, E39C, Y42C, S43C, D47C, P48C, S55, S57C, P59C, S62C, E65C, Q69C or preferably any one of Y42C, S55C, S57C, S62C, Q69C or in H2, L2 or H3 (corresponding to AA 72-98, AA 99-106 and AA 107-127), the mutation being such as any one of E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C and G126C of hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1) or in L3 or H4 (corresponding to AA128-154 and AA155-184) In L3 and H4 (128-154 and AA155-184) the muation being such as any one of E129C, D130C, G131C, P133C, T135C, G136C, T142C, D147C, N149C, D154C, A155C, L156C, R178C, V180C or in the C-terminal the muation being such as any one of E186C G187C G190.
  • If the single Cys mutation is present in a hGH variant the mutation is located in corresponding amino acid residues.
  • Further embodiments includes GH conjugates wherein the single cys mutation in GH is selected from any one of: T3C, P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, K38C, E39C, Y42C, S43C, D47C, P48C, S55C, S57C, P59C, S62, E65C, Q69C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C, G126C, E129C, D130C, G131C, P133C, T135C, G136C, T142C, D147C, N149C, D154C, A155C, L156C, R178C, E186C, G187C and G190C, such as any one of; T3C, P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C and G126C of hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • In even further embodiments the single Cys mutation is located within AA 93-106 in hGH or corresponding residues in hGH variants. In further specified embodiments the single Cys mutation is located within L2, such as within AA 99-106 or AA 99-103 or corresponding residues.
  • In a further embodiment A is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00003
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00004
  • wherein * denotes the attachment to B through W.
  • In a further embodiment W has the formula

  • —W7—Y—,
  • wherein
      • Y is —(CH2)l7—C3-10-cycloalkyl-W8— or a valence bond,
      • l7 is 0-6,
      • W7 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s3—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s3 is 0 or 1,
      • W8 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s4—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s4 is 0 or 1.
  • In further embodiments B comprise or consist of one or more OEG, and/or gamma-Glu motiv as described above.
  • In a further embodiment B has the formula

  • —X1—X2—X3—X4—
  • wherein
      • X1 is —W1—[(CHR1)l1—W2]m1—{[(CH2)n1E1]m2—[(CHR2)l2—W3]m3}n2—,
      • X2 is —[(CHR3)l3—W4]m4—{[(CH2)n3E2]m5—[(CHR4)l4—W5]m6}n4—,
      • X3 is —[(CHR5)l5—W6]m7—,
      • X4 is F-D1-(CH2)l6-D2-,
      • l1, l2, l3, l4, l5 and l6 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • m1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are selected from 0-10,
      • m2 and m5 independently are selected from 0-25,
      • n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • F is aryl, hetaryl, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione or a valence bond, wherein the aryl and hetaryl groups are optionally substituted with halogen, —CN, —OH, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl,
      • R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —NH—C(═NH)—NH2, C1-6-alkyl, aryl or hetaryl; wherein the alkyl, aryl and hetaryl groups optionally are substituted with halogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —CN or —OH,
      • D1, D2, E1 and E2 independently are selected from —O—, —N(R6)—, —N(C(O)R7)— or a valence bond; wherein R6 and R7 independently represent hydrogen or C1-6-alkyl,
      • W1 to W5 independently are selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s2—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s2 is 0 or 1,
      • W6 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s1—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, —NHC(O)C1-6-alkyl, —C(O)NHC1-6-alkyl or a valence bond; wherein s1 is 0 or 1 and the C1-6-alkyl group is optionally substituted with oxo, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH; wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X4.
  • In a further embodiment l1, l2, l3, l4, l5 and l6 independently are 0-6.
  • In a further embodiment m1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are 0-6.
  • In a further embodiment m2 and m5 independently are 0-10.
  • In a further embodiment n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are 0-10.
  • In a further embodiment D1 and D2 are independently selected from —O— or —N(R6)— or a valence bond.
  • In a further embodiment E1 and E2 are independently selected from —O— or —N(R6)— or a valence bond.
  • In a further embodiment W1 through W8 independently are selected from the group consisting of —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —NHC(O)C1-6-alkyl, —C(O)NHC1-6-alkyl or a valence bond; wherein the alkyl group is optionally substituted with oxo, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH; wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X4.
  • In a further embodiment R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl; wherein the C1-6-alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2 or —S(O)2OH.
  • In a further embodiment —{[(CH2)n1E1]m2—[(CHR2)l2—W3]m3}n2— and —{[(CH2)n3E2]m5—[(CHR4)l4—W5]m6}n4—, wherein E1 and E2 are —O—, are selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00005
  • wherein * is intended to denote a point of attachment, ie, an open bond.
  • In a further embodiment X4 is a valence bond and W6 is selected from either pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to GH.
  • In a further embodiment B is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00006
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00007
  • In a further embodiment the GH conjugate is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00008
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00009
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00010
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00011
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00012
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00013
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00014
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00015
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00016
  • In a further aspect the present invention relates to a growth hormone conjugate having the formula (I):

  • A-W—B-GH  (I)
    • Wherein
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound having an additional disulfide bridge,
    B represents a hydrophilic spacer,
    W is a chemical group linking A and B, and
    A represent an albumin binding residue; and
    pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • In a further embodiment GH represents a growth hormone compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 90% identity to the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone (hGH) (SEQ ID NO: 1). In further embodiments, GH has at least 80%, such as at least 85%, such as at least 95%, such as at least 96%, such as at least 97%, such as at least 98% or such as at least 99% identity with hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1). In further embodiments, said identities to hGH are coupled to at least 10%, such as at least 20%, such as at least 40%, such as at least 60%, such as at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH as determined in assay I herein. Any one of the sequence identity embodiments may be combined with any one of the activity embodiments, such as a GH having at least 80% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 60% of the growth hormone activity of hGH; a GH having at least 90% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 40% of the growth hormone activity of hGH; a GH having at least 95% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH, and so forth.
  • In a further embodiment the GH of the conjugate comprises additional disulfide bonds between a loop segment and a helical segment or within loop segment or between loop segments or between helical segments.
  • In a further embodiment the GH of the conjugate comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein at least one of the cysteines is present in a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154.
  • In a further embodiment the GH of the conjugate comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein the additional disulfide bond which connects a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154 (H3), with a helical segment, such as helix B or helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98).
  • In a further embodiment the GH of the conjugate comprises and additional disulfide bond linking helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98) with loop 3 (corresponding to AA 128-154).
  • In a further embodiment the GH of the conjugate comprise an addition disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I138C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, P89C/F146C, F92C/F146C, F92C/T148C, R94C/D107C, V102C/A105C, L156C/F146C, L156C/T148C and/or V185C/S188C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • In a further embodiment the additional disulfide bridge is between at least one of the amino acid pairs in the positions corresponding to R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H18C/Y143C, H21C/M170C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I138C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, P89C/F146C, F92C/F146C, F92C/T148C, R94C/D107C, V102C/A105C, L156C/F146C, L156C/T148C and/or V185C/S188C in hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • In a further embodiment the GH of the conjugate comprises an additional disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, F92C/T148C and/or R94C/D107C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • In a further embodiment the additional disulfide bond is between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, F92C/T148C and/or R94C/D107C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • In a further embodiment the GH of the conjugate comprise an additional disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C and/or S85C/S144C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • In a further embodiment the GH of the conjugate comprises an additional disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to S57C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C and/or S85C/S144C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • In a further embodiment A is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00017
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00018
  • wherein * denotes the attachment to B through W.
  • In a further embodiment W has the formula

  • —W7—Y—,
  • wherein
      • Y is —(CH2)l7—C3-10-cycloalkyl-W8— or a valence bond,
      • l7 is 0-6,
      • W7 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s3—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s3 is 0 or 1,
      • W8 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s4—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s4 is 0 or 1.
  • In further embodiments B comprise or consist of one or more OEG, and/or gamma-Glu motiv(s) as described above.
  • In a further embodiment B has the formula

  • —X1—X2—X3—X4—
  • wherein
      • X1 is —W1—[(CHR1)l1—W2]m1—{[(CH2)n1E1]m2—[(CHR2)l2—W3]m3}n2—,
      • X2 is —[(CHR3)l3—W4]m4—{[(CH2)n3E2]m5—[(CHR4)l4—W5]m6}n4—,
      • X3 is —[(CHR5)l5—W6]m7—,
      • X4 is F-D1-(CH2)l6-D2-,
      • l1, l2, l3, l4, l5 and l6 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • m1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are selected from 0-10,
      • m2 and m5 independently are selected from 0-25,
      • n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • F is aryl, hetaryl, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione or a valence bond, wherein the aryl and hetaryl groups are optionally substituted with halogen, —CN, —OH, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl,
      • R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —NH—C(═NH)—NH2, C1-6-alkyl, aryl or hetaryl; wherein the alkyl, aryl and hetaryl groups optionally are substituted with halogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —CN or —OH,
      • D1, D2, E1 and E2 independently are selected from —O—, —N(R6)—, —N(C(O)R7)— or a valence bond; wherein R6 and R7 independently represent hydrogen or C1-6-alkyl,
      • W1 to W5 independently are selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s2—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s2 is 0 or 1,
      • W6 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s1—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, —NHC(O)C1-6-alkyl, —C(O)NHC1-6-alkyl or a valence bond; wherein s1 is 0 or 1 and the C1-6-alkyl group is optionally substituted with oxo, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH; wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X4.
  • In a further embodiment l1, l2, l3, l4, l5 and l6 independently are 0-6.
  • In a further embodiment m1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are 0-6.
  • In a further embodiment m2 and m5 independently are 0-10.
  • In a further embodiment n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are 0-10.
  • In a further embodiment D1 and D2 are independently selected from —O— or —N(R6)— or a valence bond.
  • In a further embodiment E1 and E2 are independently selected from —O— or —N(R6)— or a valence bond.
  • In a further embodiment W1 through W8 independently are selected from the group consisting of —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —NHC(O)C1-6-alkyl, —C(O)NHC1-6-alkyl or a valence bond; wherein the alkyl group is optionally substituted with oxo, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH; wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X4.
  • In a further embodiment R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl; wherein the C1-6-alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2 or —S(O)2OH.
  • In a further embodiment —{[(CH2)n1E1]m2—[(CHR2)l2—W3]m3}n2— and —{[(CH2)n3E2]m5—[(CHR4)l4—W5]m6}n4—, wherein E1 and E2 are —O—, are selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00019
  • wherein * is intended to denote a point of attachment, ie, an open bond.
  • In a further embodiment B is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00020
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00021
  • In a further embodiment A via B is attached to the glutamine residue in the position corresponding to position 40, position 141 in SEQ ID NO: 1, or the N-terminal residue of the growth hormone compound.
  • In a further embodiment the GH conjugate is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00022
  • In a further aspect the present invention relates to a growth hormone conjugate wherein the growth hormone conjugate has the formula (I):

  • A-W—B-GH  (I)
  • wherein
    GH represents a growth hormone compound having a single Cys mutation and an additional disulfide bridge,
    B represents a hydrophilic spacer linked to the sulphur residue of the Cys mutation,
    W is a chemical group linking A and B, and
    A represent an albumin binding residue; and
    pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • In a further embodiment GH represents a growth hormone compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 90% identity to the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone (hGH) (SEQ ID NO: 1). In further embodiments, GH has at least 80%, such as at least 85%, such as at least 95%, such as at least 96%, such as at least 97%, such as at least 98% or such as at least 99% identity with hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1). In further embodiments, said identities to hGH are coupled to at least 10%, such as at least 20%, such as at least 40%, such as at least 60%, such as at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH as determined in assay I herein. Any one of the sequence identity embodiments may be combined with any one of the activity embodiments, such as a GH having at least 80% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 60% of the growth hormone activity of hGH; a GH having at least 90% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 40% of the growth hormone activity of hGH; a GH having at least 95% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH, and so forth.
  • In further embodiments the GH of the conjugate has an additional disulfide bond an a single Cys mutation selected from any one of a single Cys mutation in the N-terminal, H1, H2, L2 or H3 regions of GH. In further such embodiments, the single Cys mutation is positioned in the N-terminal, the mutation being such as any one of T3C, P5C, S7C, or in H1 (corresponding to AA 9-35), the mutation being such as any one of D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, or in L1 (corresponding to AA36-71), the muation being such as any one of K38C, E39C, Y42C, S43C, D47C, P48C, S55, S57C, P59C, S62C, E65C, Q69C or preferably any one of Y42C, S55C, S57C, S62C, Q69C or in H2, L2 or H3 (corresponding to AA 72-98, AA 99-106 and AA 107-127), the mutation being such as any one of E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C and G126C of hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1), or in L3 or H4 (corresponding to AA128-154 and AA155-184) In L3 and H4 (128-154 and AA155-184) the muation being such as any one of E129C, D130C, G131C, P133C, T135C, G136C, T142C, D147C, N149C, D154C, A155C, L156C, R178C, V180C or in the C-terminal the muation being such as any one of E186C G187C G190C.
  • If the single Cys mutation is present in a hGH variant the mutation is located in corresponding amino acid residues.
  • Further embodiments includes GH conjugates having an additional disulfide bond and a single cys mutation in GH is selected from any one of: T3C, P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, K38C, E39C, Y42C, S43C, D47C, P48C, 55C, S57C, P59C, S62, E65C, Q69C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C, G126C, E129C, D130C, G131C, P133C, T135C, G136C, T142C, D147C, N149C, D154C, A155C, L156C, R178C, E186C, G187C and G190C, such as any one of; T3C, P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C and G126C of hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • In even further embodiments the single Cys mutation is located within AA 93-106 in hGH or corresponding residues in hGH variants. In further specified embodiments the single Cys mutation is located within L2, such as within AA 99-106 or AA 99-103 or corresponding residues.
  • In further embodiment the additional disulfide bond may be an additional disulfide bonds between a loop segment and a helical segment or within loop segment or between loop segments or between helical segments.
  • In a further embodiment the GH comprises a single cys mutant and an additional disulfide bond wherein at least one of the cysteines is present in a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154 (L3).
  • In a further embodiment the GH comprises a single cys mutant and an additional disulfide bond wherein the additional disulfide bond which connects a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154, with a helical segment, such as helix B or helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98).
  • In a further embodiment the GH of the conjugate comprises a single cys mutant and an additional disulfide bond linking helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98) with loop 3 (corresponding to AA 128-154).
  • In a further embodiment the GH of the conjugate comprise a single cys mutant and an addition disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I138C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, Q84C/S144C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, P89C/F146C, F92C/F146C, F92C/T148C, R94C/D107C, V102C/A105C, L156C/F146C, L156C/T148C and/or V185C/S188C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • In a further embodiment the additional disulfide bridge is between at least one of the amino acid pairs in the positions corresponding to R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H18C/Y143C, H21C/M170C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I138C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, P89C/F146C, F92C/F146C, F92C/T148C, R94C/D107C, V102C/A105C, L156C/F146C, L156C/T148C and/or V185C/S188C in hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • In a further embodiment the GH of the conjugate comprises a singly cys mutant and an additional disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, F92C/T148C and/or R94C/D107C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • In a further embodiment the additional disulfide bond is between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, F92C/T148C and/or R94C/D107C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • In a further embodiment the additional disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, S71C/S132C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C and/or S85C/S144C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • In a further embodiment the additional disulfide bond between one of the amino acid pairs in positions corresponding to S57C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C and/or S85C/S144C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • In a further embodiment the GH comprise a single cysteine mutation in L2 and an additional disulfide bond which connects a loop segment, such as from amino acid residues 128-154 (H3), with a helical segment, such as helix B or helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98).
  • In an embodiment the GH comprise a combination of mutations selected from the following group: A98C/Q84C/Y143C, A98C/S85C/Y143C, A98C/S85C/S144C, N99C/Q84C/Y143C, N99C/S85C/Y143C, N99C/S85C/S144C, S101C/Q84C/Y143C, S101C/S85C/Y143C, S101C/S85C/S144C, L101C/Q84C/Y143C, L101C/S85C/Y143C, L101C/S85C/S144C, C102C/Q84C/Y143C, C102C/S85C/Y143C and C102C/S85C/S144C.
  • In a further embodiment A is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00023
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00024
  • wherein * denotes the attachment to B through W.
  • In a further embodiment W has the formula

  • —W7—Y—,
  • wherein
      • Y is —(CH2)l7—C3-10-cycloalkyl-W8— or a valence bond,
      • l7 is 0-6,
      • W7 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s3—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s3 is 0 or 1,
      • W8 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s4—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s4 is 0 or 1.
  • In further embodiments B comprise or consist of one or more OEG, and/or gamma-Glu motiv(s) as described above.
  • In a further embodiment B has the formula

  • —X1—X2—X3—X4—
  • wherein
      • X1 is —W1—[(CHR1)l1—W2]m1—{[(CH2)n1E1]m2—[(CHR2)l2—W3]m3}n2—,
      • X2 is —[(CHR3)l3—W4]m4—{[(CH2)n3E2]m5—[(CHR4)l4—W5]m6}n4—,
      • X3 is —[(CHR5)l5—W6]m7—,
      • X4 is F-D1-(CH2)l6-D2-,
      • l1, l2, l3, l4, l5 and l6 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • m1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are selected from 0-10,
      • m2 and m5 independently are selected from 0-25,
      • n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • F is aryl, hetaryl, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione or a valence bond, wherein the aryl and hetaryl groups are optionally substituted with halogen, —CN, —OH, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl,
      • R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —NH—C(═NH)—NH2, C1-6-alkyl, aryl or hetaryl; wherein the alkyl, aryl and hetaryl groups optionally are substituted with halogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —CN or —OH,
      • D1, D2, E1 and E2 independently are selected from —O—, —N(R6)—, —N(C(O)R7)— or a valence bond; wherein R6 and R7 independently represent hydrogen or C1-6-alkyl,
      • W1 to W5 independently are selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s2—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s2 is 0 or 1,
      • W6 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s1—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, —NHC(O)C1-6-alkyl, —C(O)NHC1-6-alkyl or a valence bond; wherein s1 is 0 or 1 and the C1-6-alkyl group is optionally substituted with oxo, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH; wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X4.
  • In a further embodiment l1, l2, l3, l4, l5 and l6 independently are 0-6.
  • In a further embodiment m1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are 0-6.
  • In a further embodiment m2 and m5 independently are 0-10.
  • In a further embodiment n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are 0-10.
  • In a further embodiment D1 and D2 are independently selected from —O— or —N(R6)— or a valence bond.
  • In a further embodiment E1 and E2 are independently selected from —O— or —N(R6)— or a valence bond.
  • In a further embodiment W1 through W8 independently are selected from the group consisting of —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —NHC(O)C1-6-alkyl, —C(O)NHC1-6-alkyl or a valence bond; wherein the alkyl group is optionally substituted with oxo, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH; wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X4.
  • In a further embodiment R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl; wherein the C1-6-alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2 or —S(O)2OH.
  • In a further embodiment —{[(CH2)n1E1]m2—[(CHR2)l2—W3]m3}n2— and —{[(CH2)n3E2]m5—[(CHR4)l4—W5]m6}n4—, wherein E1 and E2 are —O—, are selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00025
  • wherein * is intended to denote a point of attachment, ie, an open bond.
  • In a further embodiment X4 is a valence bond and W6 is selected from either pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to GH.
  • In a further embodiment B is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00026
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00027
  • In a further embodiment the GH conjugate is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00028
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00029
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00030
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00031
  • Typically, the conjugate of the present invention has one albumin binding residue (A) linked via a hydrophilic spacer (B), such as one hydrophilic spacer (B), to the growth hormone compound (GH).
  • However, the growth hormone compound (GH) may be linked to two albumin binding residues via a hydrophilic spacer.
  • Thus, in a still further aspect the present invention relates to a growth hormone conjugate of the formula (II):

  • A-W—B-GH-B′—W′-A′  (II)
  • wherein
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound having a single Cys mutation,
  • B and B′ independently are hydrophilic spacers linked to the sulphur residue of the Cys mutation,
  • W is a chemical group linking A and B,
  • W′ is a chemical group linking A′ and B′,
  • A and A′ independently represents an albumin binding residue, and
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • Further, another aspect the present invention relates to a growth hormone conjugate of the formula (II):

  • A-W—B-GH-B′—W′-A′  (II)
  • wherein
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound having an additional disulfide bridge,
  • B and B′ independently are hydrophilic spacers,
  • W is a chemical group linking A and B,
  • W′ is a chemical group linking A′ and B′,
  • A and A′ independently represents an albumin binding residue, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • A still further aspect the present invention relates to a growth hormone conjugate of the formula (II):

  • A-W—B-GH-B′—W′-A′  (II)
  • wherein
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound having a single Cys mutation and an additional disulfide bridge,
  • B and B′ independently are hydrophilic spacers linked to the sulphur residue of the
  • Cys mutation,
  • W is a chemical group linking A and B,
  • W′ is a chemical group linking A′ and B′,
  • A and A′ independently represents an albumin binding residue, and
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • In the conjugate of formula (II) as described above W′ is selected from the same groups as W, A′ is selected from the same groups as A and B′ is selected from the same groups as B, and it should be understood that W and W′, A and A′, and B and B′ are independently selected from any one of the respective groups as defined herein. Thus, any embodiments of W, A, and B herein are also embodiments of W′, A′, and B′. Furthermore, any one of the embodiments described herein refers independently to both of the conjugates of formula (I) and (II), as well as the broad aspect and embodiments thereof when suitable.
  • The above embodiments as well as the embodiments to be described hereunder should be seen as referring to any one of the aspects described herein as well as any one of the embodiments described herein unless it is specified that an embodiment relates to a certain aspect or aspects of the present invention.
  • In one embodiment GH is a variant of hGH, wherein a variant is understood to be the compound obtained by substituting one or more amino acid residues in the hGH sequence with another natural or unnatural amino acid; and/or by adding one or more natural or unnatural amino acids to the hGH sequence; and/or by deleting one or more amino acid residue from the hGH sequence, wherein any of these steps may optionally be followed by further derivatization of one or more amino acid residues.
  • In a further embodiment GH represents a growth hormone compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 90% identity to the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone (hGH) (SEQ ID NO: 1). In further embodiments, GH has at least 80%, such as at least 85%, such as at least 95%, such as at least 96%, such as at least 97%, such as at least 98% or such as at least 99% identity with hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1). In further embodiments, said identities to hGH are coupled to at least 10%, such as at least 20%, such as at least 40%, such as at least 60%, such as at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH as determined in assay I herein. Any one of the sequence identity embodiments may be combined with any one of the activity embodiments, such as a GH having at least 80% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 60% of the growth hormone activity of hGH; a GH having at least 90% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 40% of the growth hormone activity of hGH; a GH having at least 95% identity with hGH and coupled to at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH, and so forth.
  • In a still further embodiment GH is hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • In further embodiments B comprise or or consist of one or more OEG, and/or gamma-Glu motiv(s) as described above.
  • In a further embodiment of the conjugate of formula (I) or (II), the hydrophilic spacer B has the formula

  • —X1—X2—X3—X4—
  • wherein
      • X1 is —W1—[(CHR1)l1—W2]m1—{[(CH2)n1E1]m2—[(CHR2)l2—W3]m3}n2—,
      • X2 is —[(CHR3)l3—W4]m4—{[(CH2)n3E2]m5—[(CHR4)l4—W5]m6}n4—,
      • X3 is —[(CHR5)l5—W6]m7—,
      • X4 is F-D1-(CH2)l6-D2-,
      • l1, l2, l3, l4, l5 and l6 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • m1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are selected from 0-10,
      • m2 and m5 independently are selected from 0-25,
      • n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • F is aryl, hetaryl, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione or a valence bond, wherein the aryl and hetaryl groups are optionally substituted with halogen, —CN, —OH, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl,
      • R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —NH—C(═NH)—NH2, C1-6-alkyl, aryl or hetaryl; wherein the alkyl, aryl and hetaryl groups optionally are substituted with halogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —CN or —OH,
      • D1, D2, E1 and E2 independently are selected from —O—, —N(R6)—, —N(C(O)R7)— or a valence bond; wherein R6 and R7 independently represent hydrogen or C1-6-alkyl,
      • W1 to W5 independently are selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s2—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s2 is 0 or 1,
      • W6 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s1—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, —NHC(O)C1-6-alkyl, —C(O)NHC1-6-alkyl or a valence bond; wherein s1 is 0 or 1 and the alkyl group is optionally substituted with oxo, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH; wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X4.
  • In a further embodiment W1 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)— or a valence bond. Typically, W1 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NHS(O)2—.
  • In a further embodiment W2 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)— or a valence bond. Typically, W2 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NHS(O)2—.
  • In a further embodiment W3 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)— or a valence bond. Typically, W3 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NHS(O)2—.
  • In a further embodiment W4 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)— or a valence bond. Typically, W4 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NHS(O)2—.
  • In a further embodiment W5 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)— or a valence bond. Typically, W5 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NHS(O)2—.
  • In a further embodiment W6 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —NHC(O)C1-6-alkyl, —C(O)NHC1-6-alkyl or a valence bond; wherein the alkyl group is optionally substituted with pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH; wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X4. Typically, W6 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2— or —NHC(O)C1-6-alkyl.
  • In a further embodiment, D1, D2, F are all valence bonds, l6 is O, and W6 is selected from either pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to GH.
  • In a further embodiment R1 selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH. Typically, R1 is selected from —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, or C1-6-alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, or —S(O)2OH.
  • In a further embodiment R2 is selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH. Typically, R2 is selected from —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, or C1-6-alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, or —S(O)2OH.
  • In a further embodiment R3 is selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH. Typically, R3 is selected from —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, or C1-6-alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, or —S(O)2OH.
  • In a further embodiment R4 is selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH. Typically, R4 is selected from —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, or C1-6-alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, or —S(O)2OH.
  • In a further embodiment R5 is selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH. Typically, R5 is selected from —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, or C1-6-alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, or —S(O)2OH.
  • In a further embodiment E1 is selected from —O— or —N(R6)—, or a valence bond. Typically, E1 is selected from —O—.
  • In a further embodiment E2 is selected from —O— or —N(R6)—, or a valence bond. Typically, E2 is selected from —O—.
  • In a further embodiment E1 and E2 are both —O—.
  • In a further embodiment E1 and E2 are both —N(R6)—.
  • In a further embodiment F is phenyl, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione or a valence bond.
  • In a further embodiment D1 is selected from —O— or —N(R6)—, or a valence bond. Typically, D1 is selected from —N(R6)—.
  • In a further embodiment D2 is selected from —O— or —N(R6)—, or a valence bond. Typically, D1 is selected from —N(R6)—.
  • In a further embodiment l1 is 0-6, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • In a further embodiment l2 is 0-6, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • In a further embodiment l3 is 0-6, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • In a further embodiment l4 is 0-6, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6. In a further embodiment l5 is 0-6, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • In a further embodiment 16 is 0-6, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • In a further embodiment m1 is 0-6, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • In a further embodiment m2 is 0-10, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10.
  • In a further embodiment m3 is 0-5, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • In a further embodiment m4 is 0-5, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • In a further embodiment m5 is 0-10, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10.
  • In a further embodiment m6 is 0-5, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • In a further embodiment m7 is 0-5, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • In a further embodiment n1 is 0-10, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • In a further embodiment n2 is 0-10, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • In a further embodiment n3 is 0-10, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • In a further embodiment n4 is 0-10, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
  • In a further embodiment X1 is —W1—[(CHR1)l1—W2]m1—{[(CH2)n1O]m2—[(CHR2)l2—W3]m3}n2— and X2 is —[(CHR3)l3—W4]m4—{[(CH2)n3O]m5—[(CHR4)l4—W5]m6}n4—, wherein —{[(CH2)n1O]m2—[(CHR2)l2—W3]m3}n2— and —{[(CH2)n3O]m5—[(CHR4)l4—W5]m6}n4— are selected from,
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00032
  • wherein * is intended to denote a point of attachment, ie, an open bond.
  • In a further embodiment the molar weight of said hydrophilic spacer is in the range from 80 Daltons (D) to 1500 D or in the range from 300 D to 1100 D.
  • In a still further embodiment W has the formula

  • —W7—Y—,
  • wherein
      • Y is —(CH2)l7—C3-10-Cycloalkyl-W8— or a valence bond,
      • l7 is 0-6,
      • W7 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s3—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s3 is 0 or 1,
      • W8 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s4—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s4 is 0 or 1.
  • In an embodiment of W Y is —(CH2)l7-cyclohexyl-W8—.
  • In a further embodiment Y is a valence bond.
  • In an embodiment W7 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)— or a valence bond. Typically, W7 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, or —C(O)NHS(O)2.
  • In a further embodiment W8 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)— or a valence bond. Typically, W8 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, or —C(O)NHS(O)2.
  • In a further embodiment l7 is 0 or 1.
  • In a further embodiment the hydrophilic spacer B of the present invention is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00033
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00034
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00035
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00036
  • wherein * is intended to denote a point of attachment, ie, an open bond.
  • The albumin binding residue (substituent A in formula (I) or (II) above) attached to the growth hormone compound of the present invention is a lipophilic residue, which binds non-covalently to albumin. Typically, albumin binding residue is negatively charged at physiological pH, and has a binding affinity towards human serum albumin that is below about 10 μM or even below about 1 μM.
  • In a further embodiment of the growth hormone compound of the present invention the albumin binding residue is selected from a straight chain alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, a group which has a ω-carboxylic acid group or a ω-carboxylic acid isoster. Typically, the albumin binding residue has from 6 to 40 carbon atoms. In a further embodiment the albumin binding residue has from 8 to 26 carbon atoms. In a further embodiment the albumin binding residue has from 8 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • In a further embodiment A has 14 to 26 carbon atoms and comprises an ω-carboxylic acid group. In a further embodiment A has 14 to 26 carbon atoms and comprises an ω-carboxylic acid isoster, such as a tetrazol.
  • In a further embodiment A is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00037
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00038
  • wherein * denotes the attachment to B through W.
  • The hydrophilic spacer (B) is preferably introduced in a position of the growth hormone compound (GH) in a selective manner in order to be able to control whether one or two albumin binding residues (A) should be incorporated in the growth hormone compound. The hydrophilic spacer (B) may be attached to an amino acid side-chain of the GH compound. Such amino acid side-chain may be a chemically modified amino acid side-chain of the GH compound. Another, such amino acid side-chain may be an enzymatically modified amino acid side-chain of the GH compound. Preferably, a transglutaminase is used to introduce a hydrophilic spacer in the glutamine residue in the position corresponding to position 40 or position 141 in SEQ ID NO: 1. Another way of selectively introducing a hydrophilic spacer is in the N-terminal residue of the growth hormone compound, such as hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • In the growth hormone conjugate of the formula (I) the fragment A-W—B may be linear or branched. In one embodiment, A-W—B is not a linear peptide.
  • In a further embodiment the albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is attached to the glutamine residue in the position corresponding to position 40 in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • In a further embodiment the albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is attached to the glutamine residue in the position corresponding to position 141 in SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • In a further embodiment the albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is attached to the N-terminal residue of the growth hormone compound, such as hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • In a further embodiment the albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is attached to the glutamine residue in the position corresponding to position 40, position 141 and to the N-terminal residue of the growth hormone compound, such as hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • The growth hormone conjugates of the present invention are selected from,
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00039
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00040
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00041
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00042
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00043
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00044
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00045
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00046
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00047
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00048
  • In a further aspect the present invention relates to a growth hormone variants such as the growth hormone compounds (GH) described herein. The growth hormone variants may be useful as therapeutic agents or as intermediates in the preparation of growth hormone conjugates. The growth hormone compounds may be produces by recombinant methods known in the art or as described herein. In an embodiment the growth hormone variant is soluble.
  • In a further aspect the invention relates to a composition comprising a growth hormone variant as described herein.
  • In an embodiment the composition comprises a growth hormone variant comprising a single cys mutation selected from the group of: P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C and G126C.
  • In an embodiment of the invention the growth hormone variant of the composition has a single Cys mutation in the N-terminal (AA 1-8), in Helix 1, in Loop 1, in Helix 2, in Loop 2 or in Helix 3 of the growth hormone compound.
  • In an embodiment the the single Cys mutation is positioned in the N-terminal, the mutation being such as any one of P5C, S7C. In an embodiment the single Cys mutation is positioned in H1 (corresponding to AA 9-35), such as any one of D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C. In an embodiment the the single Cys mutation is positioned in L1 (corresponding to AA36-71), the muation being such as any one of K38C, E39C, Y42C, S43C, D47C, P48C, S55, S57C, P59C, S62C, E65C, Q69C or preferably any one of Y42C, S55C, S57C, S62C, Q69C. In an embodiment the single Cys mutation is positioned in H2 (AA 72-98), such as any one of E88C, Q91C, S95C and A98C. In an embodiment the single Cys mutation is positioned within AA 99-127. In an embodiment the single Cys mutation is positioned in L2 (AA 99-106), such as any one of N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C and Y103C. In an embodiment the single Cys mutation is positioned in H3 (AA 107-127), the mutation being such as any one of D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C and G126C of hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1) or in L3 or H4 (corresponding to AA128-154 and AA155-184) the muation being such as any one of E129C, D130C, G131C, P133C, T135C, G136C, T142C, D147C, N149C, D154C, A155C, L156C, R178C, V180C or in the C-terminal the muation being such as any one of E186C G187C and G190C. If the single Cys mutation is present in a hGH variant the mutation is located in corresponding amino acid residues. In even further embodiments the single Cys mutation is located within AA 93-106 in hGH or corresponding residues in hGH variants. In further specified embodiments the single Cys mutation is located within L2, such as within AA 99-106 or AA 99-104 or corresponding residues.
  • In an embodiment the composition according to the invention comprises a growth hormone variant comprising a single cys mutation and an additional disulfide bond. In an embodiment the single cys mutation is any one of the above described single cys mutations. In an embodiment the the single cys mutation in GH is selected from any one of: T3C, P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, K38C, E39C, Y42C, S43C, D47C, P48C, S55C, S57C, P59C, S62, E65C, Q69C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C, G126C, E129C, D130C, G131C, P133C, T135C, G136C, T142C, D147C, N149C, D154C, A155C, L156C, R178C, E186C, G187C and G190C, such as any one of; P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C and G126C of hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1) or corresponding residues. In an embodiment the additional disulfide bond is selected from the following group of pairs of cystein muations: R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I38C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, P89C/F146C, F92C/F146C, F92C/T148C, R94C/D107C, V102C/A105C, L156C/F146C, L156C/T148C and/or V185C/S188C. In an embodiment the growth hormone variant comprise a single cystein and an additional disulfide bond selected from the following pairs of cystein mutations: S57C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, S85C/Y143C and/or S85C/S144C.
  • In an embodiment the growth hormone variant comprise a single cysteine mutation in L2 and an additional disulfide bond which connects a loop segment, such as from amino acid residues 128-154 (H3), with a helical segment, such as helix B or helix 2 (corresponding to AA 72-98). In an embodiment the growth hormone variant comprise a combination of mutations selected from the following group: A98C/Q84C/Y143C, A98C/S85C/Y143C, A98C/S85C/S144C, N99C/Q84C/Y143C, N99C/S85C/Y143C, N99C/S85C/S144C, S101C/Q84C/Y143C, S101C/S85C/Y143C, S101C/S85C/S144C, L101C/Q84C/Y143C, L101C/S85C/Y143C, L101C/S85C/S144C, C102C/Q84C/Y143C, C102C/S85C/Y143C and C102C/S85C/S144C. In an embodiment the growth hormone variant comprise a combination of mutations selected from the following group: A98C/Q84C/Y143C, N99C/Q84C/Y143C, S101C/Q84C/Y143C, L101C/Q84C/Y143C and C102C/Q84C/Y143C. In an embodiment the growth hormone variant comprise the mutations L101C, Q84C and Y143C.
  • In a further aspect the present invention relates to a growth hormone conjugate which comprises a growth hormone compound (GH) linked to an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof for use in therapy. Furthermore, in the growth hormone conjugate of the present invention GH, the albumin binding residue, and the hydrophilic spacer are selected from any one of the above embodiments, in particular the growth hormone conjugate has the formula (I) or (II).
  • In a further aspect the present invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition comprising a growth hormone conjugate which comprises a growth hormone compound (GH) linked to an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt optionally in combination with a pharmaceutical acceptable excipient.
  • The term “identity” as known in the art, refers to a relationship between the sequences of two or more proteins, as determined by comparing the sequences. In the art, “identity” also means the degree of sequence relatedness between proteins, as determined by the number of matches between strings of two or more amino acid residues. “Identity” measures the percent of identical matches between the smaller of two or more sequences with gap alignments (if any) addressed by a particular mathematical model or computer program (i.e., “algorithms”). Identity of related proteins can be readily calculated by known methods. Such methods include, but are not limited to, those described in Computational Molecular Biology, Lesk, A. M., ed., Oxford University Press, New York, 1988; Biocomputing: Informatics and Genome Projects, Smith, D. W., ed., Academic Press, New York, 1993; Computer Analysis of Sequence Data, Part 1, Griffin, A. M., and Griffin, H. G., eds., Humana Press, New Jersey, 1994; Sequence Analysis in Molecular Biology, von Heinje, G., Academic Press, 1987; Sequence Analysis Primer, Gribskov, M. and Devereux, J., eds., M. Stockton Press, New York, 1991; and Carillo et al., SIAM J. Applied Math., 48, 1073, (1988).
  • Preferred methods to determine identity are designed to give the largest match between the sequences tested. Methods to determine identity are described in publicly available computer programs. Preferred computer program methods to determine identity between two sequences include the GCG program package, including GAP (Devereux et al., Nucl. Acid. Res., 12, 387, (1984)); Genetics Computer Group, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis.), BLASTP, BLASTN, and FASTA (Altschul et al., J. Mol. Biol., 215, 403-410, (1990)). The BLASTX program is publicly available from the National Center for Biotechnology Information (NCBI) and other sources (BLAST Manual, Altschul et al. NCB/NLM/NIH Bethesda, Md. 20894; Altschul et al., supra). The well known Smith Waterman algorithm may also be used to determine identity.
  • For example, using the computer algorithm GAP (Genetics Computer Group, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis.), two proteins for which the percent sequence identity is to be determined are aligned for optimal matching of their respective amino acids (the “matched span”, as determined by the algorithm). A gap opening penalty (which is calculated as 3.times. the average diagonal; the “average diagonal” is the average of the diagonal of the comparison matrix being used; the “diagonal” is the score or number assigned to each perfect amino acid match by the particular comparison matrix) and a gap extension penalty (which is usually 1/10 times the gap opening penalty), as well as a comparison matrix such as PAM 250 or BLOSUM 62 are used in conjunction with the algorithm. A standard comparison matrix (see Dayhoff et al., Atlas of Protein Sequence and Structure, vol. 5, suppl. 3, (1978) for the PAM 250 comparison matrix; Henikoff et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci USA, 89, 10915-10919, (1992) for the BLOSUM 62 comparison matrix) is also used by the algorithm.
  • Preferred parameters for a protein sequence comparison include the following: Algorithm: Needleman et al., J. Mol. Biol, 48, 443-453, (1970); Comparison matrix: BLOSUM 62 from Henikoff et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 89, 10915-10919, (1992); Gap Penalty: 12, Gap Length Penalty: 4, Threshold of Similarity: 0.
  • The GAP program is useful with the above parameters. The aforementioned parameters are the default parameters for protein comparisons (along with no penalty for end gaps) using the GAP algorithm.
  • The compounds of the present invention have improved pharmacological properties compared to the corresponding un-conjugated growth hormone, which is also referred to as the parent compound. Examples of such pharmacological properties include functional in vivo half-life, immunogencity, renal filtration, protease protection and albumin binding.
  • The term “functional in vivo half-life” is used in its normal meaning, i.e., the time at which 50% of the biological activity of the GH or GH conjugate is still present in the body/target organ, or the time at which the activity of the GH or GH conjugate is 50% of its initial value. As an alternative to determining functional in vivo half-life, “in vivo plasma half-life” may be determined, i.e., the time at which 50% of the GH or GH conjugate circulate in the plasma or bloodstream prior to being cleared. Determination of plasma half-life is often more simple than determining functional half-life and the magnitude of plasma half-life is usually a good indication of the magnitude of functional in vivo half-life. Alternative terms to plasma half-life include serum half-life, circulating half-life, circulatory half-life, serum clearance, plasma clearance, and clearance half-life.
  • The term “increased” as used in connection with the functional in vivo half-life or plasma half-life is used to indicate that the relevant half-life of the GH conjugate is statistically significantly increased relative to that of the parent GH, as determined under comparable conditions. For instance the relevant half-life may be increased by at least about 25%, such as by at lest about 50%, e.g., by at least about 100%, 150%, 200%, 250%, or 500%. In one embodiment, the compounds of the present invention exhibit an increase in half-life of at least about 5 h, preferably at least about 24 h, more preferably at least about 72 h, and most preferably at least about 7 days, relative to the half-life of the parent GH.
  • Measurement of in vivo plasma half-life can be carried out in a number of ways as described in the literature. An increase in in vivo plasma half-life may be quantified as a decrease in clearance (CL) or as an increase in mean residence time (MRT). Conjugated GH of the present invention for which the CL is decreased to less than 70%, such as less than 50%, such than less than 20%, such than less than 10% of the CL of the parent GH as determined in a suitable assay is said to have an increased in vivo plasma half-life. Conjugated GH of the present invention for which MRT is increased to more than 130%, such as more than 150%, such as more than 200%, such as more than 500% of the MRT of the parent GH in a suitable assay is said to have an increased in vivo plasma half-life. Clearance and mean residence time can be assessed in standard pharmacokinetic studies using suitable test animals. It is within the capabilities of a person skilled in the art to choose a suitable test animal for a given protein. Tests in human, of course, represent the ultimate test. Suitable test animals include normal, Sprague-Dawley male rats, mice and cynomolgus monkeys. Typically the mice and rats are in injected in a single subcutaneous bolus, while monkeys may be injected in a single subcutaneous bolus or in a single iv dose. The amount injected depends on the test animal. Subsequently, blood samples are taken over a period of one to five days as appropriate for the assessment of CL and MRT. The blood samples are conveniently analysed by ELISA techniques.
  • The term “Immunogenicity” of a compound refers to the ability of the compound, when administered to a human, to elicit a deleterious immune response, whether humoral, cellular, or both. In any human sub-population, there may be individuals who exhibit sensitivity to particular administered proteins. Immunogenicity may be measured by quantifying the presence of growth hormone antibodies and/or growth hormone responsive T-cells in a sensitive individual, using conventional methods known in the art. In one embodiment, the conjugated GH of the present invention exhibit a decrease in immunogenicity in a sensitive individual of at least about 10%, preferably at least about 25%, more preferably at least about 40% and most preferably at least about 50%, relative to the immunogenicity for that individual of the parent GH. The term “protease protection” or “protease protected” as used herein is intended to indicate that the conjugated GH of the present invention is more resistant to the plasma peptidase or proteases than is the parent GH. Protease and peptidase enzymes present in plasma are known to be involved in the degradation of circulating proteins, such as e.g. circulating peptide hormones, such as growth hormone. Such protease protection may be measured by the method of Example A described herein.
  • Growth hormone may be susceptible to degradation by for instance thrombin, plasmin, subtilisin, and chymotrypsin-like serine proteinase. Assays for determination of degradation of these proteases are described in J. Biotech., 65, 183, (1998). In one embodiment, the rate of hydrolysis of the GH conjugate is less than 70%, such as less than 40%, such as less than 10% of that of the parent GH.
  • The most abundant protein component in circulating blood of mammalian species is serum albumin, which is normally present at a concentration of approximately 3 to 4.5 grams per 100 milliters of whole blood. Serum albumin is a blood protein of approximately 65,000 daltons which has several important functions in the circulatory system. It functions as a transporter of a variety of organic molecules found in the blood, as the main transporter of various metabolites such as fatty acids and bilirubin through the blood, and, owing to its abundance, as an osmotic regulator of the circulating blood. Serum albumin has a half-life of more than one week, and one approach to increasing the plasma half-life of proteins has been to conjugate to the protein a group that binds to serum albumin. Albumin binding property may be determined as described in J. Med. Chem., 43, 1986, (2000) which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • The growth hormone conjugates of formula (I) or (II) exert growth hormone activity and may as such be used in the treatment of diseases or states which will benefit from an increase in the amount of circulating growth hormone. In particular, the invention provides a method for the treatment of growth hormone deficiency (GHD); Turner Syndrome; Prader-Willi syndrome (PWS); Noonan syndrome; Down syndrome; chronic renal disease, juvenile rheumatoid arthritis; cystic fibrosis, HIV-infection in children receiving HAART treatment (HIV/HALS children); short children born short for gestational age (SGA); short stature in children born with very low birth weight (VLBW) but SGA; skeletal dysplasia; hypochondroplasia; achondroplasia; idiopathic short stature (ISS); GHD in adults; fractures in or of long bones, such as tibia, fibula, femur, humerus, radius, ulna, clavicula, matacarpea, matatarsea, and digit; fractures in or of spongious bones, such as the scull, base of hand, and base of food; patients after tendon or ligament surgery in e.g. hand, knee, or shoulder; patients having or going through distraction oteogenesis; patients after hip or discus replacement, meniscus repair, spinal fusions or prosthesis fixation, such as in the knee, hip, shoulder, elbow, wrist or jaw; patients into which osteosynthesis material, such as nails, screws and plates, have been fixed; patients with non-union or mal-union of fractures; patients after osteatomia, e.g. from tibia or 1st toe; patients after graft implantation; articular cartilage degeneration in knee caused by trauma or arthritis; osteoporosis in patients with Turner syndrome; osteoporosis in men; adult patients in chronic dialysis (APCD); malnutritional associated cardiovascular disease in APCD; reversal of cachexia in APCD; cancer in APCD; chronic abstractive pulmonal disease in APCD; HIV in APCD; elderly with APCD; chronic liver disease in APCD, fatigue syndrome in APCD; Crohn's disease; impaired liver function; males with HIV infections; short bowel syndrome; central obesity; HIV-associated lipodystrophy syndrome (HALS); male infertility; patients after major elective surgery, alcohol/drug detoxification or neurological trauma; aging; frail elderly; osteo-arthritis; traumatically damaged cartilage; erectile dysfunction; fibromyalgia; memory disorders; depression; traumatic brain injury; subarachnoid haemorrhage; very low birth weight; metabolic syndrome; glucocorticoid myopathy; or short stature due to glucucorticoid treatment in children, the method comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a growth hormone conjugate according to formula (I) or (II).
  • In a further aspect, the invention provides a method for the acceleration of the healing of muscle tissue, nervous tissue or wounds; the acceleration or improvement of blood flow to damaged tissue; or the decrease of infection rate in damaged tissue, the method comprising administration to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a therapeutivcally effective amount of a growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) or (II).
  • In a further embodiment, the invention relates to the use of a growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) or (II) in the manufacture of diseases benefiting from an increase in the growth hormone plasma level, such as the disease mentioned above.
  • A typical parenteral dose is in the range of 10−9 mg/kg to about 100 mg/kg body weight per administration. Typical administration doses are from about 0.0000001 to about 10 mg/kg body weight per administration. The exact dose will depend on e.g. indication, medicament, frequency and mode of administration, the sex, age and general condition of the subject to be treated, the nature and the severity of the disease or condition to be treated, the desired effect of the treatment and other factors evident to the person skilled in the art.
  • Typical dosing frequencies are twice daily, once daily, bi-daily, twice weekly, once weekly or with even longer dosing intervals. Due to the prolonged half-lifes of the fusion proteins of the present invention, a dosing regime with long dosing intervals, such as twice weekly, once weekly or with even longer dosing intervals is a particular embodiment of the invention.
  • Many diseases are treated using more than one medicament in the treatment, either concomitantly administered or sequentially administered. It is therefore within the scope of the present invention to use a growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) or (II) in therapeutic methods for the treatment of one of the above mentioned diseases in combination with one or more other therapeutically active compound(s) normally used in the treatment said diseases. By analogy, it is also within the scope of the present invention to use a growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) or (II) in combination with other therapeutically active compounds normally used in the treatment of one of the above mentioned diseases in the manufacture of a medicament for said disease.
    • General Methods Enzyme Conjugation:
  • In the preparation of a growth hormone conjugate of the present invention, typically at least one of the covalent bonds established in the preparation of a A-W—B-GH conjugate of formula (I) is prepared by use of an enzyme as illustrated in the examples below. Such an enzyme may for instance be selected from the group consisting of transglutaminases, serine proteases and cysteine proteases. Typically, said enzyme is a transglutaminase. Such transglutaminase may for instance be selected from the group consisting of microbial transglutaminases, tissue transglutaminases and factor XIII and variants thereof. In another embodiment, said enzyme is a cysteine protease. The growth hormone conjugate of the present invention may be prepared by many different methods, non-limiting examples are shown below.
  • The present invention also provides methods for preparing A-W—B-GH conjugates of formula (I).
    • Transglutaminase
  • As stated above, at least one of the covalent bonds established in the preparation of a A-W—B-GH conjugate of the present invention may be prepared by use of a transglutaminase. Transglutaminases may include microbial transglutaminases such as that isolated from the Streptomyces species; S. mobaraense, S. cinnamoneum, S. griseocarneum (U.S. Pat. No. 5,156,956 incorporated herein by reference), S. lavendulae (U.S. Pat. No. 5,252,469 incorporated herein by reference) and S. ladakanum (JP2003/199569 incorporated herein by reference). Other useful microbial transglutaminases have been isolated from Bacillus subtilis (disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,731,183, which is incorporated herein by reference) and from various Myxomycetes. Other examples of useful microbial transglutaminases are those disclosed in WO1996/06931 (e.g. transglutaminase from Bacillus lydicus) and WO1996/22366, both of which are incorporated herein by reference. Useful non-microbial transglutaminases include guinea-pig liver transglutaminase, and transglutaminases from various marine sources like the flat fish Pagrus major (disclosed in EP0555649, which is incorporated herein by reference), and the Japanese oyster Crassostrea gigas (disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,736,356, which is incorporated herein by reference). Functional analogues and derivatives thereof may also be useful.
  • Typically, the TGase used in the methods of the invention is a microbial transglutaminase. In one embodiment, the TGase is from S. mobaraense or a variant thereof, for instance as described in WO2007/020290 and WO2008/020075. In another embodiment, the TGase is from S. ladakanum or a variant thereof, for instance as described in WO2008/020075.
  • The conjugation of GH to A-W—B according to the present invention may be achieved by TGase-mediated modification leading to selective alteration at specific lysine (Lys) or glutamine (Gln) positions in the sequence of the GH compound depending on the substrate used. Use of amines as substrates will leade to modification of Glutamines whereas the use of primary amides will lead to modification of Lysines. hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1) has 9 lysine residues at positions 38, 41, 70, 115, 140, 145, 158, 168 and 172 and 13 glutamine residues at positions 22, 29, 40, 46, 49, 68, 69, 84, 91, 122, 137, 141 and 181, although not all of these are readily available for modification nor suitably for modifications as this will lead to diminished binding potency to the growth hormone binding proteine hence leading to reduced biological activity. The x-ray protein crystal structure between hGH and its binding proteine (pdb: 3HHR) reveals that at least 4 lysines (38, 41, 168 and 172) takes part in binding to the binding proteine and potentially only one of the glutamines (Gln 46). This renders the glutamines more attractive as target for selective introduction of an albumin binder linker.
  • These structural considerations are further supported by findings summarised by N. Chene et al in Reprod. Nutr. Develop. 29, 1-25 (1989) where it's concluded that chemical modifications affecting lysines have been found to have a negative effect on the in vivo biological activity and on the binding capacity to the liver receptors of GH.
    • Chemistry I
  • In an aspect the present invention relates to preparation of a growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) wherein a GH compound is treated with a property-modifying group using TGase catalyzed chemistry. Initially, an aldehyde or a ketone functionality is installed by a two step reaction using amino alcohols that subsequently are treated with periodate to generate an aldehyde or keto functionality by oxidative cleavage. Non limited examples of amino alcohols for illustration only includes 1,3-diamino-2-propanol and 1-amino-2,3-dihydroxypropane.
  • In a further aspect the present invention relates to preparation of a growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) comprising treatment of an aldehyde or ketone derived from the GH compound with a property-modifying group-derived aniline or heteroaryl amine to yield an amine (III→IV).
  • In an embodiment, aldehyde derived from the GH compound is treated with property-modifying group-derived aniline or heteroarylamine.
  • The term “GH compound derived aldehyde (or ketone)” or “an aldehyde or ketone derived from the GH compound” is intented to indicate a GH compound to which an aldehyde or ketone functional group has been covalently attached, or a GH compound on which an aldehyde or ketone functional group has been generated. The preparation of GH compound-derived aldehydes, such as compound (III) illustrated below is well known to those skilled in the art, and any of these known procedures may be used to prepare the GH compound-derived aldehyde (III) required for the realization of the invention disclosed herein.
  • In one embodiment, the conjugate A-W—B-GH (IV) is prepared as illustrated below:
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00049
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00050
  • The TGase-mediated enzymatic reaction with GH (I) results in the modification of Gin at position 141 and/or 40 affording (II). The modified GH (II) is treated with periodate to cleave the aminoalcohol to provide a GH derived aldehyde (III). Conjugation of GH aldehyde (III) with A-W—B1-NH2 occurs via reductive alkylation (III→IV). Reductive alkylation as exemplified herein is well-recognized in the art and results in GH compounds (IV) modified in position Gln(141) and/or 40.
    • Chemistry II
  • In one embodiment, the conjugate A-W—B-GH is prepared using reductive amination in GH's N-terminal as illustrated below:
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00051
  • Conjugation of GH to A-W—B1-CHO occurs via reductive alkylation (GH→V). Reductive alkylation as exemplified above is well-recognized in the art for modifying the N-terminal of GH.
    • Chemistry III
  • In one embodiment, the conjugate A-W—B-GH is prepared as illustrated below:
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00052
  • Wherein the cysteine residue optionally is protected as a mixed disulfide (VI) (GH—S—S—R) with R being a small organic moeity. Non limited examples of mixed disulfides may include disulfides between cystamine (R═—CH2CH2NH2); cysteine (R═—CH2CH(C(O)OH)NH2); homocysteine (R═—CH2CH2CH(C(O)OH)NH2); and gluthatione (R═—CH2CH(C(O)NHCH2C(O)OH)NH—C(O)CH2CH2CH(C(O)OH)NH2).
  • The derivatization process utilise an albumin binding linker A-W—B1-LG wherein LG represent an inorganic leaving group such as —Cl, —Br, —I or an organic leaving group such as mesylate or tosylate. Conjugation of GH with A-W—B1-LG occurs via nucleophilic substitution (VII→IX).
    • Chemistry IV
  • In one embodiment, the conjugate A-W—B-GH is prepared as illustrated below:
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00053
  • Deprotected Cys GH compound (VII) as obtained from (VI) above can be reacted with a malimide substituted albumin binder linker (X) affording GH conjugate A-W—B1-NHC(O)CH2CH2-pyrrolidin-2,5-dione-3-GH (XI).
  • wherein the hydrophilic spacer B1 has the formula

  • —X1—X2—X3—X4—
  • wherein
      • X1 is —W1—[(CHR1)l1—W2]m1—{[(CH2)n1E1]m2—[(CHR2)l2—W3]m3}n2—,
      • X2 is —[(CHR3)l3—W4]m4—{[(CH2)n3E2]m5—[(CHR4)l4—W5]m6}n4—,
      • X3 is —[(CHR5)l5]m7—,
      • X4 is a valence bond,
      • l1, l2, l3, l4, and l5 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • m1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are selected from 0-10,
      • m2 and m5 independently are selected from 0-25,
      • n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —NH—C(═NH)—NH2, C1-6-alkyl, aryl or hetaryl; wherein the alkyl, aryl and hetaryl groups optionally are substituted with halogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —CN or —OH,
      • E1 and E2 independently are selected from —O—, —NR6—, —N(COR7)— or a valence bond; wherein R6 and R7 independently represent hydrogen or C1-6-alkyl,
      • W1 to W5 independently are selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s2—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s2 is 0 or 1.
    Chemistry V
  • In one embodiment, the conjugate A-W—B-GH is prepared as illustrated below:
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00054
  • Albumine binders may be attached to single cys GH derivatives using S-nitrosyl chemistry as described in WO2009/024791.
  • Deprotected Cys GH compound (VII) is subjected to S-nitrosylation by addition of a NO donor such as DEA NOnate (Sigma Aldrich). Nitrosylated single cys GH (XII) is then reacted with an allyl amine substituted albumine binder (XIII) affording oxime (XIV) which after hydrolysis affords GH conjugate A-W—B1-C(O)NHCH2C(O)CH2—Cys GH (XV) wherein the hydrophilic spacer B1 has the formula

  • —X1—X2—X3—X4—
  • wherein
      • X1 is —W1—[(CHR1)l1—W2]m1—{[(CH2)n1E1]m2—[(CHR2)l2—W3]m3}n2—,
      • X2 is —[(CHR3)l3—W4]m4—{[(CH2)n3E2]m5—[(CHR4)l4—W5]m6}n4—,
      • X3 is —[(CHR5)l5]m7—,
      • X4 is a valence bond,
      • l1, l2, l3, l4, and l5 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • m1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are selected from 0-10,
      • m2 and m5 independently are selected from 0-25,
      • n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —NH—C(═NH)—NH2, C1-6-alkyl, aryl or hetaryl; wherein the alkyl, aryl and hetaryl groups optionally are substituted with halogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —CN or —OH,
      • E1 and E2 independently are selected from —O—, —N(R6)—, —N(C(O)R7)— or a valence bond; wherein R6 and R7 independently represent hydrogen or C1-6-alkyl,
      • W1 to W5 independently are selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s2—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s2 is 0 or 1.
  • A close relationship to the natural peptide is generally regarded as an advantage with therapeutic interventions comprising administration of variants or analogues of this natural peptide as it minimizes the risk of e.g. any unwanted antibody generation.
  • GH may be modified in their C-terminal by use of carboxypeptidase Y (EC. 3.4.16.5), and suitable modified substrates as described in WO2007/093594. A two step procedure as described by B. Peschke et al. “C-Terminally PEGylated GH derivatives” Bioorg. Med. Chem. 15, 4382-4395, (2007), where C terminal alanine is enzymatically exchanged with NE-(4-acetylbenzoyl)lysine, followed by reaction with albumin binder derivatives according to the invention.
  • As apparent from the above the invention further relates to the intermediate linker applied in preparation of the conjugate A-W—B-GH. Said linker compound may be described by us of formula (III)

  • A-W—B1-U  (III)
  • wherein A represent an albumin binding residue,
    B1 represents a hydrophilic spacer,
    W is a chemical group linking A and B1, and U represent a conjugating moiety.
  • Based on the above the conjugating moiety will vary depending on the method of conjugation applied which may in the end also be visible in the final hGH compound (A-W—B-GH).
  • In further embodiments of the compound, A-W—B1-U, A and W are as defined in any of the above embodiments.
  • When the method described herein above as Chemistry IV, is applied the compound A-W—B1-U, may further be defined, as an embodiment, wherein U comprises or consists of an aryl, an heteraryl, a substituted malimide or a pyrrolidine-2,5-dione such as —NHC(O)CH2CH2-pyrrolidin-2.5-dione.
  • In alternative embodiments of compound A-W—B1-U, U comprises D1-(CH2)l6-D2, wherein D1 and D2 are independently selected from —O—, —N(R6)-, —NC(O)R7- or a valence bond; wherein R6 and R7 independently represent hydrogen or C1-6-alkyl.
  • Likewise application of Chemistry III as described herein above will apply linker compounds wherein U comprises or consists of a leaving group, such as Cl, Br, I, —OH, —OS(O)2Me, —OS(O)2CF3 or —OTs, or preferably compounds according to formula (III), wherein the leaving group is a halogen compound selected from CI, Br and I, preferably Br.
  • Further embodiments of the linker compounds (which are applied in Chemistry V) are according to the invention defined by formula (III), wherein U comprises or consists of an allyl amine (H2C═CH—CH2—NH2), such as —C(O)NHCH2—CH═CH2.
  • When the method described herein above as Chemistry I, is applied the compound A-W—B1-U, may further be defined, as an embodiment, wherein U comprises or consists of an amine (—NH2).
  • In alternative embodiments, U may comprises or consists of an aldehyde, such as —CHO.
  • The compounds may following be conjugated to any sort of therapeutic compound which include an acceptor group to which “U” may enable conjugation. In a preferred embodiment the therapeutic compound is a polypeptide. Peptides may naturally include AA residues which may function as an acceptor group, such as Gin residues, Phe residues and Cys residues.
  • Alternatively such amino acid residues may be introduced in an appropriate position in the polypeptide.
    • Pharmaceutical Compositions
  • Another purpose is to provide a pharmaceutical composition comprising a growth hormone conjugate of the present invention, such as a growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) or (II), which is present in a concentration from 10−15 mg/mL to 200 mg/mL, such as e.g. 10−10 mg/mL to 5 mg/mL and wherein said composition has a pH from 2.0 to 10.0. The composition may further comprise pharmaceutical exhibients, such as a buffer system, preservative(s), tonicity agent(s), chelating agent(s), stabilizers and surfactants. In one embodiment of the invention the pharmaceutical composition is an aqueous composition, ie. composition comprising water. Such composition is typically a solution or a suspension. In a further embodiment of the invention the pharmaceutical composition is an aqueous solution. The term “aqueous composition” is defined as a composition comprising at least 50% w/w water. Likewise, the term “aqueous solution” is defined as a solution comprising at least 50% w/w water, and the term “aqueous suspension” is defined as a suspension comprising at least 50% w/w water.
  • In another embodiment the pharmaceutical composition is a freeze-dried composition, whereto the physician or the patient adds solvents and/or diluents prior to use.
  • In another embodiment the pharmaceutical composition is a dried composition (e.g. freeze-dried or spray-dried) ready for use without any prior dissolution.
  • In a further aspect the invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition comprising an aqueous solution of a growth hormone conjugate, such as a growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) or (II), and a buffer, wherein said GH conjugate is present in a concentration from 0.1-100 mg/mL or above, and wherein said composition has a pH from about 2.0 to about 10.0.
  • In a another embodiment of the invention the pH of the composition is selected from the list consisting of 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 3.0, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 4.0, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8, 4.9, 5.0, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8, 5.9, 6.0, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8, 6.9, 7.0, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.8, 7.9, 8.0, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 8.8, 8.9, 9.0, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, and 10.0.
  • In a further embodiment of the invention the buffer is selected from the group consisting of sodium acetate, sodium carbonate, citrate, glycylglycine, histidine, glycine, lysine, arginine, sodium dihydrogen phosphate, disodium hydrogen phosphate, sodium phosphate, and tris(hydroxymethyl)-aminomethan, bicine, tricine, malic acid, succinate, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, aspartic acid or mixtures thereof. Each one of these specific buffers constitutes an alternative embodiment of the invention.
  • In a further embodiment of the invention the composition further comprises a pharmaceutically acceptable preservative. In a further embodiment of the invention the preservative is selected from the group consisting of phenol, o-cresol, m-cresol, p-cresol, methyl p-hydroxybenzoate, propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, 2-phenoxyethanol, butyl p-hydroxybenzoate, 2-phenylethanol, benzyl alcohol, chlorobutanol, and thiomerosal, bronopol, benzoic acid, imidurea, chlorohexidine, sodium dehydroacetate, chlorocresol, ethyl p-hydroxybenzoate, benzethonium chloride, chlorphenesine (3-(p-chlorphenoxy)propane-1,2-diol) or mixtures thereof. In a further embodiment of the invention the preservative is present in a concentration from 0.1 mg/mL to 20 mg/mL. In a further embodiment of the invention the preservative is present in a concentration from 0.1 mg/mL to 5 mg/mL. In a further embodiment of the invention the preservative is present in a concentration from 5 mg/mL to 10 mg/mL. In a further embodiment of the invention the preservative is present in a concentration from 10 mg/mL to 20 mg/mL. Each one of these specific preservatives constitutes an alternative embodiment of the invention. The use of a preservative in pharmaceutical compositions is well-known to the skilled person. For convenience reference is made to Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20th edition, 2000.
  • In a further embodiment of the invention the composition further comprises an isotonic agent. In a further embodiment of the invention the isotonic agent is selected from the group consisting of a salt (e.g. sodium chloride), a sugar or sugar alcohol, an amino acid (e.g. L-glycine, L-histidine, arginine, lysine, isoleucine, aspartic acid, tryptophan, threonine), an alditol (e.g. glycerol (glycerine), 1,2-propanediol (propyleneglycol), 1,3-propanediol, 1,3-butanediol) polyethyleneglycol (e.g. PEG 400), or mixtures thereof. Any sugar such as mono, di-, or polysaccharides, or water-soluble glucans, including for example fructose, glucose, mannose, sorbose, xylose, maltose, lactose, sucrose, trehalose, dextran, pullulan, dextrin, cyclodextrin, soluble starch, hydroxyethyl starch and carboxymethylcellulose-Na may be used. In one embodiment the sugar additive is sucrose. Sugar alcohol is defined as a C4-C8 hydrocarbon having at least one —OH group and includes, for example, mannitol, sorbitol, inositol, galactitol, dulcitol, xylitol, and arabitol. In one embodiment the sugar alcohol additive is mannitol. The sugars or sugar alcohols mentioned above may be used individually or in combination. There is no fixed limit to the amount used, as long as the sugar or sugar alcohol is soluble in the liquid preparation and does not adversely effect the stabilizing effects obtained using the methods of the invention. In one embodiment, the sugar or sugar alcohol concentration is between about 1 mg/mL and about 150 mg/mL. In a further embodiment of the invention the isotonic agent is present in a concentration from 1 mg/mL to 50 mg/mL. In a further embodiment of the invention the isotonic agent is present in a concentration from 1 mg/mL to 7 mg/mL. In a further embodiment of the invention the isotonic agent is present in a concentration from 8 mg/mL to 24 mg/mL. In a further embodiment of the invention the isotonic agent is present in a concentration from 25 mg/mL to 50 mg/mL. Each one of these specific isotonic agents constitutes an alternative embodiment of the invention. The use of an isotonic agent in pharmaceutical compositions is well-known to the skilled person. For convenience reference is made to Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20th edition, 2000.
  • In a further embodiment of the invention the composition further comprises a chelating agent. In a further embodiment of the invention the chelating agent is selected from salts of ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA), citric acid, and aspartic acid, and mixtures thereof. In a further embodiment of the invention the chelating agent is present in a concentration from 0.1 mg/mL to 5 mg/mL. In a further embodiment of the invention the chelating agent is present in a concentration from 0.1 mg/mL to 2 mg/mL. In a further embodiment of the invention the chelating agent is present in a concentration from 2 mg/mL to 5 mg/mL. Each one of these specific chelating agents constitutes an alternative embodiment of the invention. The use of a chelating agent in pharmaceutical compositions is well-known to the skilled person. For convenience reference is made to Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20th edition, 2000.
  • In a further embodiment of the invention the composition further comprises a stabilizer. The use of a stabilizer in pharmaceutical compositions is well-known to the skilled person. For convenience reference is made to Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20th edition, 2000.
  • More particularly, compositions of the invention are stabilized liquid pharmaceutical compositions whose therapeutically active components include a protein that possibly exhibits aggregate formation during storage in liquid pharmaceutical compositions. By “aggregate formation” is intended a physical interaction between the protein molecules that results in formation of oligomers, which may remain soluble, or large visible aggregates that precipitate from the solution. By “during storage” is intended a liquid pharmaceutical composition or composition once prepared, is not immediately administered to a subject. Rather, following preparation, it is packaged for storage, either in a liquid form, in a frozen state, or in a dried form for later reconstitution into a liquid form or other form suitable for administration to a subject. By “dried form” is intended the liquid pharmaceutical composition or composition is dried either by freeze drying (i.e., lyophilization; see, for example, Williams and Polli, J. Parenteral Sci. Technol., 38, 48-59, (1984)), spray drying (see Masters (1991) in Spray-Drying Handbook (5th ed; Longman Scientific and Technical, Essez, U.K.), pp. 491-676; Broadhead et al. Drug Devel. Ind. Pharm. 18, 1169-1206, (1992); and Mumenthaler et al., Pharm. Res., 11, 12-20, (1994)), or air drying (Carpenter and Crowe, Cryobiology 25, 459-470, (1988); and Roser, Biopharm. 4, 47-53, (1991)). Aggregate formation by a protein during storage of a liquid pharmaceutical composition can adversely affect biological activity of that protein, resulting in loss of therapeutic efficacy of the pharmaceutical composition. Furthermore, aggregate formation may cause other problems such as blockage of tubing, membranes, or pumps when the protein-containing pharmaceutical composition is administered using an infusion system.
  • The pharmaceutical compositions of the invention may further comprise an amount of an amino acid base sufficient to decrease aggregate formation by the protein during storage of the composition. By “amino acid base” is intended an amino acid or a combination of amino acids, where any given amino acid is present either in its free base form or in its salt form. Where a combination of amino acids is used, all of the amino acids may be present in their free base forms, all may be present in their salt forms, or some may be present in their free base forms while others are present in their salt forms. In one embodiment, amino acids to use in preparing the compositions of the invention are those carrying a charged side chain, such as arginine, lysine, aspartic acid, and glutamic acid. Any stereoisomer (i.e., L or D isomer, or mixtures thereof) of a particular amino acid (methionine, histidine, arginine, lysine, isoleucine, aspartic acid, tryptophan, threonine and mixtures thereof) or combinations of these stereoisomers or glycine or an organic base such as but not limited to imidazole, may be present in the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention so long as the particular amino acid or organic base is present either in its free base form or its salt form. In one embodiment the L-stereoisomer of an amino acid is used. In one embodiment the L-stereo-isomer is used. Compositions of the invention may also be formulated with analogues of these amino acids. By “amino acid analogue” is intended a derivative of the naturally occurring amino acid that brings about the desired effect of decreasing aggregate formation by the protein during storage of the liquid pharmaceutical compositions of the invention. Suitable arginine analogues include, for example, aminoguanidine, ornithine and N-monoethyl L-arginine, suitable methionine analogues include ethionine and buthionine and suitable cysteine analogues include S-methyl-L cysteine. As with the other amino acids, the amino acid analogues are incorporated into the compositions in either their free base form or their salt form. In a further embodiment of the invention the amino acids or amino acid analogues are used in a concentration, which is sufficient to prevent or delay aggregation of the protein.
  • In a further embodiment of the invention methionine (or other sulphuric amino acids or amino acid analogous) may be added to inhibit oxidation of methionine residues to methionine sulfoxide when the protein acting as the therapeutic agent is a protein comprising at least one methionine residue susceptible to such oxidation. By “inhibit” is intended minimal accumulation of methionine oxidized species over time. Inhibiting methionine oxidation results in greater retention of the protein in its proper molecular form. Any stereoisomer of methionine (L or D isomer) or any combinations thereof can be used. The amount to be added should be an amount sufficient to inhibit oxidation of the methionine residues such that the amount of methionine sulfoxide is acceptable to regulatory agencies. Typically, this means that the composition contains no more than about 10% to about 30% methionine sulfoxide. Generally, this can be obtained by adding methionine such that the ratio of methionine added to methionine residues ranges from about 1:1 to about 1000:1, such as 10:1 to about 100:1.
  • In a further embodiment of the invention the composition further comprises a stabilizer selected from the group of high molecular weight polymers or low molecular compounds. In a further embodiment of the invention the stabilizer is selected from polyethylene glycol (e.g. PEG 3350), polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), polyvinylpyrrolidone, carboxy/hydroxycellulose or derivates thereof (e.g. HPC, HPC-SL, HPC-L and HPMC), cyclodextrins, sulphur-containing substances as monothioglycerol, thioglycolic acid and 2-methylthioethanol, and different salts (e.g. sodium chloride). Each one of these specific stabilizers constitutes an alternative embodiment of the invention.
  • The pharmaceutical compositions may also comprise additional stabilizing agents, which further enhance stability of a therapeutically active protein therein. Stabilizing agents of particular interest to the present invention include, but are not limited to, methionine and EDTA, which protect the protein against methionine oxidation, and a nonionic surfactant, which protects the protein against aggregation associated with freeze-thawing or mechanical shearing.
  • In a further embodiment of the invention the composition further comprises a surfactant. In a further embodiment of the invention the surfactant is selected from a detergent, ethoxylated castor oil, polyglycolyzed glycerides, acetylated monoglycerides, sorbitan fatty acid esters, polyoxypropylene-polyoxyethylene block polymers (eg. poloxamers such as Pluronic® F68, poloxamer 188 and 407, Triton X-100), polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters, polyoxyethylene and polyethylene derivatives such as alkylated and alkoxylated derivatives (tweens, e.g. Tween-20, Tween-40, Tween-80 and Brij-35), monoglycerides or ethoxylated derivatives thereof, diglycerides or polyoxyethylene derivatives thereof, alcohols, glycerol, lectins and phospholipids (eg. phosphatidyl serine, phosphatidyl choline, phosphatidyl ethanolamine, phosphatidyl inositol, diphosphatidyl glycerol and sphingomyelin), derivates of phospholipids (eg. dipalmitoyl phosphatidic acid) and lysophospholipids (eg. palmitoyl lysophosphatidyl-L-serine and 1-acyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphate esters of ethanolamine, choline, serine or threonine) and alkyl, alkoxyl (alkyl ester), alkoxy (alkyl ether)-derivatives of lysophosphatidyl and phosphatidylcholines, e.g. lauroyl and myristoyl derivatives of lysophosphatidylcholine, dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine, and modifications of the polar head group, that is cholines, ethanolamines, phosphatidic acid, serines, threonines, glycerol, inositol, and the positively charged DODAC, DOTMA, DCP, BISHOP, lysophosphatidylserine and lysophosphatidylthreonine, and glycerophospholipids (eg. cephalins), glyceroglycolipids (eg. galactopyransoide), sphingoglycolipids (eg. ceramides, gangliosides), dodecylphosphocholine, hen egg lysolecithin, fusidic acid derivatives-(e.g. sodium tauro-dihydrofusidate etc.), long-chain fatty acids and salts thereof C6-C12 (eg. oleic acid and caprylic acid), acylcarnitines and derivatives, Nα-acylated derivatives of lysine, arginine or histidine, or side-chain acylated derivatives of lysine or arginine, Nα-acylated derivatives of dipeptides comprising any combination of lysine, arginine or histidine and a neutral or acidic amino acid, Nα-acylated derivative of a tripeptide comprising any combination of a neutral amino acid and two charged amino acids, DSS (docusate sodium, CAS registry no [577-11-7]), docusate calcium, CAS registry no [128-49-4]), docusate potassium, CAS registry no [7491-09-0]), SDS (sodium dodecyl sulphate or sodium lauryl sulphate), sodium caprylate, cholic acid or derivatives thereof, bile acids and salts thereof and glycine or taurine conjugates, ursodeoxycholic acid, sodium cholate, sodium deoxycholate, sodium taurocholate, sodium glycocholate, N-Hexadecyl-N,N-dimethyl-3-ammonio-1-propanesulfonate, anionic (alkyl-aryl-sulphonates) monovalent surfactants, zwitterionic surfactants (e.g. N-alkyl-N,N-dimethylammonio-1-propanesulfonates, 3-cholamido-1-propyldimethylammonio-1-propanesulfonate, cationic surfactants (quaternary ammonium bases) (e.g. cetyl-trimethylammonium bromide, cetylpyridinium chloride), nonionic surfactants (eg. dodecyl 13-D-glucopyranoside), poloxamines (eg. Tetronic's), which are tetrafunctional block copolymers derived from sequential addition of propylene oxide and ethylene oxide to ethylenediamine, or the surfactant may be selected from the group of imidazoline derivatives, or mixtures thereof. Each one of these specific surfactants constitutes an alternative embodiment of the invention.
  • The use of a surfactant in pharmaceutical compositions is well-known to the skilled person. For convenience reference is made to Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20th edition, 2000.
  • It is possible that other ingredients may be present in the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention. Such additional ingredients may include wetting agents, emulsifiers, antioxidants, bulking agents, tonicity modifiers, chelating agents, metal ions, oleaginous vehicles, proteins (e.g., human serum albumin, gelatine or proteins) and a zwitterion (e.g., an amino acid such as betaine, taurine, arginine, glycine, lysine and histidine). Such additional ingredients, of course, should not adversely affect the overall stability of the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions containing a growth hormone conjugate according to the present invention may be administered to a patient in need of such treatment at several sites, for example, at topical sites, for example, skin and mucosal sites, at sites which bypass absorption, for example, administration in an artery, in a vein, in the heart, and at sites which involve absorption, for example, administration in the skin, under the skin, in a muscle or in the abdomen.
  • Administration of pharmaceutical compositions according to the invention may be through several routes of administration, for example, lingual, sublingual, buccal, in the mouth, oral, in the stomach and intestine, nasal, pulmonary, for example, through the bronchioles and alveoli or a combination thereof, epidermal, dermal, transdermal, vaginal, rectal, ocular, for examples through the conjunctiva, uretal, and parenteral to patients in need of such a treatment.
  • Compositions of the current invention may be administered in several dosage forms, for example, as solutions, suspensions, emulsions, microemulsions, multiple emulsion, foams, salves, pastes, plasters, ointments, tablets, coated tablets, rinses, capsules, for example, hard gelatine capsules and soft gelatine capsules, suppositories, rectal capsules, drops, gels, sprays, powder, aerosols, inhalants, eye drops, ophthalmic ointments, ophthalmic rinses, vaginal pessaries, vaginal rings, vaginal ointments, injection solution, in situ transforming solutions, for example in situ gelling, in situ setting, in situ precipitating, in situ crystallization, infusion solution, and implants.
  • Compositions of the invention may further be compounded in, or attached to, for example through covalent, hydrophobic and electrostatic interactions, a drug carrier, drug delivery system and advanced drug delivery system in order to further enhance stability of the growth hormone conjugate, increase bioavailability, increase solubility, decrease adverse effects, achieve chronotherapy well known to those skilled in the art, and increase patient compliance or any combination thereof. Examples of carriers, drug delivery systems and advanced drug delivery systems include, but are not limited to, polymers, for example cellulose and derivatives, polysaccharides, for example dextran and derivatives, starch and derivatives, poly(vinyl alcohol), acrylate and methacrylate polymers, polylactic and polyglycolic acid and block co-polymers thereof, polyethylene glycols, carrier proteins, for example albumin, gels, for example, thermogelling systems, for example block co-polymeric systems well known to those skilled in the art, micelles, liposomes, microspheres, nanoparticulates, liquid crystals and dispersions thereof, L2 phase and dispersions there of, well known to those skilled in the art of phase behaviour in lipid-water systems, polymeric micelles, multiple emulsions, self-emulsifying, self-microemulsifying, cyclodextrins and derivatives thereof, and dendrimers.
  • Compositions of the current invention are useful in the composition of solids, semisolids, powder and solutions for pulmonary administration of growth hormone conjugate, using, for example a metered dose inhaler, dry powder inhaler and a nebulizer, all being devices well known to those skilled in the art.
  • Compositions of the current invention are specifically useful in the composition of controlled, sustained, protracting, retarded, and slow release drug delivery systems. More specifically, but not limited to, compositions are useful in composition of parenteral controlled release and sustained release systems (both systems leading to a many-fold reduction in number of administrations), well known to those skilled in the art. Even more preferably, are controlled release and sustained release systems administered subcutaneous. Without limiting the scope of the invention, examples of useful controlled release system and compositions are hydrogels, oleaginous gels, liquid crystals, polymeric micelles, microspheres, nanoparticles,
  • Methods to produce controlled release systems useful for compositions of the current invention include, but are not limited to, crystallization, condensation, co-crystallization, precipitation, co-precipitation, emulsification, dispersion, high pressure homogenisation, encapsulation, spray drying, microencapsulating, coacervation, phase separation, solvent evaporation to produce microspheres, extrusion and supercritical fluid processes. General reference is made to Handbook of Pharmaceutical Controlled Release (Wise, D. L., ed. Marcel Dekker, New York, 2000) and Drug and the Pharmaceutical Sciences vol. 99: Protein Composition and Delivery (MacNally, E. J., ed. Marcel Dekker, New York, 2000).
  • Parenteral administration may be performed by subcutaneous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal or intravenous injection by means of a syringe, optionally a pen-like syringe. Alternatively, parenteral administration can be performed by means of an infusion pump. A further option is a composition which may be a solution or suspension for the administration of the growth hormone conjugate in the form of a nasal or pulmonal spray. As a still further option, the pharmaceutical compositions containing the growth hormone conjugate of the invention can also be adapted to transdermal administration, e.g. by needle-free injection or from a patch, optionally an iontophoretic patch, or transmucosal, e.g. buccal, administration.
  • The term “stabilized composition” refers to a composition with increased physical stability, increased chemical stability or increased physical and chemical stability.
  • The term “physical stability” of the protein composition as used herein refers to the tendency of the protein to form biologically inactive and/or insoluble aggregates of the protein as a result of exposure of the protein to thermo-mechanical stresses and/or interaction with interfaces and surfaces that are destabilizing, such as hydrophobic surfaces and interfaces. Physical stability of the aqueous protein compositions is evaluated by means of visual inspection and/or turbidity measurements after exposing the composition filled in suitable containers (e.g. cartridges or vials) to mechanical/physical stress (e.g. agitation) at different temperatures for various time periods. Visual inspection of the compositions is performed in a sharp focused light with a dark background. The turbidity of the composition is characterized by a visual score ranking the degree of turbidity for instance on a scale from 0 to 3 (a composition showing no turbidity corresponds to a visual score 0, and a composition showing visual turbidity in daylight corresponds to visual score 3). A composition is classified physical unstable with respect to protein aggregation, when it shows visual turbidity in daylight. Alternatively, the turbidity of the composition can be evaluated by simple turbidity measurements well-known to the skilled person. Physical stability of the aqueous protein compositions can also be evaluated by using a spectroscopic agent or probe of the conformational status of the protein. The probe is preferably a small molecule that preferentially binds to a non-native conformer of the protein. One example of a small molecular spectroscopic probe of protein structure is Thioflavin T. Thioflavin T is a fluorescent dye that has been widely used for the detection of amyloid fibrils. In the presence of fibrils, and perhaps other protein configurations as well, Thioflavin T gives rise to a new excitation maximum at about 450 nm and enhanced emission at about 482 nm when bound to a fibril protein form. Unbound Thioflavin T is essentially non-fluorescent at the wavelengths.
  • Other small molecules can be used as probes of the changes in protein structure from native to non-native states. For instance the “hydrophobic patch” probes that bind preferentially to exposed hydrophobic patches of a protein. The hydrophobic patches are generally buried within the tertiary structure of a protein in its native state, but become exposed as a protein begins to unfold or denature. Examples of these small molecular, spectroscopic probes are aromatic, hydrophobic dyes, such as antrhacene, acridine, phenanthroline or the like. Other spectroscopic probes are metal-amino acid complexes, such as cobalt metal complexes of hydrophobic amino acids, such as phenylalanine, leucine, isoleucine, methionine, and valine, or the like.
  • The term “chemical stability” of the protein composition as used herein refers to chemical covalent changes in the protein structure leading to formation of chemical degradation products with potential less biological potency and/or potential increased immunogenic properties compared to the native protein structure. Various chemical degradation products can be formed depending on the type and nature of the native protein and the environment to which the protein is exposed. Elimination of chemical degradation can most probably not be completely avoided and increasing amounts of chemical degradation products is often seen during storage and use of the protein composition as well-known by the person skilled in the art. Most proteins are prone to deamidation, a process in which the side chain amide group in glutaminyl or asparaginyl residues is hydrolysed to form a free carboxylic acid. Other degradations pathways involves formation of high molecular weight transformation products where two or more protein molecules are covalently bound to each other through transamidation and/or disulfide interactions leading to formation of covalently bound dimer, oligomer and polymer degradation products (Stability of Protein Pharmaceuticals, Ahern. T. J. & Manning M. C., Plenum Press, New York 1992). Oxidation (of for instance methionine residues) can be mentioned as another variant of chemical degradation. The chemical stability of the protein composition can be evaluated by measuring the amount of the chemical degradation products at various time-points after exposure to different environmental conditions (the formation of degradation products can often be accelerated by for instance increasing temperature). The amount of each individual degradation product is often determined by separation of the degradation products depending on molecule size and/or charge using various chromatography techniques (e.g. SEC-HPLC and/or RP-HPLC).
  • Hence, as outlined above, a “stabilized composition” refers to a composition with increased physical stability, increased chemical stability or increased physical and chemical stability. In general, a composition must be stable during use and storage (in compliance with recommended use and storage conditions) until the expiration date is reached.
  • In one embodiment of the invention the pharmaceutical composition comprising the growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) or (II) is stable for more than 6 weeks of usage and for more than 3 years of storage.
  • In another embodiment of the invention the pharmaceutical composition comprising the growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) or (II) is stable for more than 4 weeks of usage and for more than 3 years of storage.
  • In a further embodiment of the invention the pharmaceutical composition comprising the growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) or (II) is stable for more than 4 weeks of usage and for more than two years of storage.
  • In an even further embodiment of the invention the pharmaceutical composition comprising the growth hormone conjugate of formula (I) or (II) is stable for more than 2 weeks of usage and for more than two years of storage.
  • All references, including publications, patent applications and patents, cited herein are hereby incorporated by reference to the same extent as if each reference was individually and specifically indicated to be incorporated by reference and was set forth in its entirety herein.
  • All headings and sub-headings are used herein for convenience only and should not be construed as limiting the invention in any way,
  • Any combination of the above-described elements in all possible variations thereof is encompassed by the invention unless otherwise indicated herein or otherwise clearly contradicted by context.
  • The terms “a” and “an” and “the” and similar referents as used in the context of describing the invention are to be construed to cover both the singular and the plural (i.e. one or more), unless otherwise indicated herein or clearly contradicted by context.
  • Recitation of ranges of values herein are merely intended to serve as a shorthand method of referring individually to each separate value falling within the range, unless otherwise indicated herein, and each separate value is incorporated into the specification as if it were individually recited herein. Unless otherwise stated, all exact values provided herein are representative of corresponding approximate values (e.g., all exact exemplary values provided with respect to a particular factor or measurement can be considered to also pro-vide a corresponding approximate measurement, modified by “about,” where appropriate).
  • All methods described herein can be performed in any suitable order unless otherwise indicated herein or otherwise clearly contradicted by context.
  • The use of any and all examples, or exemplary language (e.g., “such as”) provided herein, is intended merely to better illuminate the invention and does not pose a limitation on the scope of the invention unless otherwise indicated. No language in the specification should be construed as indicating any element is essential to the practice of the invention unless as much is explicitly stated.
  • The citation and incorporation of patent documents herein is done for convenience only and does not reflect any view of the validity, patentability and/or enforceability of such patent documents.
  • A non-eshausive list of embodiment describing the invention is provided here below.
    • List of Embodiments Embodiment 1
  • A growth hormone conjugate which comprises a growth hormone compound (GH) having
  • a) a single Cys mutation,
    b) an additional disulfide bridge, or
    c) a single Cys mutation and an additional disulfide bridge, wherein an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to said GH, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
    2. The conjugate of embodiment 1, wherein GH represents a growth hormone compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 80% identity to the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone (hGH) (SEQ ID NO: 1), such as at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, or at least 95% identity with hGH, or GH is hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
    3. The conjugate of embodiment 1, wherein GH or the GH conjugate has at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH.
    4. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-3 wherein the albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to a GH having a single Cys mutation.
    5. The conjugate of embodiment 4, wherein the single Cys mutation is positioned in any one of the regions selected from the N-terminal, H1, H2, L2 or H3 of GH.
    6. The conjugate of embodiment 5, wherein the GH has a single Cys mutation selected from anyone of T3C, P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C and G126C.
    7. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-3 wherein the albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to a GH having an additional disulfide bridge.
    8. The conjugate of embodiment 7, wherein the additional disulfide bond is between a loop segment and a helical segment or within loop segment or between loop segments or between helical segments.
    9. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 7-8, wherein the GH comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein at least one of the cysteines is present in a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154 (L3).
    10. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 7-9, wherein the GH comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein the additional disulfide bond which connects a loop segment with a helical segment, such as helix B or H2.
    11. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 7-10, wherein the additional disulfide bond connects L3 with H2.
    12. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 7-11, wherein the additional disulfide bridge is between at least one of the amino acid pairs in the positions corresponding to R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I138C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, Q84C/S144C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, P89C/F146C, F92C/F146C, F92C/T148C, R94C/D107C, V102C/A105C, L156C/F146C, L156C/T148C and/or V185C/S188C in hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1), such as Q84C/Y143C.
    13. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-3 wherein the albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to a GH having a single Cys mutation and an additional disulfide bridge.
    14. The conjugate of embodiment 13 wherein the GH has a single Cys mutation selected from any one of T3C, P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, Y42C, S55C, S57C, S62C, Q69C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C and G126C.
    15. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 13-14, wherein the additional disulfide bond is between a loop segment and a helical segment or within loop segment or between loop segments or between helical segments.
    16. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 13-15, wherein the GH comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein at least one of the cysteines is present in a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154 (L3).
    17. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 13-16, wherein the GH comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein the additional disulfide bond which connects a loop segment, with a helical segment, such as helix B or H2.
    18. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 13-17, wherein the additional disulfide bond connects a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154 (L3), with helix B or H2.
    19. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 13-18, wherein the additional disulfide bridge is between at least one of the amino acid pairs in the positions corresponding to R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I138C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81 C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, Q84C/S144C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, P89C/F146C, F92C/F146C, F92C/T148C, R94C/D107C, V102C/A105C, L156C/F146C, L156C/T148C and/or V185C/S188C in hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1), such as Q84C/Y143C.
    20. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-19, wherein the albumin binding residue is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00055
  • wherein * denotes the attachment to the hydrophilic spacer through a chemical group linking the albumin binding residue and the hydrophilic spacer.
  • 21. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-20, wherein the chemical group linking the albumin binding residue and the hydrophilic spacer has the formula

  • —W7—Y—,
  • wherein
      • Y is —(CH2)l7—C3-10-cycloalkyl-W8— or a valence bond,
      • l7 is 0-6,
      • W7 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s3—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s3 is 0 or 1,
      • W8 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s4—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s4 is 0 or 1.
        22. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-21 wherein the hydrophilic spacer has the formula

  • —X1—X2—X3—X4—
  • wherein
      • X1 is —W1—[(CHR1)l1—W2]m1—{[(CH2)n1E1]m2—[(CHR2)l2—W3]m3}n2—,
      • X2 is —[(CHR3)l3—W4]m4—{[(CH2)n3E2]m5—[(CHR4)l4—W5]m6}n4—,
      • X3 is —[(CHR5)l5—W6]m7—,
      • X4 is F-D1-(CH2)l6-D2-,
      • l1, l2, l3, l4, l5 and l6 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • m1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are selected from 0-10,
      • m2 and m5 independently are selected from 0-25,
      • n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • F is aryl, hetaryl, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione or a valence bond, wherein the aryl and hetaryl groups are optionally substituted with halogen, —CN, —OH, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl,
      • R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —NH—C(═NH)—NH2, C1-6-alkyl, aryl or hetaryl; wherein the alkyl, aryl and hetaryl groups optionally are substituted with halogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —CN or —OH,
      • D1, D2, E1 and E2 independently are selected from —O—, —N(R6)—, —N(C(O)R7)— or a valence bond; wherein R6 and R7 independently represent hydrogen or C1-6-alkyl,
      • W1 to W5 independently are selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s2—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s2 is 0 or 1,
      • W6 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s1—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, —NHC(O)C1-6-alkyl, —C(O)NHC1-6-alkyl or a valence bond; wherein s1 is 0 or 1 and the C1-6-alkyl group is optionally substituted with oxo, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH; wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X4.
        23. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-22, wherein X4 is a valence bond and W6 is selected from either pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to GH.
        24. The conjugate of embodiment 22 wherein the hydrophilic spacer is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00056
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00057
  • 25. A growth hormone conjugate wherein the growth hormone conjugate has the formula (I):

  • A-W—B-GH  (I)
    • Wherein
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound having a single Cys mutation,
    B represents a hydrophilic spacer linked to the sulphur residue of the Cys mutation,
    W is a chemical group linking A and B, and
    A represent an albumin binding residue; and
    pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
    26. The conjugate of embodiment 25, wherein GH represents a growth hormone compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 80% identity to the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone (hGH) (SEQ ID NO: 1), such as at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, or at least 95% identity with hGH, or GH is hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
    27. The conjugate of embodiment 25, wherein GH or the GH conjugate has at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH.
    28. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 25-27, wherein the single Cys mutation is positioned in any one of the regions selected from the N-terminal, H1, H2, L2 or H3 of GH.
    29. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 25-28 wherein the GH has a single Cys mutation selected from any one of: T3C, P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C and G126C.
    30. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 25-29, wherein A is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00058
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00059
  • wherein * denotes the attachment to B through W.
  • 31. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 25-30, wherein W has the formula

  • —W7—Y—,
  • wherein
      • Y is —(CH2)l7—C3-10-cycloalkyl-W8— or a valence bond,
      • l7 is 0-6,
      • W7 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s3—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s3 is 0 or 1,
      • W8 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s4—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s4 is 0 or 1.
        32. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 25-31 wherein B has the formula

  • —X1—X2—X3—X4—
  • wherein
      • X1 is —W1—[(CHR1)l1—W2]m1—{[(CH2)n1E1]m2—[(CHR2)l2—W3]m3}n2—,
      • X2 is —[(CHR3)l3—W4]m4—{[(CH2)n3E2]m5—[(CHR4)l4—W5]m6}n4—,
      • X3 is —[(CHR5)l5—W6]m7—,
      • X4 is F-D1-(CH2)l6-D2-,
      • l1, l2, l3, l4, l5 and l6 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • m1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are selected from 0-10,
      • m2 and m5 independently are selected from 0-25,
      • n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • F is aryl, hetaryl, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione or a valence bond, wherein the aryl and hetaryl groups are optionally substituted with halogen, —CN, —OH, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl,
      • R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —NH—C(═NH)—NH2, C1-6-alkyl, aryl or hetaryl; wherein the alkyl, aryl and hetaryl groups optionally are substituted with halogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —CN or —OH,
      • D1, D2, E1 and E2 independently are selected from —O—, —N(R6)—, —N(C(O)R7)— or a valence bond; wherein R6 and R7 independently represent hydrogen or C1-6-alkyl,
      • W1 to W5 independently are selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s2—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s2 is 0 or 1,
      • W6 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s1—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, —NHC(O)C1-6-alkyl, —C(O)NHC1-6-alkyl or a valence bond; wherein s1 is 0 or 1 and the C1-6-alkyl group is optionally substituted with oxo, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH; wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X4.
        33. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 25-32, wherein
        l1, l2, l3, l4, l5 and l6 independently are 0-6,
        m1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are 0-6,
        m2 and m5 independently are 0-10, and
        n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are 0-10.
        34. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 25-33, wherein D1 and D2 are independently selected from —O— or —N(R6)— or a valence bond.
        35. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 25-34, wherein E1 and E2 are independently selected from —O— or —N(R6)— or a valence bond.
        36. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 25-35, wherein W1 through W8 independently are selected from the group consisting of —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —NHC(O)C1-6-alkyl, —C(O)NHC1-6-alkyl or a valence bond; wherein the alkyl group is optionally substituted with oxo, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH; wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X4.
        37. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 25-36, wherein R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2 or —S(O)2OH.
        38. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 25-37, wherein —{[(CH2)n1E1]m2—[(CHR2)l2—W3]m3}n2— and —{[(CH2)n3E2]m5—[(CHR4)l4—W]m6}n4—, wherein E1 and E2 are —O—, are selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00060
  • wherein * is intended to denote a point of attachment, ie, an open bond.
  • 39. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 25-38, wherein X4 is a valence bond and W6 is selected from either pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to GH.
    40. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 25-39 wherein B is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00061
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00062
  • 41. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 25-40, wherein said compound is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00063
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00064
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00065
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00066
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00067
  • 42. A growth hormone conjugate wherein the growth hormone conjugate has the formula (I).

  • A-W—B-GH  (I)
    • Wherein
  • GH represents a growth hormone compound having an additional disulfide bridge,
    B represents a hydrophilic spacer,
    W is a chemical group linking A and B, and
    A represent an albumin binding residue; and
    pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
    43. The conjugate of embodiment 42, wherein GH represents a growth hormone compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 80% identity to the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone (hGH) (SEQ ID NO: 1), such as at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, or at least 95% identity with hGH, or GH is hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
    44. The conjugate of embodiment 42, wherein GH or the GH conjugates has at lease 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH.
    45. The conjugate of embodiment 44, wherein the activity is measured in an in viro BAF assay (assay I)
    46. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 42-45, wherein the GH comprises additional disulfide bonds between a loop segment and a helical segment or within loop segment or between loop segments or between helical segments.
    47. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 42-46, wherein the GH comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein at least one of the cysteines is present in a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154 (L3).
    48. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 42-47, wherein the GH comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein the additional disulfide bond which connects a loop segment, with a helical segment, such as helix B or helix 2.
    49. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 42-48, wherein the GH comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein the additional disulfide bond connects L3 (128-154), with helix B or helix 2.
    50. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 42-49, wherein the additional disulfide bridge is between at least one of the amino acid pairs in the positions corresponding to R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I138C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, Q84C/S144C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, P89C/F146C, F92C/F146C, F92C/T148C, R94C/D107C, V102C/A105C, L156C/F146C, L156C/T148C and/or V185C/S188C in hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1), such as Q84C/Y143C.
    51. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 42-50, wherein A is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00068
  • wherein * denotes the attachment to B through W.
    52. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 42-51, wherein W has the formula

  • —W7—Y—,
  • wherein
      • Y is —(CH2)l7—C3-10-cycloalkyl-W8— or a valence bond,
      • l7 is 0-6,
      • W7 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s3—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s3 is 0 or 1,
      • W8 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s4—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s4 is 0 or 1.
        53. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 42-52 wherein B has the formula

  • —X1—X2—X3—X4—
  • wherein
      • X1 is —W1—[(CHR1)l1—W2]m1—{[(CH2)n1E1]m2—[(CHR2)l2—W3]m3}n2—,
      • X2 is —[(CHR3)l3—W4]m4—{[(CH2)n3E2]m5—[(CHR4)l4—W5]m6}n4—,
      • X3 is —[(CHR5)l5—W6]m7—,
      • X4 is F-D1-(CH2)l6-D2-,
      • l1, l2, l3, l4, l5 and l6 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • m1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are selected from 0-10,
      • m2 and m5 independently are selected from 0-25,
      • n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • F is aryl, hetaryl, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione or a valence bond, wherein the aryl and hetaryl groups are optionally substituted with halogen, —CN, —OH, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl,
      • R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —NH—C(═NH)—NH2, C1-6-alkyl, aryl or hetaryl; wherein the alkyl, aryl and hetaryl groups optionally are substituted with halogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —CN or —OH,
      • D1, D2, E1 and E2 independently are selected from —O—, —N(R6)—, —N(C(O)R7)— or a valence bond; wherein R6 and R7 independently represent hydrogen or C1-6-alkyl,
      • W1 to W5 independently are selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s2—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s2 is 0 or 1,
      • W6 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s1—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, —NHC(O)C1-6-alkyl, —C(O)NHC1-6-alkyl or a valence bond; wherein s1 is 0 or 1 and the C1-6-alkyl group is optionally substituted with oxo, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH; wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X4.
        54. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 42-53, wherein
        l1, l2, l3, l4, l5 and l6 independently are 0-6,
        m1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are 0-6,
        m2 and m5 independently are 0-10, and
        n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are 0-10.
        55. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 42-54, wherein D1 and D2 are independently selected from —O— or —N(R6)— or a valence bond.
        56. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 42-55, wherein E1 and E2 are independently selected from —O— or —N(R6)— or a valence bond.
        57. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 42-56, wherein W1 through W8 independently are selected from the group consisting of —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —NHC(O)C1-6-alkyl or —C(O)NHC1-6-alkyl or a valence bond; wherein the alkyl group is optionally substituted with oxo, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH; wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X4.
        58. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 42-57, wherein R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2 or —S(O)2OH.
        59. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 42-58, wherein —{[(CH2)n1E1]m2—[(CHR2)l2—W3]m3}n2— and —{[(CH2)n3E2]m5—[(CHR4)l4—W]m6}n4—, wherein E1 and E2 are —O—, are selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00069
  • wherein * is intended to denote a point of attachment, ie, an open bond.
  • 60. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 42-59 wherein B is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00070
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00071
  • 61. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 42-60, wherein A via B is attached to the glutamine residue in the position corresponding to position 40, position 141 in hGH SEQ ID NO: 1, or the N-terminal residue of the growth hormone compound.
    62. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 42-61, wherein said compound is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00072
  • 63. A growth hormone conjugate wherein the growth hormone conjugate has the formula (I):

  • A-W—B-GH  (I)
  • wherein
    GH represents a growth hormone compound having a single Cys mutation and an additional disulfide bridge,
    B represents a hydrophilic spacer linked to the sulphur residue of the Cys mutation,
    W is a chemical group linking A and B, and
    A represent an albumin binding residue; and
    pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
    64. The conjugate of embodiment 63, wherein GH represents a growth hormone compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 80% identity to the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone (hGH) (SEQ ID NO: 1), such as at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, or at least 95% identity with hGH, or GH is hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1).
    65. The conjugate of embodiment 64, wherein GH or the GH conjugate has at least 80% of the growth hormone activity of hGH.
    66. The conjugate of any of the embodiments 63-65, wherein the single Cys mutation is positioned in any one of the regions selected from the N-terminal, H1, H2, L2 or H3 of GH.
    67. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 63-66 wherein the GH has a single Cys mutation selected from any one of; T3C, P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, K38C, E39C, Y42C, S43C, D47C, P48C, S55C, S57C, P59C, S62, E65C, Q69C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C, G126C, E129C, D130C, G131C, P133C, T135C, G136C, T142C, D147C, N149C, D154C, A155C, L156C, R178C, E186C, G187C and G190C, such as any one of; T3C, P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C and G126C.
    68. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 63-67, wherein the additional disulfide bond is between a loop segment and a helical segment or within loop segment or between loop segments or between helical segments.
    69. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 63-68, wherein the GH comprises an additional disulfide bond wherein at least one of the cysteines is present in a loop segment, such from amino acid residues 128-154 (L3).
    70. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 63-69, wherein the additional disulfide bond connects a loop segment, with a helical segment, such as H2.
    71. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 63-70, wherein the additional disulfide bond connects L3, with helix H2.
    72. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 63-71, wherein the additional disulfide bridge is between at least one of the amino acid pairs in the positions corresponding to R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I138C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, Q84C/S144C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, P89C/F146C, F92C/F146C, F92C/T148C, R94C/D107C, V102C/A105C, L156C/F146C, L156C/T148C and/or V185C/S188C in hGH (SEQ ID NO: 1), such as Q84C/Y143C.
    73. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 63-72, wherein A is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00073
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00074
  • wherein * denotes the attachment to B through W.
  • 74. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 63-73, wherein W has the formula

  • —W7—Y—,
  • wherein
      • Y is —(CH2)l7—C3-10-cycloalkyl-W8— or a valence bond,
      • l7 is 0-6,
      • W7 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s3—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s3 is 0 or 1,
      • W8 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s4—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s4 is 0 or 1.
        75. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 63-74 wherein B has the formula

  • —X1—X2—X3—X4—
  • wherein
      • X1 is —W1—[(CHR1)l1—W2]m1—{[(CH2)n1E1]m2—[(CHR2)l2—W3]m3}n2—,
      • X2 is —[(CHR3)l3—W4]m4—{[(CH2)n3E2]m5—[(CHR4)l4—W5]m6}n4—,
      • X3 is —[(CHR5)l5—W6]m7—,
      • X4 is F-D1-(CH2)l6-D2-,
      • l1, l2, l3, l4, l5 and l6 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • m1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are selected from 0-10,
      • m2 and m5 independently are selected from 0-25,
      • n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • F is aryl, hetaryl, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione or a valence bond, wherein the aryl and hetaryl groups are optionally substituted with halogen, —CN, —OH, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl,
      • R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —NH—C(═NH)—NH2, C1-6-alkyl, aryl or hetaryl; wherein the alkyl, aryl and hetaryl groups optionally are substituted with halogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —CN or —OH,
      • D1, D2, E1 and E2 independently are selected from —O—, —N(R6)—, —N(C(O)R7)— or a valence bond; wherein R6 and R7 independently represent hydrogen or C1-6-alkyl,
      • W1 to W5 independently are selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s2—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s2 is 0 or 1,
      • W6 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s1—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, —NHC(O)C1-6-alkyl, —C(O)NHC1-6-alkyl or a valence bond; wherein s1 is 0 or 1 and the C1-6-alkyl group is optionally substituted with oxo, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH; wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X4.
        76. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 63-75, wherein
        l1, l2, l3, l4, l5 and l6 independently are 0-6,
        m1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are 0-6,
        m2 and m5 independently are 0-10, and
        n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are 0-10.
        77. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 63-75, wherein D1 and D2 are independently selected from —O— or —N(R6)— or a valence bond.
        78. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 63-77, wherein E1 and E2 are independently selected from —O— or —N(R6)— or a valence bond.
        79. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 63-78, wherein W1 through W8 independently are selected from the group consisting of —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —NHC(O)C1-6-alkyl or —C(O)NHC1-6-alkyl or a valence bond; wherein the alkyl group is optionally substituted with oxo, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH; wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X4.
        80. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 63-79, wherein R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2 or —S(O)2OH.
        81. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 63-80, wherein —{[(CH2)n1E1]m2—[(CHR2)l2—W3]m3}n2— and —{[(CH2)n3E2]m5—[(CHR4)l4—W]m6}n4—, wherein E1 and E2 are —O—, are selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00075
  • wherein * is intended to denote a point of attachment, ie, an open bond.
  • 82. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 63-81, wherein X4 is a valence bond and W6 is selected from either pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to GH.
    83. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 63-82 wherein B is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00076
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00077
  • 84. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-83, wherein one albumin binding residue (A) via a hydrophilic spacer (B) is linked to said GH.
    85. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 63-84, wherein said compound is selected from
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00078
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00079
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00080
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00081
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00082
  • 86. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-85 wherein the hydrophilic spacer has m Log P<0.
    87. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-86, wherein the molar weight of said hydrophilic spacer is in the range from 80 D to 1500 D or in the range from 300 D to 1100 D.
    88. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-87, wherein said albumin binding residue is a lipophilic residue.
    89. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-88, wherein said albumin binding residue binds non-covalently to albumin.
    90. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-89, wherein said albumin binding residue is negatively charged at physiological pH.
    91. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-90, wherein said albumin binding residue has a binding affinity towards human serum albumin that is below about 10 μM or below about 1 μM.
    92. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-91, wherein said albumin binding residue is selected from a straight chain alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, a group which has an ω-carboxylic acid group or an ω-carboxylic acid isoster.
    93. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-92, wherein said albumin binding residue has from 6 to 40 carbon atoms, from 8 to 26 carbon atoms or from 8 to 20 carbon atoms.
    94. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-93, wherein said albumin binding residue is a peptide, such as a peptide comprising less than 40 amino acid residues.
    95. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-94, wherein two albumin binding residues (A) via a hydrophilic spacer (B) is linked to said GH.
    96. The conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-95 for use in therapy.
    97. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-95, optionally in combination with a pharmaceutical acceptable excipient.
    98. A pharmaceutical composition of embodiment 97, wherein said composition can be administered through lingual, sublingual, buccal, in the mouth, oral, in the stomach and intestine, nasal, pulmonary, epidermal, dermal, transdermal, and parenteral to patients.
    99. A method of treating growth hormone deficiency (GHD), the method comprising administrating to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a therapeutivcally effective amount of a conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-95.
    100. A method of treating Turner Syndrome; Prader-Willi syndrome (PWS); Noonan syndrome; Down syndrome; chronic renal disease, juvenile rheumatoid arthritis; cystic fibrosis, HIV-infection in children receiving HAART treatment (HIV/HALS children); short children born short for gestational age (SGA); short stature in children born with very low birth weight (VLBW) but SGA; skeletal dysplasia; hypochondroplasia; achondroplasia; idiopathic short stature (ISS); GHD in adults; fractures in or of long bones, such as tibia, fibula, femur, humerus, radius, ulna, clavicula, matacarpea, matatarsea, and digit; fractures in or of spongious bones, such as the scull, base of hand, and base of food; patients after tendon or ligament surgery in e.g. hand, knee, or shoulder; patients having or going through distraction oteogenesis; patients after hip or discus replacement, meniscus repair, spinal fusions or prosthesis fixation, such as in the knee, hip, shoulder, elbow, wrist or jaw; patients into which osteosynthesis material, such as nails, screws and plates, have been fixed; patients with non-union or mal-union of fractures; patients after osteatomia, e.g. from tibia or 1st toe; patients after graft implantation; articular cartilage degeneration in knee caused by trauma or arthritis; osteoporosis in patients with Turner syndrome; osteoporosis in men; adult patients in chronic dialysis (APCD); malnutritional associated cardiovascular disease in APCD; reversal of cachexia in APCD; cancer in APCD; chronic abstractive pulmonal disease in APCD; HIV in APCD; elderly with APCD; chronic liver disease in APCD, fatigue syndrome in APCD; Crohn's disease; impaired liver function; males with HIV infections; short bowel syndrome; central obesity; HIV-associated lipodystrophy syndrome (HALS); male infertility; patients after major elective surgery, alcohol/drug detoxification or neurological trauma; aging; frail elderly; osteo-arthritis; traumatically damaged cartilage; erectile dysfunction; fibromyalgia; memory disorders; depression; traumatic brain injury; subarachnoid haemorrhage; very low birth weight; metabolic syndrome; glucocorticoid myopathy; short stature due to glucucorticoid treatment in children, the acceleration of the healing of muscle tissue, nervous tissue or wounds; the acceleration or improvement of blood flow to damaged tissue; or the decrease of infection rate in damaged tissue, the method comprising administrating to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a therapeutivcally effective amount of a conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-95.
    101. The use of a conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-95 in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of growth hormone deficiency (GHD).
    102. The use of a conjugate of any one of embodiments 1-95 in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of Turner Syndrome; Prader-Willi syndrome (PWS); Noonan syndrome; Down syndrome; chronic renal disease, juvenile rheumatoid arthritis; cystic fibrosis, HIV-infection in children receiving HAART treatment (HIV/HALS children); short children born short for gestational age (SGA); short stature in children born with very low birth weight (VLBW) but SGA; skeletal dysplasia; hypochondroplasia; achondroplasia; idiopathic short stature (ISS); GHD in adults; fractures in or of long bones, such as tibia, fibula, femur, humerus, radius, ulna, clavicula, matacarpea, matatarsea, and digit; fractures in or of spongious bones, such as the scull, base of hand, and base of food; patients after tendon or ligament surgery in, e.g., hand, knee, or shoulder; patients having or going through distraction oteogenesis; patients after hip or discus replacement, meniscus repair, spinal fusions or prosthesis fixation, such as in the knee, hip, shoulder, elbow, wrist or jaw; patients into which osteosynthesis material, such as nails, screws and plates, have been fixed; patients with non-union or mal-union of fractures; patients after osteatomia, e.g., from tibia or 1st toe; patients after graft implantation; articular cartilage degeneration in knee caused by trauma or arthritis; osteoporosis in patients with Turner syndrome; osteoporosis in men; adult patients in chronic dialysis (APCD); malnutritional associated cardiovascular disease in APCD; reversal of cachexia in APCD; cancer in APCD; chronic abstractive pulmonal disease in APCD; HIV in APCD; elderly with APCD; chronic liver disease in APCD, fatigue syndrome in APCD; Crohn's disease; impaired liver function; males with HIV infections; short bowel syndrome; central obesity; HIV-associated lipodystrophy syndrome (HALS); male infertility; patients after major elective surgery, alcohol/drug detoxification or neurological trauma; aging; frail elderly; osteo-arthritis; traumatically damaged cartilage; erectile dysfunction; fibromyalgia; memory disorders; depression; traumatic brain injury; subarachnoid haemorrhage; very low birth weight; metabolic syndrome; glucocorticoid myopathy; short stature due to glucucorticoid treatment in children, the acceleration of the healing of muscle tissue, nervous tissue or wounds; the acceleration or improvement of blood flow to damaged tissue; or the decrease of infection rate in damaged tissue.
    103. A compound of formula (III)

  • A-W—B1-U  (III)
  • wherein A represent an albumin binding residue,
    B1 represents a hydrophilic spacer,
    W is a chemical group linking A and B1, and U represent a conjugating moiety.
    104. The compound according to embodiment 103, wherein A and W are as defined in any of the above embodiments.
    105. The compound according to embodiment 103 or embodiment 104, wherein U comprises or consists of an aryl, an heteraryl, a substituted malimide or a pyrrolidine-2,5-dione such as —NHC(O)CH2CH2-pyrrolidin-2.5-dione.
    106. The compound according to embodiment 103 or embodiment 104, wherein U comprises D1-(CH2)l6-D2, wherein D1 and D2 are independently selected from —O—, —N(R6)-, —NC(O)R7- or a valence bond; wherein R6 and R7 independently represent hydrogen or C1-6-alkyl.
    107. The compound according to embodiment 103 or embodiment 104, wherein U comprises or consists of a leaving group, such as Cl, Br, I, —OH, —OS(O)2Me, —OS(O)2CF3, —Ots.
    108. The compound according to embodiments 107, wherein the leaving group is a halogen compound selected from Cl, Br and I, preferably Br.
    109. The compound according to embodiment 103 or embodiment 104, wherein U comprises or consists of an allyl amine (H2C═CH—CH2—NH2), such as —C(O)NHCH2—CH═CH2.
    110. The compound according to embodiment 103 or embodiment 104, wherein U comprises or consists of an amine, such as —NH2.
    111. The compound according to any of the embodiments 103-110, wherein the therapeutic compound is a polypeptide.
    112. The compound according to any of the embodiments 103-110, wherein the therapeutic compound is a polypeptide with a single free cystine.
    113. The compound according to embodiment 103 or embodiment 104, wherein U comprises or consists of an aldehyde, such as —CHO.
    114. The compound according to any of the embodiment 103-113, wherein the hydrophilic spacer B1 has the formula

  • —X1—X2—X3—X4—
  • wherein
      • X1 is —W1—[(CHR1)l1—W2]m1—{[(CH2)n1E1]m2—[(CHR2)l2—W3]m3}n2—,
      • X2 is —[(CHR3)l3—W4]m4—{[(CH2)n3E2]m5—[(CHR4)l4—W5]m6}n4—,
      • X3 is —[(CHR5)l5]m7—,
      • X4 is a valence bond,
      • l1, l2, l3, l4, and l5 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • m1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are selected from 0-10,
      • m2 and m5 independently are selected from 0-25,
      • n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are selected from 0-16,
      • R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —NH—C(═NH)—NH2, C1-6-alkyl, aryl or hetaryl; wherein the alkyl, aryl and hetaryl groups optionally are substituted with halogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —CN or —OH, E1 and E2 independently are selected from —O—, —N(R6)—, —N(C(O)R7)— or a valence bond; wherein R6 and R7 independently represent hydrogen or C1-6-alkyl,
      • W1 to W5 independently are selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s2—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s2 is 0 or 1.
  • The description herein of any aspect or embodiment of the invention using terms such as “comprising”, “having”, “including” or “containing” with reference to an element or elements is intended to provide support for a similar aspect or embodiment of the invention that “consists of”, “consists essentially of”, or “substantially comprises” that particular element or elements, unless otherwise stated or clearly contradicted by context (e.g., a composition described herein as comprising a particular element should be understood as also describing a composition consisting of that element, unless otherwise stated or clearly contradicted by context).
  • This invention includes all modifications and equivalents of the subject matter recited in the aspects or claims presented herein to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law.
  • The present invention is further illustrated by the following examples which, however, are not to be construed as limiting the scope of protection. The features disclosed in the foregoing description and in the following examples may, both separately and in any combination thereof, be material for realising the invention in diverse forms thereof.
    • EXAMPLES Abbreviations
  • amu=atomic mass units
    CV=column volumes
    hr(s)=hour(s)
    Hz=hertz
    L=liter(s)
    M=molar
    mbar=millibar
    mg=milligram(s)
    min.=minute(s)
    mL=milliliter(s)
    mM=millimolar
    mm=milimeter(s)
    mmol=millimole(s)
    nmol=nanomole(s)
    mol=mole(s)
    μL=microliters
    N=normal
    nm=nanometer(s)
    sec=second(s)
    ppm=parts per million
    ESI=electrospray ionization
    i.v.=intravenous
    m/z=mass to charge ratio
    MS=mass spectrometry
    HPLC=high pressure liquid chromatography
    RP=reverse phase
    HPLC-MS=high pressure liquid chromatography-mass spectrometry
    NMR═nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy
    p.o.=per oral
    rt or RT=room temperature
    s.c.=subcutaneous
    tr=retention time
    Boc=tert butyloxycarbonyl
    O-t-Bu=tert butyl ester
    t-Bu=tert butyl
    Boc-4-ABZ-OH=4-tert-Butoxycarbonylamino-benzoic acid
    DCM=dichloromethane, CH2Cl2, methylenechloride
    DIC=diisopropylcarbdiimide
    • DIPEA=N,N-diisopropylethylamine DMF=N,N-dimethylformamide
  • DMSO=dimethylsulfoxide
    DTT=dithiothreitol
    EDAC=1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide hydrochloride
    Et2O=diethyl ether
    EtOAc=ethyl acetate
    Fmoc=9H-fluoren-9-ylmethoxycarbonyl
    Fmoc-Glu-O-t-Bu=N-Fmoc-glutamic acid-1-t-butyl ester
    Fmoc-Lys(Mtt)-OH═(S)-6-[(Diphenyl-p-tolyl-methyl)-amino]-2-(9H-fluoren-9-ylmethoxycarbonylamino)-hexanoic
    acid
    Fmoc-OEG-OH=(2[2-(Fmoc-amino)ethoxy]ethoxy)acetic acid
    • OEG=(2[2-(amino)ethoxy]ethoxy)acetyl
  • Fmoc-Thx-OH═N-Fmoc-trans-4-aminomethylcyclohexancarboxylic acid
    H2O=water
    HOBt=1-hydroxybenzotriazole
    MeCN=acetonitrile
    MeOH=methanol
    MTP=3-methyl-thio-1-propanol
    NaCl=sodium chloride
    NaOH=sodium hydroxide
    • NMP=N-methylpyrrolidin-2-one
  • OEG=(2[2-(amino)ethoxy]ethoxy)acetic acid
    TFA=trifuloroacetic acid
    THF=tetrahydrofuran
    TIS=triisopropylsilane
    CDCl3=deuterio chloroform
    CD3OD=tetradeuterio methanol
    DMSO-d6=hexadeuterio dimethylsulfoxide
    TNBS=trinitrobenzensulfonic acid
    TSTU=O—(N-Succinimidyl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyl uranium tetrafluoroborate
  • The examples also make use of the following general methods:
    • General Method for Preparing a hGH Compounds.
  • The gene coding for the growth hormone compound was inserted recombinantly into a plasmid vector. A suitable E. coli strain was subsequently transformed using the plasmid vector. hGH or GH variants may be expressed with an N-terminal methionine or as a MEAE fusion from which the MEAE sequence is subsequently cleaved off.
  • Cell stock was prepared in 25% glycerol and stored at −80° C. Glycerol stock strain was inoculated into LB plates and subsequently incubated at 37° C. overnight. The content of each plate was washed with LB medium and diluted into 500 mL LB medium for expression. The cultures were incubated at 37° C. with shaking at 220 rpm until OD600 0.6 was reached. Succeeding induction was performed using 0.2 mM IPTG at 25° C. for 6 hours. Cells were finally harvested by centrifugation.
  • Cells were subsequently suspended in 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH=9.0 containing 0.05% Tween 20, 2.5 mM EDTA, 10 mM cysteamine and 4M urea, and disrupted using a cell disrupter at 30 kPSI. The supernatant was collected by centrifugation and subsequently subjected to chromatographic purification.
  • The purification was performed using ion-exchange chromatography and hydrophibic interaction, followed by removal of the peptide tag using human dipeptidyl peptidase I (hDPPI) expressed from CHO cell. Final purification was achieved by isoprecipitation and ion-exchange chromatography. The purification could also be achieved by using but not limited to ion-exchange chromatography, hydrophobic interaction chromatography, affinity chromatography, size exclusion chromatography and membrane based separation techniques known to a person skilled in the art.
    • Protein Chemical Characterization of Purified Growth Hormone Compounds.
  • The intact purified protein was analysed using MALDI-MS. The observed mass corresponded to the theoretical mass deduced from the amino acid sequence. The expected linkage disulfide bonds may be demonstrated by peptide mapping using trypsin and AspN digestion followed by MALDI-MS analysis of the digest before and after reduction of the disulfide bonds with DTT.
    • Assay for Measuring Rate of Protease Degradation of GH and hGH Compound Conjugates
  • The compound of interest is digested by a relevant protease (Trypsin, Chymotrypsin, Pepsin, Elastase, Factor VIIa, Factor Xa, Proteinase K, Carboxy peptidase, DPPIV, Neutral Endopeptidase, Granzyme B, Proline-endopeptidase, Staphylococcal peptidase I, Thermolysin, Thrombin, Arg-C proteinase, Asp-N endopeptidase, Caspase 1-10, Clostripain, Enterokinase, Glutamyl endopeptidase, Granzyme B, LysC, LysN, Proline-endopeptidase and Staphylococcal peptidase I or tissue extracts.) in an appropriate buffer (e.g. PBS or ammonium bicarbonate) at 37° C. for up till 24 hrs. Proteolytic degradation is assessed by a HPLC assay.
    • Proteolytic Digestion:
  • 100 μL of test compound solution at 1 mg/mL in ammonium bicarbonate buffer is degraded by enzyme for up till 24 hrs at 37° C. Sub-samples are taken to various time points and the proteolytic reaction is stopped by acidifying the sample by 10 times dilution into 1% TFA. These diluted samples are analysed by reversed phase HPLC to estimate the degree of proteolytic digestion.
    • HPLC Method:
  • 10 μL of the above solution is injected on a reversed phase Vydac C4 2×150 mm column eluted with a linear gradient from 0.1% TFA in water to 100% acetonitrile containing 0.1% TFA over a period of 30 min at a flow rate of 0.2 ml/min. Detection of peaks is performed at 214 nm UV absorption. Percentage (%) intact compound at time point t=T is calculated from the peak area at time point t=T (AT) and the peak area at t=0 (A0) as (AT/A0)×100%. Percentage (%) intact compound is plotted against time using GraphPad Prims software ver. 5.01. Half life (T1/2) is calculated as one phase decay also by GraphPad Prism software. Examples of enzymes that may be used are elastase (Sigma from porcine pancrease) and chymotrypsin (Roche sequencing grade). Example of buffer is 50 mM ammonium bicarbonate, pH=8.5.
    • Capillary Electrophoresis:
  • Capillary electrophoresis was carried out using an Agilent Technologies 3DCE system (Agilent Technologies). Data acquisition and signal processing were performed using Agilent Technologies 3DCE ChemStation. The capillary was a 64.5 cm (56.0 cm efficient length) 50 μm i.d. “Extended Light Path Capillary” from Agilent. UV detection was performed at 200 nm (16 nm Bw, Reference 380 nm and 50 nm Bw). The running electrolyte was phosphate buffer 50 mM pH 7 (method A). The capillary was conditioned with 0.1M NaOH for 3 min, then with Milli-Q water for 2 min and with the electrolyte for 3 min. After each run, the capillary was flushed with milli-Q water for 2 min, then with phosphoric acid for 2 min, and with milli-Q water for 2 min. The hydrodynamic injection was done at 50 mbar for 4.0 sec. The voltage was +25 kV. The capillary temperature was 30° C. and the runtime was 10.5 min.
    • Maldi-Tof Mass Spectrometry:
  • Molecular weights were determined using the Autoflex Maldi-Tof instrument (Bruker). Samples were prepared using alfa-cyano-4-hydroxy-cinnamic acid as matrix.
    • RP-HPLC:
  • RP-HPLC analysis was performed on a Agilent 1100 system using a Vydac 218TP54 4.6 mm×250 mm 5 μm C-18 silica column (The Separations Group, Hesperia). Detection was by UV at 214 nm, 254 nm, 280 nm and 301 nm. The column was equilibrated with 0.1% trifluoracetic acid/H2O and the sample was eluted by a suitable gradient of 0 to 90% acetonitrile against 0.1% trifluoracetic acid/H2O.
    • LC-MS:
  • LC-MS analysis was performed on a PE-Sciex API 100 or 150 mass spectrometer equipped with two Perkin Elmer Series 200 Micropumps, a Perkin Elmer Series 200 autosampler, an Applied Biosystems 785A UV detector and a Sedex 75 Evaporative Light scattering detector. A Waters Xterra 3.0 mm×50 mm 5μ C-18 silica column was eluted at 1.5 ml/min at room temperature. It was equilibrated with 5% MeCN/0.1% TFA/H2O and eluted for 1.0 min with 5% MeCN/0.1% TFA/H2O and then with a linear gradient to 90% MeCN/0.1% TFA/H2O over 7 min. Detection was by UV detection at 214 nm and Evaporative light Scattering. A fraction of the column eluate was introduced into the ionspray interface of a PE-Sciex API 100 mass spectrometer. The mass range 300-2000 amu was scanned every 2 seconds during the run.
    • Quantification of Protein:
  • Protein concentrations were estimated by measuring absorbance at 280 nm using a NanoDrop ND-1000 UV-spectrofotometer.
    • Enzymatic Peptide Mapping for Determination of Site(s) of Derivatization:
  • Peptide mapping was performed using Asp-N digestion of the reduced and alkylated protein. First the protein was treated with DTT and iodoacetamide according to standard procedures. The alkylated product was purified using HPLC. Subsequently the alkylated purified product was digested overnight with endoprotease Asp-N(Boehringer) at an enzyme:substrate ratio of 1:100. The digest was HPLC separated using a C-18 column and standard TFA/MeCN buffer system. The resulting peptide map was compared to that of underivatized hGH and fractions with different retention times were collected and further analyzed using Maldi-tof mass spectrometry.
    • Sds Page:
  • SDS poly-acrylamide gel electrophoresis was performed using NuPAGE 4%-12% Bis-Tris gels (Invitrogen NP0321BOX). The gels were silver stained (Invitrogen LC6100) or Coomassie stained (Invitrogen LC6065) and where relevant also stained for PEG with barium iodide as described by M. M. Kurfurst in Anal. Biochem. 200(2), 244-248, (1992).
    • Protein Chromatography:
  • Protein chromatography was performed on an Akta Explorer chromatographic system and columns from GE Health Care. Anion exchange was done using a Q-Sepharose HP 26/10 column. Starting buffer was 20 mM triethanolamine buffer pH 8.5 and eluting buffer was starting buffer+0.2 M NaCl. The compounds were typically eluted with a gradient of 0-75% eluting buffer over 15 column volumes. De-salting and buffer exchange was performed using a HiPrep 26/10 column.
    • TNBS Test
  • A solution of 10% DIPEA in DMF (solution 1) and a solution of 1 M aqueous TNBS (solution 2) was prepared. A few resin beads were placed in a small test tube and 1-3 drops of each solution (1 and 2) were added. After a short mixing the mixture was left at room temperature for 10 min. and the beads inspected. Intensely orange or red beads indicate positive results (i.e presence of free amines); yellow or slightly orange beads indicate slightly positive and colorless beads are negative.
    • Log P Calculation
  • Log P values can be calculated as m Log P and/or c Log P for the albumin binder part and/or the hydrophilic spacer part using published algorithms (J. Am. Chem. Soc., 86, 5175-5180, (1964) “A New Substituent Constant, v, Derived from Partition Coefficients”, C. A. Lipinski et al. Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews, 23, 3-25 (1997), “Experimental and Computational Approaches to Estimate Solubility and Permeability in Drug Discovery and Development Settings” and I. Moriguchi, S. Hirono, I. Nakagome, H. Hirano, Chem. and Pharm. Bull., 42, 976-978, (1994) “Comparison of Reliability of log P Values for Drugs Calculated by Several Methods”. Herein clog P—Pomona College log P (octanol/water partition coefficient) is calculated with Sybyl 7.0 from Tripos (http://www.tripos.com) version 4.2 of the clog P algorithm and version 22 of its associated fragment database as provided by BioByte Corp (http://www.biobyte.com/).
    • Preparation of Albumin Binders Example 1 4-(1H-Tetrazol-16-yl-hexadecanoylsulfamoyl)butanoyl-OEG-yGlu-yGlu-OEG-N6(C(O)CH2Br)Lys-OH (I)
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00083
  • The compound (I) was synthesised on solid support according to scheme 1, in 1 mM scale using standard Fmoc-peptide chemistry on an ABI433 synthetizer. Peptide was assembled on a Fmoc-Lys(MTT)-Wang resin using Fmoc-OEG-OH and Fmoc-Glu-OtBu protected amino acids. 4-(16-1H-Tetrazol-5-yl-hexadecanoylsulfamoyl)butyric acid was manual coupled using DIC/NHS in DCM/NMP, 2 eq. over night, TNBS test showed the reaction to be completed. The resin was then treated with 50 mL DCM/TFA/TIS/water (94:2:2:2) in a flowthrough arrangement until the yellow colour disappeared, ˜20 min. followed by washing and neutralizing with DIPEA/DMF. Bromo acetic acid (4 mM) in DCM/NMP (1:1) was activated with a 1 mM mixture of NHS and DIC, filtered and added to the resin with addition of further 1 mM of DIPEA. After 1 hr the reaction was completed. The resin was treated with 80 mL TFA/TIS/water (95:2.5:2.5) for 1 hr. Evaporated with a stream of N2, precipitated by addition of Et2O and washed with Et2O and dried. Crude product was purified on preparative HPLC (2 runs), with a gradient from 30-80% 0.1 TFA/MeCN against 0.1% TFA in water. Fractions were collected and lyophilized with ˜50% MeCN affording compound (I).
  • TOF-MS: mass 1272.52 (M+1)
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00084
    • Example 2
  • In a similar way as described in Example 1 above the following compound was prepared using Fmoc-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Wang Resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00085
  • TOF-MS: mass 536.52 (M+1)
    • Example 3
  • In a similar way as described in Example 1 above the following compound was prepared using Fmoc-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Wang Resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00086
  • TOF-MS: mass 810.80 (M+1)
    • Example 4
  • In a similar way as described in Example 1 above the following compound was prepared using Fmoc-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Wang Resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00087
  • TOF-MS: mass 844.84 (M+1)
    • Example 5
  • In a similar way as described in Example 1 above the following compound was prepared using Fmoc-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Wang Resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00088
  • TOF-MS: mass 1151.27 (M+1)
    • Example 6
  • In a similar way as described in Example 1 above the following compound was prepared using Fmoc-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Wang Resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00089
  • TOF-MS: mass 1272.30 (M+1)
    • Example 7
  • In a similar way as described in Example 1 above the following compound was prepared using Fmoc-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Wang Resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00090
  • TOF-MS: mass 984.01 (M+1)
    • Example 8
  • In a similar way as described in Example 1 above the following compound was prepared using Fmoc-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Wang Resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00091
  • TOF-MS: mass 882.95 (M+1)
    • Example 9
  • In a similar way as described in Example 1 above the following compound was prepared using Fmoc-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Wang Resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00092
  • TOF-MS: mass 782.74 (M+1)
    • Example 10
  • In a similar way as described in Example 1 above the following compound was prepared using Fmoc-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Wang Resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00093
  • TOF-MS: mass 1127.14 (M+1)
    • Example 11
  • In a similar way as described in Example 1 above the following compound was prepared using Fmoc-Lys(Mtt)-OH, iodoacetic acid and Wang Resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00094
  • TOF-MS: mass 1174.14 (M+1)
    • Example 12
  • In a similar way as described in Example 1 above the following compound was prepared using Fmoc-Lys(Mtt)-OH, chloroacetic acid and Wang Resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00095
  • TOF-MS: mass 1061.89 (M+1)
    • Example 13 (19-carboxynonadecanoyl)-Thx-γGlu-Glu-N-{3-[2-(2-{3-[3-malimidopropionylamino]propoxy}ethoxy)ethoxy]propyl} amide (II)
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00096
  • 2-Chlorotrityl resin (2.0 g, 2.6 mmol) was svelled in DCM for 0.5 hr. A solution of 4,7,10-trioxa-1,13-diamine in DCM (30 mL) was added. Resin was stirred at rt for 1 hr. The resin was washed once with DCM, then added a solution of DIPEA:MeOH:DCM (15 mL:15 mL:20 mL). The resin was shaken for 0.5 hr, then washed trice with DCM. Fmoc-Glu(OtBu)OH, Fmoc-Glu-OtBu and FmocThexOH were then coupled sequentially by standard peptide chemistry as follows: A 0.5 M solution each of Fmoc-AA-OH/DIC/HOBt in NMP (11.7 mL) was mixed and after 2 min. added to the resin. The resin was shaken for 45 min. at rt. and then washed with 5×NMP and 5×DCM. A solution of Ac2O/DIPEA/NMP (1:1:5) was added and the resin was stirred at rt for 10 min. The resin was washed (5×NMP and 5×DCM). The resin was then treated with 30% piperidin in NMP for 2×10 min. and finally washed with 5×NMP and 5×DCM. The peptide was then added a 0.25 M solution of eicosanediacid (6 eq) containing 0.125 M HOAt (3 eq), 0.125 M DIC (3 eq) and 0.125 M lutidine (3 eq). The resin was shaken at rt for 2 hrs following by washing with 5×NMP and 8×DCM. Product was cleaved from the resin using 10% TFA-DCM for 20 min. The resin was filtratered off and treated one more time with 10% TFA-DCM for an additional 20 min. The combined filtrates were collected, and evaporated to dryness.
  • The dry product from above was dissolved in DMF (6 mL), and added TSTU-activated 3 maleimidopropionic acid (premade by reacting TSTU with was 3 maleimidopropionic acid in DMF (2 mL) for 45 min.) and DIPEA (200 μL). The mixture was stirred at rt. for 1 hr. The reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness and the residue dissolved in 95% TFA-MilliQ water and stirred at rt. for 20 min. The mixture was evaporated to dryness. To the residue was added a minimum of water to precipitate solid. The precipitate was filtered off and recrystallized from MeCN. The crystals were collected and washed extensively with Et2O affording compound (II) as a white solid.
  • TOF-MS: mass 1094.39 (M+1).
    • Example 14
  • In a similar way as described in Example 1 above and depicted in scheme 2 below the following compound was prepared using Boc-Gly-PAM resin as starting material and mono-tert-butyl-eicosanoic acid, 4-Boc-aminobenzoic acid, Fmoc-Thx-OH, Fmoc-OEG-OH, Fmoc-Glu(O-t-Bu)-OH, Fmoc-Glu(OH)-t-Bu protected amino acids. After mild deprotection, peptide product was cleaved from the resin using 2,2-dimethoxyethylamine followed by deacetalisation using TFA which afforded albumin binder (IV).
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00097
  • TOF-MS: mass 1128.38 (M+1)
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00098
    • Example 15
  • In a similar way as described in Example 14 above the following compound was prepared using Boc-Gly-PAM resin as starting material and mono-tert-butyl-eicosanoic acid, 4-Boc-aminobenzoic acid, Fmoc-Thx-OH, Fmoc-OEG-OH, Fmoc-Glu(O-t-Bu)-OH, Fmoc-Glu(OH)-t-Bu protected amino acids. After mild deprotection, peptide product was cleaved from the resin using 2,2-dimethoxyethylamine followed by deacetalisation using TFA which afforded albumin binder (V).
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00099
  • TOF-MS: Rt=15.2 min, mass=967.11 (M+1)
    • Example 16
  • In a similar way as described in Example 14 above compound (VI) was prepared using Fmoc-Lys(Mtt)-Wang resin as starting material and mono-tert-butyl-octadecanedioic acid, Boc-Ser(t-Bu)-OH, Fmoc-OEG-OH, Fmoc-Glu(O-t-Bu)-OH, and oxidised Fmoc-Cys-OH protected amino acids. The peptide product was cleaved from the resin using 2.5% TIS, 2.5% H2O in THF for 3 hrs and purified by prep-HPLC:
  • Column: 2 cm C18
  • Eluent A: 0.1% TFA i Milli-Q water
  • Eluent B: 0.1% TFA i MeCN
  • Start % B: 40%
  • End % B: 75%
  • Gradient: 5 min. with 10% MeCN, 5-10 min. up to start % B over 51 min., 5 min. with end % B+10% MeCN approx. 1 hr
  • Fractions were analysed by LC-MS-TOF.
  • Desired fractions were collected, pooled and lyophilised affording compound (VI)
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00100
  • TOF-MS: Rt=6.3 min, mass=955.1 (M+1)
    • Oxidation of (VI): MTP-Solution:
  • 3-Methyl-thio-1-propanol (290 mg) dissolved in 4 mL 25 mM HEPES, pH=7.00
    • Periodate-Solution:
  • 96 mg NaIO4 dissolved in 2 mL Milli-Q water
  • To a solution of compound (VI) in Milli-Q water (1 mL) was added MTP-solution (3.6 mL)+periodate-solution (560 μL) and the pH was adjusted to 9.5 with one drop of 1N NaOH. The reaction flask was covered with tin-foil and stirred for 1 hr at RT. An additional portion of periodate-solution (560 μL) was added and the reaction mixture was left for 4.5 hours at ambient temperature. The resulting mixture was run through two NAP columns, to get rid of the NaIO4. The columns were prewashed with 25 mM HEPES (5×2.5 mL) pH=7.0. Sample (2.5 mL) applicated on each column and eluated with 3.5 mL 25 mM HEPES, pH=7.00. 2×3.5 mL were pooled in total—10.5 mL containing keto-aldehyde (VII) which were used directly for conjugation with an GH analogue.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00101
  • TOF-MS: mass=924.08 (M+1)
    • Example 17 4-(1H-Tetrazol-16-yl-hexadecanoylsufamoyl)butanoyl-OEG-γGlu-γGlu-OEG-Nε(4-aminobenzoyl)Lys-NH2 (VIII)
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00102
  • The compound (VIII) was synthesised on solid support according to scheme 3. Fmoc protected Rink-Amide-Resin (2.2 g, 0.6 mMol/g) was weighed into a flask. The resin was swelled with NMP (3×30 mL) for 2 hrs. The resin was shaken with 25% piperidine in NMP (30 mL) for 10 min. The resin was drained and treated with 25% piperidine in NMP (30 mL) for 1 hr followed by draining and wash with NMP (6×30 mL). Fmoc-Lys(Mtt)-OH and HOBt were weighed into a flask, dissolved in bromo phenol blue in NMP (30 mL, 0.5 mM). This solution was added to the drained resin above followed by addition of DIC. The reaction was shaken at ambient temperature for 21 hrs. The resin was drained and washed with NMP (6×30 mL) followed by washing with DCM (3×30 mL). The resin was treated with hexafluorisopropanol (20 mL) for 10 min. Shaken for 10 min. The resin was drained and washed with DCM (3×30 mL). The resin was treated with hexafluorisopropanol (20 mL) for 10 min again and shaken for 10 min. The resin was drained and washed with DCM (3×30 mL) followed by drained and washed with NMP (3×30 mL). 4-(Boc-amino)benzoic acid and HOBt were weighed into a flask, dissolved in bromo phenol blue in NMP (30 mL, 0.5 mM). This solution was added to the drained resin above followed by addition of DIC. The reaction was shaken at ambient temperature. The resin was drained and washed with NMP (6×30 mL). The resin was shaken with 25% piperidine in NMP (10 mL) for 10 min. The resin was drained and treated with 25% piperidine in NMP (10 mL) for 1 hr followed by draining and wash with NMP (6×15 mL). Fmoc-OEG-OH and HOBt were weighed into a flask, dissolved in brom phenol blue in NMP (15 mL, 0.5 mM). This solution was added to the drained resin followed by addition of DIC. The reaction was shaken at ambient temperature for 23 hrs. The resin was drained and washed with NMP (6×15 mL). The resin was shaken with 25% piperidine in NMP (10 mL) for 10 min. The resin was drained and treated with 25% piperidine in NMP (10 mL) for 1 hr followed by draining and wash with NMP (6×15 mL). Fmoc-Glu-O-t-Bu and HOBt were weighed into a flask, dissolved in bromo phenol blue in NMP (15 mL, 0.5 mM). This solution was added to the drained resin followed by addition of DIC. The reaction was shaken at ambient temperature for 18 hrs. The resin was drained and washed with NMP (6×15 mL). The resin was shaken with 25% piperidine in NMP (10 mL) for 10 min. The resin was drained and treated with 25% piperidine in NMP (10 mL) for 1 hour followed by draining and wash with NMP (6×15 mL). Fmoc-Glu-O-t-Bu and HOBt were weighed into a flask, dissolved in 15 ml 0.5 mM bromo phenol blue in NMP. This solution was added to the drained resin followed by addition of DIC. The reaction was shaken at ambient temperature for 18 hrs. The resin was drained and washed with NMP (6×15 mL). The resin was shaken with 25% piperidine in NMP (10 mL) for 10 min. The resin was drained and treated with 25% piperidine in NMP (10 mL) for 1 hr followed by draining and washing with NMP (6×15 mL). Fmoc-OEG-OH and HOBt were weighed into a flask, dissolved in bromo phenol blue in NMP (15 mL, 0.5 mM). This solution was added to the drained resin followed by addition of DIC. The reaction was shaken at ambient temperature. The resin was drained and washed with NMP (6×15 mL). The resin was shaken with 25% piperidine in NMP (10 mL) for 10 min. The resin was drained and treated with 25% piperidine in NMP (10 mL) for 1 hr followed by draining and washing with NMP (6×15 mL).
  • 4-(16-1H-Tetrazol-5-yl-hexadecanoylsulfamoyl)butyric acid and HOBt were weighed into a flask, dissolved in bromo phenol blue in NMP (15 mL, 0.5 mM). This solution was added to the drained resin followed by the addition of DIC. The reaction was shaken at ambient temperature for 21 hrs. The resin was drained and washed with NMP (6×15 mL) followed by draining and wash with DCM (6×15 mL). The resin was cleaved with a mixture of 95% TFA in water (10 mL)+DCM (0.25 mL) and TIS (0.25 mL). The resin was shaken for 2 hours at ambient temperature and filtered into ice cold Et2O (75 mL). The resulting precipitate was isolated by centrifugation followed by washing with Et2O (3×) and dried in vacuum for 48 hours affording crude 300 mg of compound (VIII).
  • Crude compound (VIII) was purified on prep-HPLC (GILSON), 30->80% MeCN. Pooled fractions were evaporated to dryness and the residue dissolved in H2O/MeCN 1:1 and freezedried over night affording 170 mg of the compound (VIII).
  • TOF-MS: Rt=4.7 min, mass 1268.71 (M+1)
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00103
    Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00104
    • Example 18
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using Fmoc-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Wang Resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00105
    • Example 19
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Rink amid resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00106
  • TOF-MS: mass 1333.64 (M+1)
    • Example 20
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Rink amid resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00107
  • TOF-MS: mass 1320.67 (M+1)
    • Example 21
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Rink amid resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00108
  • TOF-MS: mass 2114.64 (M+1)
    • Example 22
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Rink amid resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00109
  • TOF-MS: mass 1534.82 (M+1)
    • Example 23
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Rink amid resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00110
  • TOF-MS: mass 823.05 (M+1)
    • Example 24
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Wang Resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00111
  • TOF-MS: mass 980.22 (M+1)
    • Example 25
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Rink amid resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00112
  • TOF-MS: mass 851.10 (M+1)
    • Example 26
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Rink amid resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00113
  • TOF-MS: mass 1258.51 (M+1)
    • Example 27
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Wang Resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00114
  • TOF-MS: mass 1269.49 (M+1)
    • Example 28
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Rink amid resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00115
  • TOF-MS: mass 841.04 (M+1)
    • Example 29
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Rink amid resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00116
  • TOF-MS: mass 863.07 (M+1)
    • Example 30
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Rink amid resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00117
  • TOF-MS: mass 855.07 (M+1)
    • Example 31
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Rink amid resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00118
  • TOF-MS: mass 883.12 (M+1)
    • Example 32
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Rink amid resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00119
  • TOF-MS: mass 1123.35 (M+1)
    • Example 33
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Rink amid resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00120
  • TOF-MS: Rt=4.7 min, mass 1267.45 (M+1)
    • Example 34
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Rink amid resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00121
  • TOF-MS: mass 1310.67 (M+1)
    • Example 35
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Rink amid resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00122
  • TOF-MS: mass 1308.58 (M+1)
    • Example 36
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Glu(ODmab)-OH and 2-chlorotrityl chloride resine.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00123
  • TOF-MS: mass 1235.56 (M+1)
    • Example 37
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Glu(ODmab)-OH and 2-chlorotrityl chloride resine.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00124
  • TOF-MS: mass 1173.40 (M+1)
    • Example 38
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Rink amid resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00125
  • TOF-MS: mass 703.93 (M+1)
    • Example 39
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Lys(Mtt)-OH and Rink amid resin.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00126
  • TOF-MS: mass 689.90 (M+1)
    • Example 40
  • In a similar way as described in Example 17 above the following compound was prepared using FMOC-Glu(ODmab)-OH and 2-chlorotrityl chloride resine.
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00127
  • TOF-MS: mass 1182.34 (M+1)
    • Example 41 17-[(S)-3-(2-{2-[(2-{2-[(5-Aminopentylcarbamoyl)methoxy]ethoxy}ethylcarbamoyl)-methoxy]ethoxy}ethylcarbamoyl)-1-carboxy-propylcarbamoyl]-heptadecanoic acid
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00128
  • N-tert-butoxycarbonyl cadaverine (24.3 mg; 0.12 mmol) was added to a solution of 17-((S)-1-Carboxy-3-{2-[2-({2-[2-(2,5-dioxo-pyrrolidin-1-yloxycarbonylmethoxy)-ethoxy]ethylcarbamoyl}methoxy)ethoxy]ethylcarbamoyl}propylcarbamoyl)-heptadecanoic acid (100 mg; 0.12 mmol) and DIPEA (46.68 mg; 0.36 mmol) in THF (2.0 ml). Reaction mixture was stirred over night at room temperature, and then concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in a mixture of water (5 ml) and THF (2 ml), and purified by preparative HPLC (RP18 column). Fractions containing the Boc-protected coupling product was pooled and taken to dryness. The residual was dissolved in 50% TFA-DCM (4 ml) and stirred for 1h at room temperature, then concentrated in vacuo to provide 54 mg (55%) of the title material as its trifluoroacetic acid salt.
  • TOF-MS: mass 815.5 (M+1)
    • Preparation of GH Albumin Binder Compounds: Example 42
  • The use of a transglutaminase to attach a handle to GH has previously been described in WO2005/070468 and may be used in accordance with the present invention for attachment of an albumine binder. The TGase used is microbial transglutaminase from Streptoverticillium mobaraense according to U.S. Pat. No. 5,156,956. A general method is described in the section Chemistry I above.
  • 1. Coupling of Transaminated and Oxidised GH Compound (I) with an Albumine Binder (II)
  • The following solution was prepared:
  • Buffer A: Triethanolamine (119 mg, 0.8 mmol) was dissolved in water (40 mL) and pH adjusted to 8.5.
  • (A) Transamination of hGH (III) with 1,3-diamino-2-propanol
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00129
  • In the next step, transaminated GH (III) is added periodate. The oxidation is typically done at low temperature, such as 4-10° C. over 30 min. optionally in the dark. Periodate may oxidize metheonine residues in GH to their corresponding metheonine sulfoxide residues. To minimize this oxidation risk, small molecule organic thioethers may be added during periodate oxidation. A suitable organic thioether is 3-methylthiopropan-1-ol but the skilled person will be able to suggest others.
    • Oxidation of Transaminated GH Compound (IV):
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00130
  • Buffer change may be performed in order to obtain an acid solution required for efficient sodium cyano borohydride reduction. Typically, an excess of A-W—B1-NH2 amine is used, and sodium cyanoborohydride may be added in smaller portions over time.
  • The following solutions were prepared:
  • Buffer A: Triethanolamine (119 mg, 0.8 mmol) was dissolved in water (40 mL) and pH adjusted to 8.5.
  • Buffer B: 3-methylthiopropanol (725 mg, 7.1 mmol) was dissolved in Buffer A (10 mL).
  • Buffer C: HEPES (5.96 g) was dissolved in water (1.0 L) and pH adjusted to 7.0 Periodate: NaIO4 (48.1 mg, 0.225 mmol) was dissolved in water (1.0 mL).
  • To a solution of (IV) (10 mg, 0.5 μmol) was added Buffer B (0.2 mL) followed by the periodate solution (0.03 mL). After 20 min. of cold incubation the mixture is dialyzed 4 times with buffer C. The residue is concentrated to 1 mL.
  • (C) Reductive Amination of (I) with Albumin Binder (II)
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00131
  • Albumin binder (II) as described in Example 17 through 40 may be used.
  • The final solution from (B) (1 mL, 10 mg, 0.45 μmol (I)) was mixed with an albumine binder (II) solution (2 mL, 10 mg, 0.3 μmol) in 25 mM HEPES buffer pH 7.0 and the resulting mixture was slowly rotated at room temperature for 1 hr. After 1 hr NaCNBH3 (100 μL of a solution of NaCNBH3 (20 mg) in water (0.5 mL)) was added portionwise. The mixture is kept at room temperature in the dark for 18-24 hrs.
  • The later reaction may be performed as follows:
  • A solution of oxidized transaminated GH is added a solution of albumin binder linker in a mixture of AcOH (1.5 mL) and 50 mM MES (0.5 mL) at pH 6.00. The resulting reaction mixture is gently shaken at RT for 30 min. at which time a NaCNBH3 solution (15 μL, (22 mg NaCNBH3 dissolved in 500 μL Milli-Q water+AcOH (15 μL))) is added. The sample is covered with tin foil and stirrer over night at RT.
  • The conjugate can be isolated by anion exchange chromatography as follows: Acetic acid is removed by buffer changed with pure water (3×) using Amicon Ultral5 devices (Ultracel 10K tubes) by centrifugation at 4000 rpm/min. for 3×8 min. The mixture is then buffer changed to 20 mM TEA, pH: 8.50 using Amicon Filter devises and diluted to a final volume of 50 mL with 20 mM TEA, before loading it on a HiLoad Q Sepharose, 26/10 column. The column is initially washed with 20 mM TEA, pH 8.50 (buffer A) and then eluted with 20 mM TEA, 500 mM NaCl, pH 8.50 (buffer B) using a 0-100% (B) gradient over 20 CV, with a flow rate of 2 mL/min. The pooled fractions were buffer changed 5 times to 10 mM ammoniumbicarbonate buffer in pure water using Amicon Ultral5 devices (Ultracel 10K tubes) by centrifugation at 4000 rpm/min. for 3×8 min Using the albumin binder from Example 18 will result in the following compound
  • 42.1
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00132
  • TOF-MS: mass 23301.63
  • The following compound was prepared using the albumin binder from Example 41
  • 42.2
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00133
  • TOF-MS: mass 23727.6245
  • To a solution of hGH (1 mg, 45 nmol) and 17-[(S)-3-(2-{2-[(2-{2-[(5-aminopentylcarbamoyl)methoxy]ethoxy}ethylcarbamoyl) methoxy]ethoxy}ethylcarbamoyl)-1-carboxy-propylcarbamoyl]heptadecanoic acid (2.10 mg; 2250 nmol) in 20 mM triethanolamin (1000 ul; pH 8.5) was added TGase (0.12 nmol; Streptoverticillium mobaraense). The reaction mixture was incubated at 25° C. for 146 hrs, where upon double derivatized hGH analogue of the above formula was obtained.
    • Example 43
  • 1. Coupling of a GH Compound (I)N-Terminally with an Albumine Binder (IV)
  • (A) Reductive Alkylation of (I) with an Albumin Binder Aldehyde (IV)
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00134
  • The derivatization process as shown above utilise an albumin binding linker A-W—B wherein B has a terminal aldehyde functionality. Conjugation of hGH with A-W—B-CHO occurs via reductive alkylation (hGH→VI). Reductive alkylation is exemplified herein and is well-recognized in the art and results in hGH compounds modified at the N-terminal position.
  • Albumin binder (IV) was obtained as described in Example 14.
    • Synthesis of: 2-(C20diacid-Trx-γGlu-Glu-OEG-OEG-Gly-Glycin amid)-ethyl-Nα1-hGH [Q84C, Y143C]
  • 43.0
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00135
  • hGH[Q84C, Y143C] (23 mg) was dissolved in Hepes buffer (2.3 mL 0.25 mM pH 7.0). C20diacid-Trx-γGlu-Glu-OEG-OEG-Gly-Gly-dimethylacetal (2 mg, see example 14 above) was treated with TFA (50 μL) for 6 min. and evaporated to dryness in vacuum. The residue was stripped with EtOH (200 μL) and evaporated to dryness in vacuum. The residue was dissolved in DMF (100 μL) and added to the hGH solution. A precipitate was formed and redissolved by addition of DMF (1 mL). After 1 hr a solution of NaCNBH3 (20 mg, in 0.5 mL MeCN (230 μL)) was added portionwise and left for 20 hrs. The reaction was quenched by addition of AcOH (2 mL) and diluted with water to a total volume of 20 mL and purified on prep. HPLC on a C18 column with a gradient of 0.1% TFA in MeCN from 40-80% against 0.1% TFA in water. The latest eluting peak was collected, diluted from 70% MeCN to 10% with water and lyophilized affording 4.51 mg of 2-(C20diacid-Trx-γGlu-Glu-OEG-OEG-Gly-Glycin amid)-ethyl-Nα1-hGH [Q84C, Y143C].
  • TOF-MS: Rt=15.25 min, mass=23150
  • In a similar way as described above the following compound was prepared using albumin binder from Example 16.
  • 43.1
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00136
  • TOF-MS: Rt=15.2 min, mass=23033
  • In a similar way as described above the following compound was prepared using albumin binder from Example 15.
  • 43.2
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00137
  • TOF-MS: Rt=15 min, mass=22989.1
    • Example 44
  • 1. Coupling of a GH Compound (VII) Having an Internal Free Single Cys with an Albumine Binder (VIII)
      • 1) Liberation of free Cys GH (VII) via reduction of disulfide (VI) with a suitable selective reducing agent:
      • 2) Alkylation of free Cys GH (VII) with a halogen activated albumin binder (VIII) affording Cys conjugated GH compound (IX)
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00138
  • 44.1
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00139
    • 2-(C20diacid-Trx-γGlu-OEG-OEG-6Lys)-carbonylmethylene-S101hG H[L101C]
      Preparation of hGH[L101C] (VII):
  • hGH[L101C] as obtained above had part of its free cystein blocked with glutathione and cystamine. Deblocking was performed enzymatically using glutaredoxin II (Grx2) in an equilibrium buffer containing GSH and GSSG. Deblocked hGH[L101C] was separated from low molecular weight GSH/GSSG by buffer exchanged on a Sephadex G25 column.
  • Conjugation of Albumin Binder (VIII) with hGH[L101C] (VII):
  • Albumin binder from example 5 (78 mg, 5 eq) was dissolved in 170 mL HEPES/EDTA buffer with 5% hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin and added MTP (2.1 mL, 1%) and 0.5 M NaCl (6.34 g). To this mixture was added concentrated hGH[L101C] (1 eq, 46 mL) and the mixture was left over night at RT. The solution became cloudy over night. As HPLC indicated unreacted starting material another 5 eq. albumin binder from example 5 dissolved in a minimum of NMP was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at RT for an additional 16 hrs.
    • Purification:
  • Buffers used:
  • Buffer A.
  • 20 mM Triethanolamine (TEA)+10% Ethylen glycol
  • 5.96 g triethanolamine
  • 200 mL ethylen glycol
  • MQ water added to 2 L.
  • pH adjusted to 8.5 with 1N HCl
  • Buffer B:
  • 20 mM Triethanolamine (TEA)+1.0 M NaCl+10% Ethylen glycol
  • 5.96 g triethanolamine
  • 116.88 g NaCl
  • 200 mL ethylen glycol
  • MQ water added to 2 L.
  • pH adjusted to 8.5 with 1N HCl
  • The reaction buffer was changed to TEA-buffer A with ethylen glycol on a Sephadex column over 3 runs:
  • Column: 50/30 Sephadex G25 fine
  • Buffer A:
  • Flow: 10 mL/min
  • Temp: RT (fractions collected at 12° C.)
  • Fractions: 30 mL per fraction
  • Desired fractions were collected, pooled and then purified on a Q Sepharose column:
  • Column: 26/10 Q Sepharose HP
  • Buffer A:
  • Buffer B:
  • Gradient 1: 0-10% Buffer B over 1 CV
  • Gradient 2: 10-40% buffer B over 20 CV
  • Gradient 3: 40-100% Buffer B over 1 CV
  • Flow: 8 mL/min
  • Temp: RT (fractions collected at RT)
  • Fractions: 5 mL per fraction
  • Desired fractions were collected, pooled and buffer exchanged to 10 mM ammoniumbicarbonate
  • pH 8.0 on a Sephadex G25 column:
  • Column: 50/30 Sephadex G25 fine
  • Buffer A: 10 mM Ammoniumbicarbonate pH 8.0
  • Flow: 10 mL/min
  • Temp: RT (fractions collected at 12° C.)
  • Fractions: 30 mL per fraction
  • Five fractions were pooled and freezedried.
  • The pool was analysed by MS and large amounts of dimer (MS 44491.7) was seen.
  • The freezedried vials were dissolved in buffer A and purified again on a new Q Sepharose column:
  • Column: 26/10 Q Sepharose HP
  • Buffer A:
  • Buffer B:
  • Gradient 1: 0-10% Buffer B over 1 CV
  • Gradient 2: 10-40% buffer B over 20 CV
  • Gradient 3: 40-100% Buffer B over 1 CV
  • Flow: 8 mL/min
  • Temp: RT (fractions collected at RT)
  • Fractions: 5 mL per fraction
  • Fractions were pooled and desalted/buffer exchanged to 10 mM ammoniumbicarbonate by ultrafiltration. The pool was concentrated to 25 mL and quantified by RP-HPLC and MS-TOF:
  • TOF-MS: Rt=16.15 min, mass=23315.96
  • The following compounds were prepared using the same method.
  • 44.2
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00140
  • TOF-MS: Rt=15.24 min, mass=22676.8
  • 44.3
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00141
  • TOF-MS: Rt=10.5 min, mass=22975.1
  • 44.4
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00142
  • OF-MS: Rt=15.5 min, mass=23009
  • 44.5
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00143
  • TOF-MS: Rt=14.0 min, mass=23305.5
  • 44.6
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00144
  • TOF-MS: Rt=15.27 min, mass=23148
  • 44.7
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00145
  • TOF-MS: Rt=16.40 min, mass=23048
  • 44.8
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00146
  • TOF-MS: Rt=15.3 min, mass=22884.4
  • 44.9
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00147
  • TOF-MS: Rt=14.6 min, mass=23291.4
  • 44.10
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00148
  • TOF-MS: Rt=15.05 min, mass=23097.76
  • 44.11
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00149
  • TOF-MS: Rt=14.2 min, mass=23420.83
  • 44.12
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00150
  • TOF-MS: Rt=15.7 min, mass=23289.6
  • 44.13
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00151
  • TOF-MS: Rt=17.0 min, mass=23324.55
  • 44.15
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00152
  • TOF-MS: Rt=12.85 min, mass=23337.5
  • 44.16
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00153
  • TOF-MS: Rt=15.24 min, mass=22676.8
    • Example 45
  • 1. Coupling of a GH Compound (VII) Having an Internal Free Single Cys with an Albumine Binder (X)
      • 1) Alkylation of free Cys GH (VII) with a malimide substituted albumin binder (X) affording Cys conjugated GH compound (XI)
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00154
  • Deprotected Cys GH compound (VII) as obtained above in Example 44 can be reacted with a malimide substituted albumin binder linker (X) affording GH conjugate A-W—B1-NHC(O)CH2CH2-pyrrolidin-2,5-dione-3-hGH (XI) wherein B1 is defined as described in Chemistry IV above.
  • Conjugation of Maleimide Functionalised Albumin Binder (X) to hGH L101C
    • Step (a) Deblocking of Cysteine Residue
  • Glutathione/cysteamine blocked Cys hGH (VI) was enzymatically deblocked using glutaredoxin II (Grx2) in an equilibrium buffer containing GSH and GSSG. Deblocked Cys hGH (VII) was separated from low molecular GSH/GSSG by buffer exchanged on a Sephadex G25 column.
    • Step (b) Coupling to Maleimide Functionalized Albumin Binder (X)
  • Maleimide functionalized albumin binder (X) was dissolved in buffer containing 5% hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin. The solution was then added to de-blocked Cys hGH (VII) and allowed to reacted over night at room temperature.
  • After conjugation the conjugated protein was purified on a Q Sepharose HiLoad column in 20 mM triethanolamine buffer containing 10% ethylene glycol at pH 8.5 using a gradient of sodium chloride. The collected fractions were pooled and transferred to 10 mM ammonium bicarbonate using a G25 column and lyophilized.
  • 45.1
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00155
  • TOF-MS: Rt=16.0 min, mass=23352
  • 45.2
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00156
  • TOF-MS: Rt=15.98 min, mass=23338
  • 45.3
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00157
  • TOF-MS: Rt=16.62 min, mass=23324.6
  • 45.4
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00158
  • TOF-MS: Rt=16.20 min, mass=23339.7
  • 45.5
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00159
  • TOF-MS: Rt=15.72 min, mass=23316.35
  • 45.6
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00160
  • TOF-MS: Rt=17.2 min, mass=23365.9
  • 45.7
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00161
  • TOF-MS: Rt=17.2 min, mass=23366
  • 45.8
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00162
  • TOF-MS: Rt=16.5 min, mass=23366
  • 45.9
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00163
  • TOF-MS: Rt=16.8 min, mass=23323.8
  • 45.10
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00164
  • TOF-MS: Rt=17.1 min, mass=23382
  • 45.11
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00165
  • TOF-MS: Rt=17.2 min, mass=23338.8
  • 45.12
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00166
  • TOF-MS: Rt=17 min, mass=23353.9
  • 45.13
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00167
  • TOF-MS: Rt=15.65 min, mass=23323.7
  • 45.14
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00168
  • TOF-MS: Rt=16.5 min, mass=23365.8
  • 45.15
  • Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00169
  • TOF-MS: Rt=17.2 min, mass=23365.9
    • Example 46 Assay (I) BAF-3GHR Assay to Determine Growth Hormone Activity
  • The BAF-3 cells (a murine pro-B lymphoid cell line derived from the bone marrow) was originally IL-3 dependent for growth and survival. IL-3 activates JAK-2 and STAT which are the same mediators GH is activating upon stimulation. After transfection of the human growth hormone receptor the cell line was turn into a growth hormone-dependent cell line. This clone can be used to evaluate the effect of different growth hormone samples on the survival of the BAF-3GHR.
  • The BAF-3GHR cells are grown in starvation medium (culture medium without growth hormone) for 24 hrs at 37° C., 5% CO2.
  • The cells are washed and re-suspended in starvation medium and seeded in plates. 10 μL of growth hormone compound or human growth hormone in different concentrations or control is added to the cells, and the plates are incubated for 68 hrs at 37° C., 5% CO2.
  • AlamarBlue® is added to each well and the cells are then incubated for another 4 hrs. The AlamarBlue® is a redox indicator, and is reduced by reactions innate to cellular metabolism and, therefore, provides an indirect measure of viable cell number.
  • Finally, the metabolic activity of the cells is measure in a fluorescence plate reader. The absorbance in the samples is expressed in % of cells not stimulated with growth hormone compound or control and from the concentration-response curves the activity (amount of a compound that stimulates the cells with 50%) can be calculated.
  • In vitro potency of compound 45.4 in the BAF-3 hGH receptor assay is shown in table 1 below.
  • Protease stability of compound 45.5 was determined as described in the general method by incubating the compound for 4 hours with chymotrypsin or elastase. The percent of intact GH compound was measured and the results are included in table 1.
  • TABLE 1
    Data relating to compound 45.4
    Chymo- Elas-
    Ratio trypsin (% tase (%
    EC50 (EC50 cmp/ intact GH intact GH
    Compund (nM) EC50 hGH) n compound) compound)
    hGH 0.026 ± 1 6 40 25
    0.012
    45.4 0.09 ± 3.5 6 75 65
    0.043
    • Example 47 Pharmacokinetics
  • The pharmacokinetic of the compounds of the examples is investigated in male Spraque Dawley rats after intravenous (i.v.) and subcutaneous (s.c.) single dose administration.
  • Test compounds are diluted to a final concentration of 1 mg/mL in a dilution buffer consisting of: Glycine 20 mg/mL, mannitol 2 mg/mL, NaHCO3 2.5 mg/mL, pH adjusted to 8.2.
  • The test compounds are studied in male Spraque Dawley rats weighing 250 g. The test compounds are administered as a single injection either i.v. in the tail vein or s.c. in the neck with a 25 G needle at a dose of 60 nmol/kg body weight.
  • For each test compound blood sampling is conducted according to the following schedule presented in table 2.
  • TABLE 2
    Blood sampling schedule for each test compound.
    Animal Sampling time (h)
    no. RoA Predose 0.08 0.25 0.5 1 2 4 6 8 18 24 48 72
    1 s.c. X X X X X X
    2 X X X X X X
    3 X X X X
    4 X X X X
    5 X X
    6 X X
    7 i.v. X X X X X X X
    8 X X X X X X X
    9 X X X
    10 X X X
  • At each sampling time 0.25 ml blood is drawn from the tail vein using a 25 G needle. The blood is sampled into a EDTA coated test tube and stored on ice until centrifugation at 1200×G for 10 min at 4° C. Plasma is transferred to a Micronic tube and stored at −20° C. until analysis.
  • Test compound concentrations are determined by a sandwich ELISA using a guinea pig anti-hGH polyclonal antibody as catcher, and biotinylated hGH binding-protein (soluble part of human GH receptor) as detector. The limit of detection of the assay was 0.2 nM.
  • A non-compartmental pharmacokinetic analysis is performed on mean concentration-time profiles of each test compound using WinNonlin Professional (Pharsight Inc., Mountain View, CA, USA). The pharmacokinetic parameter estimates of terminal half-life (t1/2) and mean residence time (MRT) are calculated.
  • TABLE 3
    Half-life (t1/2) and mean residence time (MRT) of
    GH compounds from the examples in Sprague Dawley rats
    after single dose i.v. and s.c. administration.
    Compound T1/2 MRT
    (Example #) RoA (h) (h)
    43.0 i.v. 7.2 9.8
    43.2 i.v. 4.4 7.4
    44.1 i.v. 5.6 7.2
    44.3 i.v. 1.3 0.9
    44.4 i.v. 2.5 2.7
    44.5 i.v. 4.1 6.8
    44.6 i.v. 3.2 4.0
    44.7 i.v. 3.8 6.0
    44.9 i.v. 4.2 6.5
    44.10 i.v 4.1 7.1
    45.4 i.v. 8.6 9.8
    45.4 s.c. 19.8 31.2
    45.12 i.v. 5.8 6.8
  • The bioavailablitiy of example 45.4 was estimated to 48.3%. The time to maximum plasma concentration (t max) after subcutaneous administration was 8.0 hrs. Cmax was 1670 and 151 nM after i.v. and s.c. administration, respectively. The extrapolated plasma concentration at time zero after i.v. administration concentration was 1710 nM.
    • Example 48
  • The in vitro potentcy and half lives of a series of compounds were determined as described above. The conjugates of the compounds are identical but attached via an alternative cysteine introduced by mutation as described in the table 4.
  • TABLE 4
    In vitro potency and half lives (t1/2).
    T1/2
    In vitro (i.v. Rat) MRT Attachement site
    Compound potency (hour) (hour) (variant)
    hGH 1.0 (def) 0.23 —
    45.1 2.6 3.8 T135C
    45.2 2.8 8.7 D154C
    45.3 2.1 3.1 Q69C
    45.4 2.9 6.3/8.6 7.8/9.8 L101C
    45.5 4.1 4.5 L18C
    45.6 4.1 5.5 Y42C
    45.7 0.72 6.5 S95C
    45.8 0.59 2.0 S62C
    45.9 1.8 4.1 E88C
    45.10 2.6 3.4 4.3 A98C
    45.11 3.1 5.8 6.8 N99C
    45.12 2.5 1.9 3.0 V102C
    45.13 16.5 1.9 2.6 E30C
    45.14 4.4 1.5 2.0 S100C
    • Example 49 In Vivo Dose-Response Study in Hypophysectomised Sprague Dawley Rats
  • The in vivo dose-response relationship is studied in hypophysectomised male Sprague Dawley rats. The hypophysectomised rat is a well known and recognised animal model of growth hormone deficiency, where no production of growth hormone occurs after the surgical removal of the pituitary gland. This also leads to low circulating levels of insulin-like growth factor-1 (IGF-1) another important clinical feature of growth hormone deficiency in humans.
  • The hypophysectomy is performed on 4 week old male rats weighing 90-100 g. The animals entering the study 3-4 weeks after the surgery weighing 100-110 g. Animals with a body weight gain of more than 10% during the 3-4 weeks after surgery are not allowed to enter the study.
  • Dose response studies are performed using five dose levels of compound 45.4 from 1-150 nmol/rat.
  • Baseline levels of plasma IGF-1 in hypophysectomised Sprague Dawley rats were approximately 80-100 ng/mL in all dosing groups. After a single dose IGF-1 levels rapidly increased to 800-1000 ng/mL on Day 1 almost independently of dose. The plasma IGF-1 levels declined again during the following days in a dose-dependent manner with the fastest decline seen with the lowest dose and the slowest decline with the highest dose. At the highest dose the IGF-1 plasma level was maintained at 800-900 ng/mL for 3 days before it started to decline more rapidly. IGF-1 plasma concentration levels were elevated compared to the vehicle control group for all dosing groups until Day 3. For dosing groups 10 nmol, 50 nmol and 150 nmol it was elevated during the entire study (7 days).
    • Example 50 Disappearance
  • It is hypothesized that absorption rate is related to the ability of a molecule to pass the tight junctions of the subcutaneous capillaries, a property related to molecular size. A PEG-hGH with a 40 kDa PEG has an apparent molecular weight (mw) of 150 250 kDa. A hGH molecule with covalent bound albumin has mw=87 kDa, whereas a hGH molecule with a non-covalent bound albumin will be dissociated from albumin part of the time and thus have mw=22 kDa. The time spend in the dissociated state will depend on the affinity of the albumin binding moiety. Thus the absorption rate of such compounds should be faster than for PEG-hGH and the rate should increase with the use of albumin binding moieties having lower affinity for albumin.
  • The test solutions were diluted in standard buffer consisting of: Glycine 20 mg/mL, mannitol 2 mg/mL, NaHCO3 2.4 mg/mL, pH adjusted to 8.2.
  • Iodination with 125I was performed by Chemistry & Isotope Lab. Novo Nordisk A/S. The final radioactive formulation had a specific radioactive activity of 3 μCi/mL and was supplied in 3 mL Penfills.
  • The solutions were stored at 2-8° C. until used.
  • Disapperence rate for selected compounds were meaussered in five female pigs of crossbred LYD. The pigs are weighted, fasted and issued a special “pig coat” in order to carry the gamma counter and transmitter and placed in single pens before the start of the study.
  • All pigs are fasted for 18 hrs prior the study.
  • The animals were dosed (60 nmol) subcutaneously on the left and the right side of the neck respectively with a Novopen3® and a NovoFine® 28G needle with fixed black needle stopper. Injection depth was 5 mm.
  • The disappearance of the radioactive depots were measured by portable equipment for about 24-48 hrs.
  • For each individual animal, the results were presented as AUC (0-45 hrs) as shown in table 5.
  • The in vitro potentcy, half lives and further characteristics of a series of compounds were determined as described above and shown in the table 5.
  • TABLE 5
    Compound charateristics.
    T1/2 Disapperance Duration of
    In vitro (i.v. Rat) AUC IGF-1 increase
    Compound potency (hour) (0-45 hour) (hour)
    hGH 1.0 (def) 0.23 519 —
    44.9 8.2 4.2 2259 >48
    44.8 1.8 2.6 1490 >24
    44.1 4.7 5.6 1750 >48
    44.3 1.5 1.3 2152 <24
    44.6 4.7 3.2 1558 <24
    44.7 4.5 3.8 2039 <24
    44.5 5.8 4.1 1599 >48
    44.4 3.9 2.5 1588 >48
    • Example 51 In Vivo Study in Pigs
  • To further confirm the functionality of hGH albumin conjugates according to the invention three compounds were selected for additional pharmacokinetic studies in pigs. Compounds equal to compounds 44.1, 44.4 and 44.5 were prepared conjugating the albumin binder to the hGH variant after removal of the MAEA purification tag.
  • The test compounds were diluted to the final concentration of 100 nmol/mL in standard buffer (20 mg/mL Glycine, 2 mg/mL Mannitol, 2.4 mg/mL NaHCO3, pH adjusted to 8.2). Twenty four male Gottingen minipigs 5 months of age and weighing 9-12 kg were used in the study. Each test compound was dosed to eight animals with four minipigs receiving intravenous bolus administration and four animals receiving subcutaneous administration. The intravenous injections were given through a 24 G Venflon in the ear. The dose was given as a bolus over maximum 5 seconds followed by 2 mL of 0.9% NaCl. The subcutaneous injections were given on the right side of the neck, approximately 5-7 cm from the ear and 7-9 cm from the middle of the neck. Each animal received a single dose of test compound of 10 nmol/kg. Blood samples were collected from each animal at the following time points: Predose, 0.08, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 18, 24, 48, 72, 96, 120, 168, 240, and 336 hours post injection. Plasma was isolated from each blood sample and stored at −20° C. before analysed for test compound. Plasma concentration-time data were analysed by a non-compartmental pharmacokinetic method.
  • TABLE 6
    Pharmacokinetic parameter estimates after single
    dose subcutaneous administration of 10 nmol/kg.
    ABW-Halo AUC/dose
    Compound as in (h*kg/l) T1/2 (h) MRT (h) MAT (h) F (%)
    51.1 44.1 139 (37.5) 11 (1.2) 30.6 (4.1) 10.0 38.6
    51.2 44.5 101 (22.5) 12 (2.7) 25.2 (3.9) 11.6 60.8
    51.3 44.4 144 (34.7) 12.6 (3.5) 33.1 (1.7) 12.1 35.6
    Mean ± SD in ( )
  • Table 6 is showing key pharmacokinetic parameters for the three test compounds. The AUC/Dose is an estimate for the dose corrected exposure of the test compounds. T, is the terminal half-life of the test compounds after the absorption phase has been completed. MRT is the mean residence time of the test compounds corresponding to the time the average test compound molecule is in the body. MAT is the corresponding mean absorption time and is an estimate of the average time the molecule is in the absorption phase. F is the absolute bioavailability of the test compounds relative to intravenous administration.

Claims (17)

1. A growth hormone conjugate which comprises a growth hormone compound (GH) having
a) a single Cys mutation,
b) an additional disulfide bridge, or
c) a single Cys mutation and an additional disulfide bridge,
wherein an albumin binding residue via a hydrophilic spacer is linked to said GH, or
a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
2. The conjugate of claim 1 wherein the growth hormone conjugate has the formula (I):

A-W—B-GH  (I)
wherein
GH represents the growth hormone compound;
B represents a hydrophilic spacer;
W is a chemical group linking A and B; and
A represent an albumin binding residue;
and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
3. The conjugate of claim 1 wherein the hydrophilic spacer is linked to
a) the N-terminal or Gln40 or Gln141 of the growth hormone compound or
b) the sulphur residue of a single Cys mutation present in the growth hormone compound selected from the group consisting of T3C, P5C, S7C, D11C, H18C, Q29C, E30C, E33C, A34C, Y35C, K38C, E39C, Y42C, S43C, D47C, P48C, S55C, S57C, P59C, S62, E65C, Q69C, E88C, Q91C, S95C, A98C, N99C, S100C, L101C, V102C, Y103C, D107C, S108C, D112C, Q122C, G126C, E129C, D130C, G131C, P133C, T135C, G136C, T142C, D147C, N149C, D154C, A155C, L156C, R178C, E186C, G187C and G190C of SEQ ID NO: 1.
4. The conjugate of claim 1, wherein the GH has an additional disulfide bridge between at least one of the amino acid pairs in the positions selected from the group consisting of R16C/L117C, A17C/E174C, H21C/M170C, D26C/V102C, D26C/Y103C, N47C/T50C, Q49C/G161C, F54C/Y143C, F54C/S144C, F54C/F146C, S55C/Y143C, S57C/Y143C, I58C/Q141C, I58C/Y143C, I58C/S144C, P59C/Q137C, P61C/E66C, P61C/T67C, S71C/S132C, L73C/S132C, L73C/F139C, R77C/I38C, R77C/F139C, L81C/Q141C, L81C/Y143C, Q84C/Y143C, Q84C/S144C, S85C/Y143C, S85C/S144C, P89C/F146C, F92C/F146C, F92C/T148C, R94C/D107C, V102C/A105C, L156C/F146C, L156C/T148C and V185C/S188C in SEQ ID NO: 1.
5. The conjugate of claim 2, wherein A is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00170
Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00171
wherein * denotes the attachment to B through W.
6. The conjugate of claim 2, wherein W has the formula

—W7—Y—,
wherein
Y is —(CH2)l7—C3-10-cycloalkyl-W8— or a valence bond;
l7 is 0-6;
W7 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s3—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s3 is 0 or 1;
W8 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s4—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond; wherein s4 is 0 or 1.
7. The conjugate of claim 2, wherein B has the formula

—X1—X2—X3—X4—
wherein
X1 is —W1—[(CHR1)l1—W2]m1—{[(CH2)n1E1]m2—[(CHR2)l2—W3]m3}n2—;
X2 is —[(CHR3)l3—W4]m4—{[(CH2)n3E2]m5—[(CHR4)l4—W5]m6}n4—,
X3 is —[(CHR5)l5—W6]m7—;
X4 is F-D1-(CH2)l6-D2-;
l1, l2, l3, l4, l5 and l6 independently are selected from 0-16, such as from 0-6
m1, m3, m4, m6 and m7 independently are selected from 0-10, such as from 0-6
m2 and m5 independently are selected from 0-25, such as from 0-10
n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently are selected from 0-16, such as from 0-10
F is aryl, hetaryl, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione or a valence bond, wherein the aryl and hetaryl groups are optionally substituted with halogen, —CN, —OH, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl;
R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —NH—C(═NH)—NH2, C1-6-alkyl, aryl or hetaryl, wherein the alkyl, aryl and hetaryl groups optionally are substituted with halogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)OH, —S(O)2OH, —CN or —OH;
D1, D2, E1 and E2 independently are selected from —O—, —N(R6)—, —N(C(O)R7)— or a valence bond, wherein R6 and R7 independently represent hydrogen or C1-6-alkyl;
W1 to W5 independently are selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s2—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, or a valence bond, wherein s2 is 0 or 1;
W6 is selected from —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHCH2—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —C(O)CH2—, —CH2C(O)—, —C(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)—, —(CH2)s1—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, —NHC(O)C1-6-alkyl, —C(O)NHC1-6-alkyl or a valence bond, wherein s1 is 0 or 1 and the C1-6-alkyl group is optionally substituted with oxo, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH, wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X4.
8. The conjugate of claim 7, wherein D1 and D2 are independently selected from —O— or —N(R6) or a valence bond.
9. The conjugate of claim 7, wherein E1 and E2 are independently selected from —O— or —N(R6) or a valence bond.
10. The conjugate of claim 2, wherein W1 through W8 independently are selected from the group consisting of —C(O)NH—, —NHC(O)—, —CH2NHC(O)—, —C(O)NHS(O)2—, —S(O)2NHC(O)—, —NHC(O)C1-6-alkyl or —C(O)NHC1-6-alkyl or a valence bond, wherein the alkyl group is optionally substituted with oxo, pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH, wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to X4.
11. The conjugate of claim 7, wherein R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 independently are selected from hydrogen, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2, —S(O)2OH or C1-6-alkyl; wherein the alkyl group optionally is substituted with —C(O)OH, —C(O)NH2 or —S(O)2OH.
12. The conjugate of claim 7, wherein X4 is a valence bond and W6 is selected from either pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, —NHC(O)CH*CH2COOH or —NHC(O)CH2CH*COOH, wherein (*) indicates the attachment point from the carbon atom of CH to GH.
13. The conjugate of claim 2, wherein B is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00172
Figure US20190203213A1-20190704-C00173
14. The conjugate of claim 1, wherein the growth hormone compound (GH) comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 85% identity to SEQ ID NO: 1.
15. The conjugate of claim 1, wherein the growth hormone compound (GH) comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 90% identity to SEQ ID NO: 1.
16. The conjugate of claim 1, wherein the growth hormone compound (GH) comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 95% identity to SEQ ID NO: 1.
17. A compound of formula (III)

A-W—B1-U  (III)
wherein A represent an albumin binding residue;
B1 represents a hydrophilic spacer;
W is a chemical group linking A and B1, and U represent a conjugating moiety wherein the conjugating moiety, U,
a) comprises or consists of an aryl, an heteraryl, a substituted malimide or a pyrrolidine-2,5-dione,
b) comprises D1-(CH2)l6-D2, wherein D1 and D2 are independently selected from —O—, —N(R6)-, —NC(O)R7- or a valence bond, wherein R6 and R7 independently represent hydrogen or C1-6-alkyl,
c) comprises or consists of a leaving group, such as Cl, Br, I, —OH, —OS(O)2Me, —OS(O)2CF3, —OTs,
d) comprises or consists of an allyl amine (H2C═CH—CH2—NH2), or
e) comprises an amine.
US16/354,651 2010-01-22 2019-03-15 Growth Hormones with Prolonged In-Vivo Efficacy Abandoned US20190203213A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US16/354,651 US20190203213A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2019-03-15 Growth Hormones with Prolonged In-Vivo Efficacy
US16/712,651 US20200102568A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2019-12-12 Growth Hormones with Prolonged In-Vivo Efficacy

Applications Claiming Priority (7)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US29730510P 2010-01-22 2010-01-22
EP10151405.7 2010-01-22
EP10151405 2010-01-22
PCT/EP2011/050923 WO2011089255A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2011-01-24 Growth hormones with prolonged in-vivo efficacy
US201213522390A 2012-08-24 2012-08-24
US15/586,960 US20170239362A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2017-05-04 Growth Hormones with Prolonged In-Vivo Efficacy
US16/354,651 US20190203213A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2019-03-15 Growth Hormones with Prolonged In-Vivo Efficacy

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/586,960 Continuation US20170239362A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2017-05-04 Growth Hormones with Prolonged In-Vivo Efficacy

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/712,651 Continuation US20200102568A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2019-12-12 Growth Hormones with Prolonged In-Vivo Efficacy

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20190203213A1 true US20190203213A1 (en) 2019-07-04

Family

ID=42075933

Family Applications (5)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/522,390 Active 2032-10-28 US9695226B2 (en) 2010-01-22 2011-01-24 Growth hormones with prolonged in-vivo efficacy
US14/132,919 Active US8779109B2 (en) 2010-01-22 2013-12-18 Growth hormones with prolonged in-vivo efficacy
US15/586,960 Abandoned US20170239362A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2017-05-04 Growth Hormones with Prolonged In-Vivo Efficacy
US16/354,651 Abandoned US20190203213A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2019-03-15 Growth Hormones with Prolonged In-Vivo Efficacy
US16/712,651 Abandoned US20200102568A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2019-12-12 Growth Hormones with Prolonged In-Vivo Efficacy

Family Applications Before (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/522,390 Active 2032-10-28 US9695226B2 (en) 2010-01-22 2011-01-24 Growth hormones with prolonged in-vivo efficacy
US14/132,919 Active US8779109B2 (en) 2010-01-22 2013-12-18 Growth hormones with prolonged in-vivo efficacy
US15/586,960 Abandoned US20170239362A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2017-05-04 Growth Hormones with Prolonged In-Vivo Efficacy

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/712,651 Abandoned US20200102568A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2019-12-12 Growth Hormones with Prolonged In-Vivo Efficacy

Country Status (20)

Country Link
US (5) US9695226B2 (en)
EP (1) EP2525834B1 (en)
JP (2) JP5875527B2 (en)
KR (1) KR101813595B1 (en)
CN (6) CN118767117A (en)
AU (1) AU2011208625C1 (en)
BR (1) BR112012018116B1 (en)
CA (1) CA2787890C (en)
FI (1) FIC20210013I1 (en)
FR (1) FR21C1029I2 (en)
HU (1) HUS2100029I1 (en)
IL (1) IL220605A (en)
MX (1) MX345736B (en)
NO (1) NO2021023I1 (en)
PL (1) PL2525834T3 (en)
RS (1) RS59459B1 (en)
RU (1) RU2605627C2 (en)
SI (1) SI2525834T1 (en)
TW (1) TWI508737B (en)
WO (1) WO2011089255A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (20)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6086528B2 (en) * 2009-08-06 2017-03-01 ノヴォ・ノルディスク・ヘルス・ケア・アーゲー Growth hormone with long-term in vivo efficacy
RU2012134974A (en) 2010-01-22 2014-02-27 Ново Нордиск Хелс Кеа Аг STABILIZED GROWTH HORMONE COMPOUND
AU2011208625C1 (en) 2010-01-22 2022-08-18 Novo Nordisk Health Care Ag Growth hormones with prolonged in-vivo efficacy
WO2013172967A1 (en) 2012-05-17 2013-11-21 Extend Biosciences, Inc Carriers for improved drug delivery
JP2015536314A (en) * 2012-10-17 2015-12-21 ノヴォ・ノルディスク・ヘルス・ケア・アーゲー Fatty acid acylated amino acids for growth hormone delivery
CN105120887A (en) 2013-04-05 2015-12-02 诺和诺德保健股份有限公司 Growth hormone compound formulation
WO2015036553A1 (en) 2013-09-16 2015-03-19 Novo Nordisk Health Care Ag Thiol functionalized polymers
JP6603662B2 (en) * 2013-12-13 2019-11-06 ノヴォ・ノルディスク・ヘルス・ケア・アーゲー Protein thioether conjugation method
CA2964463C (en) 2014-10-22 2024-02-13 Extend Biosciences, Inc. Therapeutic vitamin d conjugates
US9789197B2 (en) 2014-10-22 2017-10-17 Extend Biosciences, Inc. RNAi vitamin D conjugates
US9616109B2 (en) 2014-10-22 2017-04-11 Extend Biosciences, Inc. Insulin vitamin D conjugates
BR112017014194A2 (en) * 2015-01-23 2018-01-09 Novartis Ag synthetic apelin fatty acid conjugates with improved half life
HUE053937T2 (en) 2015-09-08 2021-08-30 Japan Chem Res Novel human serum albumin mutant
US10286079B2 (en) 2015-09-22 2019-05-14 The Regents Of The University Of California Modified cytotoxins and their therapeutic use
MX2018002514A (en) 2015-09-22 2018-08-15 Univ California Modified cytotoxins and their therapeutic use.
MA43348A (en) 2015-10-01 2018-08-08 Novo Nordisk As PROTEIN CONJUGATES
WO2017159540A1 (en) 2016-03-14 2017-09-21 Ｊｃｒファーマ株式会社 Serum albumin-20 k growth hormone fusion protein
EP4047006A4 (en) 2019-10-17 2023-11-01 JCR Pharmaceuticals Co., Ltd. Method for producing fusion protein of serum albumin and growth hormone
JP2021070700A (en) 2019-10-30 2021-05-06 Ｊｃｒファーマ株式会社 Aqueous pharmaceutical compositions comprising fusion protein between serum albumin and growth hormone
CN115845079B (en) * 2022-11-24 2023-07-18 武汉禾元生物科技股份有限公司 Conjugate of recombinant human serum albumin and recombinant human growth hormone and preparation method thereof

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060183197A1 (en) * 2001-01-11 2006-08-17 Andersen Kim V Variant growth hormone molecules conjugated with macromolecules compounds
US20070203058A1 (en) * 2003-09-19 2007-08-30 Novo Nordisk A/S Novel Glp-1 Derivatives

Family Cites Families (128)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB8504099D0 (en) 1985-02-18 1985-03-20 Wellcome Found Physiologically active substances
US4683202A (en) 1985-03-28 1987-07-28 Cetus Corporation Process for amplifying nucleic acid sequences
GB8610551D0 (en) 1986-04-30 1986-06-04 Hoffmann La Roche Polypeptide & protein derivatives
JPH0665280B2 (en) 1987-03-04 1994-08-24 味の素株式会社 Protein gelling agent and protein gelling method using the same
DE68929273T2 (en) 1988-08-24 2001-07-05 American Cyanamid Co., Wayne Stabilization of somatotropins through modification of cysteine residues through site-specific mutagenesis or chemical derivatization
US5079230A (en) 1988-09-12 1992-01-07 Pitman-Moore, Inc. Stable bioactive somatotropins
US6780613B1 (en) 1988-10-28 2004-08-24 Genentech, Inc. Growth hormone variants
WO1990004788A1 (en) 1988-10-28 1990-05-03 Genentech, Inc. Method for identifying active domains and amino acid residues in polypeptides and hormone variants
US5534617A (en) 1988-10-28 1996-07-09 Genentech, Inc. Human growth hormone variants having greater affinity for human growth hormone receptor at site 1
DE68929217T2 (en) 1989-03-20 2000-11-30 The General Hospital Corp., Boston INSULINOTROPES HORMON
US5101018A (en) 1989-06-12 1992-03-31 International Minerals & Chemical Corp. Method for recovering recombinant proteins
DE3930696A1 (en) 1989-09-14 1991-03-28 Hoechst Ag GALLENSAEUREDERIVATE, METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF, USE AS MEDICAMENT
US5545618A (en) 1990-01-24 1996-08-13 Buckley; Douglas I. GLP-1 analogs useful for diabetes treatment
ES2113879T3 (en) 1990-01-24 1998-05-16 Douglas I Buckley GLP-1 ANALOGS USEFUL FOR THE TREATMENT OF DIABETES.
US5951972A (en) 1990-05-04 1999-09-14 American Cyanamid Company Stabilization of somatotropins and other proteins by modification of cysteine residues
DE69128944T2 (en) 1990-05-04 1998-06-25 American Cyanamid Co Stabilization of somatotropin through modification of cysteine residues
JP2849773B2 (en) 1990-08-27 1999-01-27 天野製薬株式会社 Method for producing transglutaminase from Streptomyces
DK220890D0 (en) 1990-09-14 1990-09-14 Ole Buchardt PROCEDURE FOR THE PREPARATION OF C-TERMINALLY AMIDATED PEPTIDES
DK0564531T3 (en) 1990-12-03 1998-09-28 Genentech Inc Enrichment procedure for variant proteins with altered binding properties
JP3267293B2 (en) 1990-12-03 2002-03-18 ジェネンテク，インコーポレイテッド Methods for enriching mutant proteins with altered binding
IT1251895B (en) 1991-09-27 1995-05-26 Eniricerche Spa HUMAN GROWTH HORMONE MUTANTS AND THEIR USE
DE69333718T2 (en) 1992-01-14 2005-12-01 Ajinomoto Co., Inc. Gene coding for a fish transglutaminase
NZ255158A (en) 1992-07-31 1997-09-22 Genentech Inc Human growth hormone; stable pharmaceutically acceptable aqueous formulation and means for preparing and storing it
ZA936811B (en) 1992-10-28 1995-03-15 Upjohn Co Somatotropin modifications
US5359030A (en) 1993-05-10 1994-10-25 Protein Delivery, Inc. Conjugation-stabilized polypeptide compositions, therapeutic delivery and diagnostic formulations comprising same, and method of making and using the same
DE69533606T2 (en) 1994-01-28 2006-03-02 Ajinomoto Co., Inc. TRANSGLUTAMINASE FROM JAPANESE EYES
WO1996006931A1 (en) 1994-08-26 1996-03-07 Novo Nordisk A/S Microbial transglutaminases, their production and use
WO1996010089A1 (en) 1994-09-29 1996-04-04 Ajinomoto Co., Inc. Modification of peptide and protein
DE4437604A1 (en) 1994-10-21 1996-04-25 Basf Ag Conjugates of a poly or oligopeptide and a low molecular weight lipophilic compound
EP0871712B1 (en) 1995-01-19 2003-08-27 Novozymes A/S Transglutaminases from oomycetes
JP3669390B2 (en) 1995-02-09 2005-07-06 味の素株式会社 Transglutaminase from Bacillus bacteria
US5869602A (en) 1995-03-17 1999-02-09 Novo Nordisk A/S Peptide derivatives
AU718439B2 (en) 1995-09-21 2000-04-13 Genentech Inc. Human growth hormone variants
US20020077461A1 (en) 1996-04-24 2002-06-20 Soren Bjorn Pharmaceutical formulation
US6268343B1 (en) 1996-08-30 2001-07-31 Novo Nordisk A/S Derivatives of GLP-1 analogs
AU4112497A (en) 1996-08-30 1998-03-19 Novo Nordisk A/S Glp-2 derivatives
US6458924B2 (en) 1996-08-30 2002-10-01 Novo Nordisk A/S Derivatives of GLP-1 analogs
EP1826216A1 (en) 1996-08-30 2007-08-29 Novo Nordisk A/S Glp-1 derivatives
US6620916B1 (en) 1996-09-26 2003-09-16 Ajinomoto Co., Inc. Modified physiologically active proteins and medicinal compositions containing the same
US5985627A (en) 1997-02-28 1999-11-16 Carlsberg Laboratory Modified carboxypeptidase
JPH1156378A (en) 1997-06-11 1999-03-02 Nippon Chem Res Kk Variant human growth hormone and its use
DK1775346T3 (en) 1997-06-25 2009-09-28 Merck Serono Sa Disulfide crosslinked glycoprotein hormone analogues, their preparation and use
ES2297889T3 (en) 1997-07-14 2008-05-01 Bolder Biotechnology, Inc. DERIVATIVES OF HORMONE OF GROWTH AND RELATED PROTEINS.
JPH1192499A (en) 1997-09-22 1999-04-06 Sumitomo Pharmaceut Co Ltd Human growth hormone variant
US6136536A (en) 1997-10-29 2000-10-24 Genetics Institute, Inc. Rapid generation of stable mammalian cell lines producing high levels of recombinant proteins
JP2002506792A (en) 1998-02-27 2002-03-05 ノボ ノルディスク アクティーゼルスカブ N-terminal modified GLP-1 derivative
EP1060192A2 (en) 1998-02-27 2000-12-20 Novo Nordisk A/S Glp-2 derivatives with helix-content exceeding 25 %, forming partially structured micellar-like aggregates
JP2003522099A (en) 1998-02-27 2003-07-22 ノボ ノルディスク アクティーゼルスカブ GLP-1 derivative of GLP-1 having a delayed action profile and exendin
EP1056774A1 (en) 1998-02-27 2000-12-06 Novo Nordisk A/S N-terminally truncated glp-1 derivatives
JP2002504518A (en) 1998-02-27 2002-02-12 ノボ ノルディスク アクティーゼルスカブ GLP-1 derivatives with helix-content of more than 25% forming partially structured micellar-like aggregates
US6656922B2 (en) 1998-05-28 2003-12-02 Mediplex Corporation, Korea Oral delivery of macromolecules
US6358705B1 (en) 1998-07-16 2002-03-19 Novo Nordisk A/S Method of making proteins in transformed yeast cells
CZ295890B6 (en) 1998-12-07 2005-11-16 Societe De Conseils De Recherches Et D'application GLP-1 analogues having aminoisobutyric acid in position 8 and D-arginine in position 36, their use and pharmaceutical compositions in which the analogues are comprised
ES2209885T3 (en) 1999-05-17 2004-07-01 Conjuchem, Inc. LONG-TERM INSULINOTROPIC PEPTIDES.
US6309663B1 (en) 1999-08-17 2001-10-30 Lipocine Inc. Triglyceride-free compositions and methods for enhanced absorption of hydrophilic therapeutic agents
EP1198565A1 (en) 1999-07-07 2002-04-24 Maxygen Aps A method for preparing modified polypeptides
US6528486B1 (en) 1999-07-12 2003-03-04 Zealand Pharma A/S Peptide agonists of GLP-1 activity
EP1076066A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2001-02-14 Zealand Pharmaceuticals A/S Peptides for lowering blood glucose levels
GB2355009A (en) 1999-07-30 2001-04-11 Univ Glasgow Peptides conjugated to bile acids/salts
US20040001827A1 (en) 2002-06-28 2004-01-01 Dennis Mark S. Serum albumin binding peptides for tumor targeting
EP1250126A2 (en) 2000-01-11 2002-10-23 Novo Nordisk A/S Transepithelial delivery of glp-1 derivatives
AU783512B2 (en) 2000-02-11 2005-11-03 Bayer Healthcare Llc Factor VII or VIIa-like molecules
US6926898B2 (en) 2000-04-12 2005-08-09 Human Genome Sciences, Inc. Albumin fusion proteins
IL152804A0 (en) 2000-05-16 2003-06-24 Bolder Biotechnology Inc Methods for refolding proteins containing free cysteine residues
US20020142964A1 (en) 2000-11-02 2002-10-03 Nissen Torben Lauesgaard Single-chain polypeptides
KR20080085082A (en) 2000-12-07 2008-09-22 일라이 릴리 앤드 캄파니 Glp-1 fusion proteins
AU2002219021A1 (en) * 2001-01-11 2002-07-24 Maxygen Aps Variant growth hormone molecules conjugated with macromolecular compounds
FR2819810B1 (en) 2001-01-23 2004-05-28 Pf Medicament NON-GLYCOSYL PEPTIDES DERIVED FROM RSV PROTEIN G AND THEIR USE IN A VACCINE
US6858580B2 (en) 2001-06-04 2005-02-22 Nobex Corporation Mixtures of drug-oligomer conjugates comprising polyalkylene glycol, uses thereof, and methods of making same
AU2002310438B2 (en) 2001-06-14 2008-05-01 The Scripps Research Institute Stabilized proteins with engineered disulfide bonds
EP1412384B1 (en) 2001-06-28 2007-12-26 Novo Nordisk A/S Stable formulation of modified glp-1
EP1423136A4 (en) 2001-08-10 2007-07-25 Epix Pharm Inc Polypeptide conjugates with extended circulating half-lives
AR036711A1 (en) 2001-10-05 2004-09-29 Bayer Corp PEPTIDES THAT ACT AS GLON-RECEPTOR AGONISTS AND AS GLUCAGON RECEPTOR ANTAGONISTS AND THEIR PHARMACOLOGICAL USE METHODS
AU2002341215A1 (en) 2001-11-12 2003-05-26 University Of Wales College Of Medicine Growth hormone variations in humans and their uses
EA008505B1 (en) 2001-11-20 2007-06-29 Фармация Корпорейшн Chemically modified human growth hormone conjugates
JP2003199569A (en) 2001-12-17 2003-07-15 Food Industry Research & Development Inst Transglutaminase gene of streptoverticillium ladakanum and transglutaminase encoded by the same
FR2836382B1 (en) 2002-02-28 2004-08-13 Biomerieux Sa NEW COUPLING AGENTS, THEIR CONJUGATES, AND THE USE OF SUCH CONJUGATES IN DIAGNOSTIC METHODS
EP1587944A4 (en) 2002-03-01 2007-03-21 Dyax Corp Kdr and vegf/kdr binding peptides and their use in diagnosis and therapy
NZ535684A (en) 2002-04-10 2006-03-31 Lilly Co Eli Use of a GLP-1 (glucagon like peptide-1) compound to treat gastroparesis by increasing gastric emptying
ATE488581T1 (en) 2002-04-30 2010-12-15 Bayer Healthcare Llc FACTOR VII OR FACTOR VIIA POLYPEPTIDE VARIANTS
WO2004022593A2 (en) 2002-09-09 2004-03-18 Nautilus Biotech Rational evolution of cytokines for higher stability, the cytokines and encoding nucleic acid molecules
JP2007524579A (en) 2003-02-19 2007-08-30 ソシエテ・ドゥ・コンセイユ・ドゥ・ルシェルシュ・エ・ダプリカーション・シャンティフィック・エス・ア・エス Analogs of GLP-1
BRPI0409976A (en) 2003-05-09 2006-05-09 Novo Nordisk As compound, methods to slow the progression of type 2 diabetes igt, to slow the progression of type 2 diabetes to insulin requiring diabetes, to treat obesity or to prevent overweight to regulate the appetite to induce satiety, to prevent weight gain after being successful in losing weight, to increase energy expenditure, to treat a disease or condition and to treat bulimia, pharmaceutical composition, and use of a compound
JP2007501811A (en) 2003-08-08 2007-02-01 ノボ ノルディスク ヘルス ケア アクチェンゲゼルシャフト Use of galactose oxidase for selective chemical conjugation of a retarder molecule to a protein of therapeutic interest.
JP2007537981A (en) 2003-09-19 2007-12-27 ノボ　ノルディスク　アクティーゼルスカブ Novel plasma protein affinity tag
CN101380476A (en) * 2003-09-19 2009-03-11 诺沃挪第克公司 Albumin-binding derivatives of therapeutic peptides
RU2401276C2 (en) 2003-09-19 2010-10-10 Ново Нордиск А/С Glucagon-like peptide-1 (glp-1) derivatives
WO2005034988A1 (en) 2003-10-10 2005-04-21 Novo Nordisk A/S Long-acting molecules in sustained release formulations
KR20060109940A (en) 2003-12-18 2006-10-23 노보 노르디스크 에이/에스 Novel glp-1 analogues linked to albumin-like agents
ATE461217T1 (en) 2003-12-18 2010-04-15 Novo Nordisk As GLP-1 COMPOUNDS
US20070105770A1 (en) 2004-01-21 2007-05-10 Novo Nordisk A/S Transglutaminase mediated conjugation of peptides
CA2552043A1 (en) 2004-01-21 2005-08-04 Novo Nordisk A/S Transglutaminase mediated conjugation of peptides
US8906676B2 (en) 2004-02-02 2014-12-09 Ambrx, Inc. Modified human four helical bundle polypeptides and their uses
WO2005105148A2 (en) 2004-04-07 2005-11-10 Ares Trading S.A.- Liquid growth hormone formulation
US7906137B2 (en) 2004-05-21 2011-03-15 Mediplex Corporation, Korea Delivery agents for enhancing mucosal absorption of therapeutic agents
MXPA06015049A (en) 2004-07-08 2007-02-08 Novo Nordisk As Polypeptide protracting tags.
US20090176967A1 (en) 2004-08-02 2009-07-09 Novo Nordisk Healthcare A/G Conjugation of FVII
WO2006037810A2 (en) 2004-10-07 2006-04-13 Novo Nordisk A/S Protracted glp-1 compounds
US7998930B2 (en) 2004-11-04 2011-08-16 Hanall Biopharma Co., Ltd. Modified growth hormones
CN103520735B (en) 2004-12-22 2015-11-25 Ambrx公司 Comprise non-naturally encoded amino acid whose formulations of human growth hormone
TWI372629B (en) 2005-03-18 2012-09-21 Novo Nordisk As Acylated glp-1 compounds
AU2006224537A1 (en) 2005-03-18 2006-09-21 Novo Nordisk A/S Extended GLP-1 compounds
US20090062192A1 (en) 2005-03-18 2009-03-05 Novo Nordisk A/S Dimeric Peptide Agonists of the Glp-1 Receptor
EP1893239A2 (en) 2005-06-15 2008-03-05 Novo Nordisk Health Care AG Transglutaminase mediated conjugation of growth hormone
EP1893632B1 (en) 2005-06-17 2015-08-12 Novo Nordisk Health Care AG Selective reduction and derivatization of engineered factor vii proteins comprising at least one non-native cysteine
US20090117640A1 (en) 2005-08-18 2009-05-07 Novo Nordisk Health Care Ag Transglutaminase Variants with Improved Specificity
JP2009506096A (en) 2005-08-30 2009-02-12 ノボ ノルディスク ヘルス ケア アーゲー Liquid preparation of pegylated growth hormone
CN1939534B (en) 2005-09-27 2010-12-01 长春金赛药业股份有限公司 Externally-applied preparation containing human growth incretion or human granular leukocyte macrophage stimulus factor for treating injury ulceration
CN101384711A (en) 2006-01-19 2009-03-11 Ambrx公司 Non-natural amino acid polypeptides having modulated immunogenicity
ES2546282T3 (en) 2006-02-14 2015-09-22 Novo Nordisk Health Care Ag Polypeptide coupling at the C-terminal end
RU2009103198A (en) * 2006-07-07 2010-08-20 Ново Нордиск Хелс Кеа Аг (Ch) NEW PROTEIN CONJUGATES AND METHODS FOR PRODUCING THEM
JP2010504281A (en) 2006-07-27 2010-02-12 エミスフェアー・テクノロジーズ・インク Arylsulfanyl compounds and compositions for delivering active agents
EP2054436A1 (en) 2006-08-18 2009-05-06 Novo Nordisk Health Care AG Transglutaminase variants with improved specificity
US20080095837A1 (en) 2006-08-31 2008-04-24 Emisphere Technologies, Inc. Human growth hormone formulations
ES2426485T3 (en) 2006-08-31 2013-10-23 Novartis Ag Pharmaceutical compositions comprising hGH for oral administration
US8383852B2 (en) 2007-02-16 2013-02-26 Emisphere Technologies, Inc. Compounds having a cyclic moiety and compositions for delivering active agents
GB0716328D0 (en) 2007-08-21 2007-10-03 Univ Bath Detection and functionalisation of S-nitrosylated polypeptides
ES2532116T3 (en) 2007-09-05 2015-03-24 Novo Nordisk A/S Peptides derived with A-B-C-D and their therapeutic uses
JP5977945B2 (en) 2008-08-06 2016-08-24 ノヴォ・ノルディスク・ヘルス・ケア・アーゲー Conjugate proteins with long-term in vivo efficacy
CN102149726A (en) 2008-09-09 2011-08-10 诺沃—诺迪斯克保健股份有限公司 Growth hormone conjugate with increased stability
JP5591243B2 (en) * 2008-09-12 2014-09-17 ノボ・ノルデイスク・エー／エス Method for acylating peptides or proteins
CN102292349B (en) * 2009-01-22 2016-04-13 诺沃—诺迪斯克保健股份有限公司 Stable growth hormone compound
WO2010102886A1 (en) 2009-02-19 2010-09-16 Novo Nordisk A/S Modification of factor viii
JP6086528B2 (en) 2009-08-06 2017-03-01 ノヴォ・ノルディスク・ヘルス・ケア・アーゲー Growth hormone with long-term in vivo efficacy
AU2011208625C1 (en) * 2010-01-22 2022-08-18 Novo Nordisk Health Care Ag Growth hormones with prolonged in-vivo efficacy
RU2012134974A (en) 2010-01-22 2014-02-27 Ново Нордиск Хелс Кеа Аг STABILIZED GROWTH HORMONE COMPOUND
ES2582590T3 (en) 2010-02-16 2016-09-13 Novo Nordisk A/S Purification method
CN105120887A (en) 2013-04-05 2015-12-02 诺和诺德保健股份有限公司 Growth hormone compound formulation

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060183197A1 (en) * 2001-01-11 2006-08-17 Andersen Kim V Variant growth hormone molecules conjugated with macromolecules compounds
US20070203058A1 (en) * 2003-09-19 2007-08-30 Novo Nordisk A/S Novel Glp-1 Derivatives

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TWI508737B (en) 2015-11-21
EP2525834A1 (en) 2012-11-28
CN103002918B (en) 2016-05-04
SI2525834T1 (en) 2019-10-30
EP2525834B1 (en) 2019-07-17
FIC20210013I1 (en) 2021-05-21
CN106139158B (en) 2024-06-21
KR20130028053A (en) 2013-03-18
WO2011089255A1 (en) 2011-07-28
US20140107324A1 (en) 2014-04-17
RS59459B1 (en) 2019-11-29
JP2016026204A (en) 2016-02-12
RU2605627C2 (en) 2016-12-27
CN102834109A (en) 2012-12-19
KR101813595B1 (en) 2017-12-29
PL2525834T3 (en) 2020-10-19
CN118767117A (en) 2024-10-15
JP5875527B2 (en) 2016-03-02
MX345736B (en) 2017-02-14
US20200102568A1 (en) 2020-04-02
AU2011208625B2 (en) 2014-05-08
CA2787890C (en) 2020-01-14
CN118767115A (en) 2024-10-15
FR21C1029I2 (en) 2023-06-16
NO2021023I1 (en) 2021-05-26
CN103002918A (en) 2013-03-27
RU2012134975A (en) 2014-02-27
JP2013518038A (en) 2013-05-20
US20120309944A1 (en) 2012-12-06
HUS2100029I1 (en) 2021-09-28
BR112012018116B1 (en) 2022-06-21
IL220605A (en) 2017-09-28
CN102834109B (en) 2016-01-20
MX2012008000A (en) 2012-08-03
BR112012018116A2 (en) 2018-05-08
FR21C1029I1 (en) 2021-08-27
TW201127397A (en) 2011-08-16
AU2011208625A1 (en) 2012-07-19
CN106139158A (en) 2016-11-23
US8779109B2 (en) 2014-07-15
CA2787890A1 (en) 2011-07-28
CN118767116A (en) 2024-10-15
AU2011208625C1 (en) 2022-08-18
US9695226B2 (en) 2017-07-04
US20170239362A1 (en) 2017-08-24

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20200102568A1 (en) Growth Hormones with Prolonged In-Vivo Efficacy
US20200306382A1 (en) Growth Hormones with Prolonged In-Vivo Efficacy
US20100197573A1 (en) Transglutaminase Mediated Conjugation of Growth Hormone
US20110223151A1 (en) Conjugated proteins with prolonged in vivo efficacy
ES2745484T3 (en) Growth hormones with prolonged efficacy in vivo
AU2013204527A1 (en) Growth hormones with prolonged in-vivo efficacy
ES2703388T3 (en) Growth hormones with prolonged efficacy in vivo

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION